WO2001024600A9 - Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor - Google Patents

Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor

Info

Publication number
WO2001024600A9
WO2001024600A9 PCT/SE2000/001950 SE0001950W WO0124600A9 WO 2001024600 A9 WO2001024600 A9 WO 2001024600A9 SE 0001950 W SE0001950 W SE 0001950W WO 0124600 A9 WO0124600 A9 WO 0124600A9
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
stations
wireless
station
switching
network
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/SE2000/001950
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2001024600A2 (en
WO2001024600A3 (en
Inventor
Karl-Axel Aahl
Original Assignee
Fiberless Soc Sverige Ab
Karl-Axel Aahl
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fiberless Soc Sverige Ab, Karl-Axel Aahl filed Critical Fiberless Soc Sverige Ab
Priority to AU79801/00A priority Critical patent/AU7980100A/en
Publication of WO2001024600A2 publication Critical patent/WO2001024600A2/en
Publication of WO2001024600A3 publication Critical patent/WO2001024600A3/en
Publication of WO2001024600A9 publication Critical patent/WO2001024600A9/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L45/00Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L47/00Traffic control in data switching networks
    • H04L47/10Flow control; Congestion control
    • H04L47/38Flow control; Congestion control by adapting coding or compression rate
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This invention relates to a new physical and logical communications network and an architecture based on adoption of stations with wireless communication and switching between ports.
  • the network solution could typically be implemented as a terrestrial network servicing multiple users at scattered locations.
  • the invention offers principally any type of digital communication and/or distribution including broadband services by connecting users or applications at multiple stations' locations in an area which may be local or regional when applied as a terrestrial network.
  • the network flexibility, capacity and capabilities are capable of growing as the number of stations is increasing.
  • the invention provides a self-generating capability expansion the more the network i.e. the more stations is growing.
  • Stations include means for wireless communication between station sites, including very high capacity (in relation to the capacity per port) and fast switching function capability to switch and route digital data between sites through pairs of ports arranged for selected transfer capacity and to achieve seamless transparent flows of data with principally negligible time delay for the respective user data flows routed through such station.
  • Wireless transmission through each pair of ports through the air includes conversion of digital information to be applied on one or more carriers. These carriers are up- or down-converted to suitable high frequencies including radio bands and/or laser frequencies.
  • the invention also relates to practical system implementations, and a primary focus has been laid on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol switching and/routing as it ideally combined with the invention.
  • the invention does not exclude use of other switching solutions like ATM.
  • conversion enabling transfer of other types of signals than the used switching platform is described.
  • Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless methods for transferring digital information for data and telecommunication applications varies typically depending on transfer requirements. Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in different ways.
  • One prior method is to establish fixed connections without bandwidth variation for any uplink or downlink direction as it is done with point - point radio links. These are typically used for bit transparent continuous flows and no bandwidth or capacity variation between applications regardless of traffic demands or if interference occurs.
  • Another prior method is to arrange a wireless access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is connected to a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunication users' via remote wireless terminals.
  • a station central/base
  • a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunication users' via remote wireless terminals.
  • a central wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless terminals placed at or near the location of the users.
  • another network typically backbone
  • repeaters with or without drop and insert traffic capabilities may be used to expand the coverage in cases where the central node is not able to connect directly.
  • the user at the end in these cases has a simple radio terminal which does not need advanced functionality and the central or base station includes connection to one switching and/or routing platforms.
  • the capacity and means (radio etc.) of a central station are shared by a group of terminals arranged in various schemes, typically arranged in a star topology point-multipoint (P-MP) but also more complex topologies exist.
  • the access solutions includes typically sharing in time, frequency and codes TDMA, FDMA, CDMA or combinations thereof in order to share common equipment and radio transmission capacity among multiple users, with variable capacity demands for each connection.
  • SDMA is provided by steerable (narrow) antenna beams applied in order to save spectrum, allow more users, increase the transmission speed, and decrease the influence of multi-path propagation.
  • the invention offers a wireless solution including: establishment of connection of backbone solutions to other systems, accesses to other switching and /or routing platforms, switched connections between base stations or similar of internal inherent and/or external wireless access solutions and/or communications between users in wireless system including inherent Internet network functionality and/or with users in inherent or external wireless access solutions (including radio Ian, WLAN) fixed as well as mobile and, connections between connected users connected within a wireless solution to applications outside of such system.
  • Backbone solutions and user traffic capability and inherent Internet capability transfer refer to digital transmission connection of capacities required for speech, video conferencing and media distribution from kbit to few Mbit/s (like El/Tl, E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit/s) up to at least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities) and gradually up to at least 1000 Mbit/s or more in order to include through broadband traffic and simultaneous multi user performance for media entertainment and business traffic.
  • transfer rates towards and including 1000 Mbit/s or multiples of it may be applicable in radio and/or laser transmission applications via the wireless ports of the wireless system which inherently also is designed to be capable of supporting both high speed and secure communication arrangements.
  • the invention includes support of single and/or groups of users and communications services similar to leased lines or similar to virtual leased lines (with varying demands and capacity over time) between external applications and users ranging from a simple voice IP to advanced Internet video streaming services like product animations and entertainment films, news gathering etc. requiring up to one Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s or much more per individual user on demand.
  • the invention provides various routing alternatives in order to improve transfer capacity in a network implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc.
  • the invention is shown realised into systems based on fast connectionless type of switching.
  • This type of switching function is shown to include adaptive wireless communication means between selected pairs of ports.
  • Packet-oriented transmission services including control of various Internet Protocol (IP) based solutions are supported.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • This include means to support of interactive bursted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP protocol or similar.
  • the invention handles IP based real time synchronous or seamless synchronism or near real-time IP protocols in order to support continuous streams of data typically required for voice and/or image transfer through such wireless systems.
  • a station is considered combined with at least one high capacity switch function with comprehensive switching and/or routing functionalities between User Ports or Terminal Ports (UPs or TPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs).
  • a WP contains at least one wireless receiver and transmitter and modulator-demodulator (modem) and means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. between WPs.
  • Modem modulator-demodulator
  • Means are included for coordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency re-use, organise communication between each pair of WPs and UPs / TPs.
  • Such means include selective adoption of more than one sub-carrier, selection of transmission speed on sub-carriers or sub-channels at least for radio transmission.
  • Means are included to signal information from packet data including real time IP and/or interactive IP data to be transferred through WPs to detect the bandwidth or capacity transfer requirement between each pair of WPs based on the information derived from the inherent switch (routing) function and transfer such information to respective WP and/or WPs involved in the transaction to make it possible to adopt to required capacity and quality performance.
  • Means are inherently included at each WP to receive control information and/or transmit control information i.e. to select carrier and/or sub-carrier set number of carriers (bandwidth), adjust speed, adjust selective sub-channel level (to meet quality and/or standard spectrum mask performance), adjust error correction to meet appropriate quality performance, and adjust frequency on individual carriers and/or groups of carriers.
  • the invention enables traffic and/or distribution of data between stations to be switched/routed effectively between the wireless ports and the user or terminal ports based on the route needed, bandwidth availability, terrain and line of sight situation, redundant routing for security and/or capacity and/or based on sharing of frequency spectrum requirement in space with others to avoid degradation interference.
  • Data is switched, routed, dropped, or inserted at any place where a station exists.
  • each new station inherently increases the total capacity, total wireless capacity and increases routing capability and in fact potential re-use efficiency in an area as means for adopting to new routing alternatives or set-ups and variable transmission performance capabilities is applied such as control of OFDM modems and transmitted energy and new direction alternatives when new stations are inserted.
  • the implementation of the method as described based on fast switches includes the possibility to establish principally unrestricted communications network topologies over relatively large areas locally regionally i.e. from about a few meters to tens of kilometres or more (before traffic is trunked through other backbone solutions like fibre etc. to another area) because the design of the switching function is such that a negligible time delay loss is achievable using fast connectionless switch platforms.
  • Fast switching means a relatively short time delay per station in relation to the communication services that are transferred and passing stations. For dual communication like speech- or video telephony 4-5 ms may be required in total. As an example, this allows 100 microseconds per station when up to about 40 - 50 hops in total are taking part in an eventual conversation.
  • high speed switching capacity performance is applied, in comparison to the traffic transfer capacity between each pair of WPs, at least at stations through which traffic shall be routed, thus allowing potentially multiple WPs to be applied in various directions to scattered stations and users.
  • This further improves the possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum more efficiently in particular when directed antenna beams are being used for communication between wireless ports. Due to the increased separation in elevations of beams, the more stations used in an area the more frequency resource sharing is optimised in such area.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
  • variable WPs can be working in accordance with different radio transmission and radio access standard requirements including means in OFDM modems enabling to select directly and/or control remotely via network management functions and/or automatically depending on bandwidth and/or capacity and/or quality requirement.
  • the invention enables resource-sharing in wireless ports with methods such as TDMA, FDMA, CDMA and spread spectrum Frequency Hopping as in the radiolan access standard IEEE 802.11 traditionally used for access radio solutions with or without SDMA.
  • means using OFDM modems to perform traffic flows between radio based WPs is applicable to perform communication between WPs including means to control bandwidth, speed, transmission power, quality, standard emulation etc.
  • the invention provides for assigning of selected activation and number of selected sub-channels (and/or sub-carriers) allowing gradual selection of the required bandwidth and transfer capacity between each pair of ports. It includes inherently or actively further means for adjustments between each pair of ports; possible selection of modulation level per sub-channel, error correction per subchannel, transmission power regulation per sub-channel and groups of channels in relation to transfer quality performance requirements, hop lengths, speed requirements, control of actual frequency spectrum performance requirement, adoption to wireless access or radio link spectrum and/or such equipment standard performance requirements, climate factors, terrain, redundancy routes based on bit error rate performance requirements and/or capacity requirement.
  • control functions may be realised as automatic or manual or a combination via network management functions which includes SNMP adoption and IP communication capability between an external data network and the switch at any station and its connected WPs via IP protocols.
  • Multiple carriers as used in OFDM has several advantages allowing much higher robustness against multipath influence (delay spread) with relatively longer time lengths on high level modem methods in comparison to single carriers. It has however some drawbacks as the radio transceivers have to take into consideration peak powers which may occur instantly. Effective precautions to eliminate and/or minimise these peak power effects are included like Coded ODFM.
  • Another advantage of using multi carriers in general via OFDM and/or Coded OFDM and/or generally other means is that less noise in its respective sub-channel occur than in a corresponding wider band single carrier channel. This is usable to bridge either longer hops or use correspondingly more complex modulation methods which would increase the potential transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) per channel on the same hop lengths.
  • the invention includes means to arrange functionalities for stations to virtually act as central stations (base stations) and/or terminal stations corresponding to wireless access systems based on various equipment resource sharing and capacity sharing principles.
  • network stations include means for virtually acting as one or multiple access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes and/or transparent to radio link solutions with variable bandwidth requirements.
  • wireless intends to include any kind of electromagnetic transmission through the air including transmission systems in radio frequency bands as well as light wave and/or laser technologies in suitable wavelengths for air transmission.
  • light wave or laser communication has a narrower beam than a directed radio antenna, which leads to significantly less degradation effect by multipath reflections typical in radio transmission for high speed transfer.
  • Laser has thus a potential possibility to support higher transmission channel speeds on each carrier. Speeds like 1000 Mbit/s or in fact higher speed, should such standards occur in connectionless communications, are possible. As an example these could be based on wavelength multiplexing technology. Laser communication does not typically require a licence. Risk of severe interference would normally not occur between stations.
  • Radio has its advantages and the invention enables a combination of the two transmission systems.
  • the combination would allow communication of both radio and light-waves in parallel on the same routes and/or via different routes between stations, including laser transmission WPs that are backed by radio transmission WPs either to work in parallel or being used when required.
  • the invention provides for setting of transfer capacity via network management functions and/or possible automatic regulation of transfer capacity for the different types of real time and interactive transfer at the respective involved WPs. It includes further quality transfer settings between pairs of ports and defines possible selections of routes and other functions specifically mentioned for interacting and assigning transfer speed based on data derived from traffic at selected switches or switches for traffic requirement passing respective WPs.
  • the invention provides a non-hierarchical wireless topology and internal switching capability within the network and it allow access between any two stations if air communication i.e. line of sight is possible. This is important as it saves spectrum and investments reduce equipment costs and speed up new infrastructure for broadband access requirement. This is different in comparison to standard wireless access system (in particular P-MP topologies) where terminal stations are not allowed to talk to each other.
  • TDMA dynamic time sharing
  • SDMA space sharing mechanisms
  • the present invention provides a station for wireless switching and communication comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
  • WP wireless port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
  • the wireless port has a controllable bandwidth e.g. by means of an OFDM modem, wherein the bandwidth utilised by the modem is controlled by varying the number of subchannels used, varying the modulation level, varying the transmission power, and/or varying the error correction.
  • the wireless port may be capable of emulating various wireless standards and protocols and resource sharing schemes such as FDMA, TDMA, CDMA or combinations of them.
  • the station further comprises a network management port (NMP) for communication with an external network management unit.
  • NMP network management port
  • the switching unit is adapted both to connectionless and circuit-oriented switching and conversion therebetween, wherein the connectionless switching is based on packet switching and/or IP protocols, and the circuit-oriented switching is based on ATM.
  • the present invention is also directed to a network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations of the above type, further comprising a network management unit capable of adding and deleting stations in the network.
  • some stations are capable of functioning as repeating and terminal stations.
  • an external switching unit is provided for controlling the internal switching units of the stations.
  • the external switching unit is adapted to set up alternative routes between stations.
  • complementary parallel routes are set up between pairs of stations.
  • One complementary parallel route may be a radio channel, e.g. low bandwidth microwave, and the other complementary parallel route may be a high bandwidth laser channel.
  • a wireless port may be adapted to work as a central for other wireless ports, sharing its capacity with a number of underlying wireless ports, such underlying wireless ports being able to commonly share its capacity with the central wireless port.
  • a wireless port, which is sharing its capacity with other stations, and working as an underlying wireless port to these other stations may adapted to share its transmission resource capacity with other stations as a central.
  • a wireless port which is working as an underlying station towards a central may be adapted to work as an underlying wireless port to other central wireless ports.
  • the network is capable of emulating generic access systems.
  • a wireless port is adapted to be connected to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufacturer's base station.
  • the present invention is also directed to a port unit for wireless switching and communication for connection to a station of the above type.
  • the port unit comprises a modem and a radio unit and is arranged to be controlled by a control program through the station to which it is connected.
  • This invention describes a method for establishing a new physical and logical communications network and architecture based on adoption of wireless communication and switching between ports.
  • the network solution could typically be implemented as a terrestrial network servicing multiple users at scattered locations. However airborne locations of stations carried by various types of aircraft's, balloons etc. and/or satellite based etc. variations is applicable should it be required.
  • This document is describing a method with complementary methods, which makes it possible to offer digital broadband services by connecting users at multiple stations locations in an area.
  • the network flexibility, capacity and capabilities are capable to grow as the number of station are expanding thanks to the principles used on the contrary too earlier methods and/or systems known. In fact it leads to a self-generating capability expansion the more the network is growing, here coned to Wireless - Self-Expansion Network Switching, W-SENS.
  • Stations include means for wireless communication between station sites, including vary high capacity (typically in relation to traffic transferred capacity per station connection) fast switching function capability to switch and or route digital data between sites through pair of ports arranged for selected transfer capacity.
  • Wireless transmission through each pair of ports through the air includes conversion of digital information to be applied on one or more carriers. These carriers are up or down converted to suitable high frequency electro-magnetic carrier frequency from including radio bands and/or above, including laser frequencies etc.
  • the method implemented in systems leads to surprising advantages (in relation to previous used wireless solutions) in terms of increased network capacity, flexibility and to a capability that is in practice will raise with network complexity.
  • connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol switching and/routing as it ideally combined with the method.
  • the method, sub-methods, etc. does not excludes use of other switching solutions like ATM etc.
  • conversion of transfer requirement of other types of signals than the used switching platform and/or is described.
  • Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless methods for transferring digital information for data & telecommunication applications varies typically depending on transfer requirement. Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or of asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in different ways. One method is to establish fixed connections without bandwidth variation for any uplink or down link direction as it is done with point - point radio links. These are typically used for bit transparent continuous flows between applications regardless of traffic demands.
  • Another method is to arrange a wireless access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is connected to a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunications users wireless terminals.
  • the communication between central/base and terminal stations operates in TDMA, FDMA or CDMA or combinations of them.
  • Spatial division (SDMA) may be arranged by controlling antenna beams to point in directions of each communication requirement.
  • the Radio Link (RL) consisting of a direct line of site connection or multiple hops in a repeated chain and/or loops and/or branch structure via multiplexing/de-multiplexing arrangement.
  • a central wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless terminals placed at or near the location of the users.
  • repeaters may be used to expand the coverage in cases where the central node do not radio optically are able to directly connect.
  • Digital wireless media distribution system are typically considered separate solutions from these mentioned solutions above in that they have been focused on operating in broadcast mode. I'.e. these may be aimed to transmit huge information in the direction (unbalanced) where multiple scattered users are located (from a central node -downlink) and eventually less information could be arranged in a return channel (uplink), if such exists.
  • Modern interactive communication like Internet, WEB communication, including speech, image transfers and possibly media distribution requires more than only one-way solution. Further bandwidth requirement may vary in time and direction, which should be handled properly in order to make it possible to utilise spectrum effectively and improve the traffic transfers on invested infrastructure.
  • radio access solutions is capacity and means (radio etc.) of a central station shared by a group of terminals arranged in various schemes, typically arranged in a star topology point-multipoint (P-MP) nut also more complex topologies are shown.
  • SDMA arranged by.steerable (narrow) antenna beams applied in order to save spectrum, allow more users, increase the transmission speed, decrease influence of multi-path etc.
  • radio links offer integrated service adaptable capacity, multiple path capability, or increasing capabilities adaptive for multi-user connection requirements etc.
  • these access solutions supports an all to all communication mode as in a mesh network topology structure, or support the capacity typically offered via radio links to multiple users, or including network capability in is self. Neither does a combination of them.
  • the high capacity transfer would typically be depending on multiple direction of point - point transfer transmission method and modem used etc. Also so called connections can be indirectly considered as access for many users groups, a company connection etc.
  • supporting groups of users may include multiple applications and users ranging from a simple voice to advance Internet and entertainment films etc. requiring up to one Mbit s or more per individual user. Connecting an apartment block could mean requirement of 100 Mbit s or more.
  • the method and system based on the methods concerned is applicable be able to support such connection services.
  • Such system as a tool for operators, Internet service providers, corporate networks etc. or mobile operator including W-CDMA base station transmission.
  • the support of transfer and/or access and/or connection should at least be such that the use via the method and sub-methods and suggested systems described here is supposed to include the offer of capacities, which realistically and effectively support multiple users specifically in a city or sub-urban environment. This bearing in mind the emerging network capacity in next generation networks like Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, and other coming generation of connectionless type of networks standards and for connection oriented ATM, DTM switching and transmission.
  • the method and sub-method including ability to various routing alternatives in order to improve transfer capacity in a network implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc.
  • the method is shown realised into systems based on fast connectionless type of switching as it is exemplified in this document.
  • This type of switching function is shown to include adaptive wireless communication means between selected pair of ports.
  • IP Internet Protocols
  • the packet oriented transmission services including control of various Internet Protocols (IP) based solutions would thus meant to be supported.
  • IP Internet Protocols
  • This include means to support of interactive busted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP protocol or similar.
  • a station is considered combined with at least one high capacity switch function with comprehensive switching and/or routing functionality's between User Ports (UPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs).
  • a WP contains at least one wireless receiver and transmitter and modulator demodulator and means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. between WPs. Means are included for co-ordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency re-use, organise communication between each pair of WPs and Ups, Further to organise the sum of pair of WPs to achieve appropriate quality, transfer capacity in total an any area where such system is implemented.
  • Such means include selective adoption of more than one sub- carrier, variations capability selection of transmission speed on sub-carriers or sub-channels.
  • the method and sub-methods could than effectively be implemented as a new type of comprehensive wireless network system serving multiple users in an area. It would not only be usable for transparent connections through the system or used as an access network, it would in addition effectively be capable of serving users connected with connectivity within such system.
  • functions including backbone (switching and transmission) facilities offered to other solutions (example wireless access solution), access type of solutions (transparent pipes through) for other systems, connections and internal switching between users located at any station.
  • packet data oriented connectionless switching capability at each station is shown typically closely integrated with wireless transmission facilities (as wireless ports, examples fig 1 ,2,3,4,5,6, 16, 17a, 17b, 18... 33 etc.). It includes potentially offering of integrated switching services for switching WPs but also local switching in combination including transfers between UPs on other stations wirelessly connected via WPs. Thus, virtually offer as a switch/router function for local and/or remote communications requirements. Similar functions from additional network platform extended are applicable and/or possible to integrate between other switches/routers as shown in fig.16, 17 and 18. This examples shows how the method implemented could effectively support the realisation of a wireless network based both as standalone networks and as extensions and effectively integration with other for example already existing networks, fig 18.
  • a method and means to secure such synchronous data transfer is to assign transfer bandwidth through the air between the respective WPs to get enough assurance of not loosing data, us real time type of IP protocols use of priorities for such traffic etc. by the IP protocols.
  • a switch function principally available at all locations where a station is located example 2 at fig 4 or 2' or 2" at fig 16.
  • multiple services similar to what is possible via standard switching/routing platforms is effectively obtainable by arranging communication between the stations (10, or 10', 11 , or 11' etc. 12 fig. 1 ,2, 18 etc.). Further provided the physical implementation of a station with the mentioned capabilities switching functions, transmission arrangements etc.
  • P-MP point - multipoint
  • the method and sub- methods include that traffic between stations it switched/routed effectively between the wireless ports and the user or terminal ports based on the route needed, bandwidth availability, terrain and line of sight situation, redundant routing for security and/or capacity etc. This is exemplified for connectionless platform where multiple stations at various locations contains a high speed fast switching connectionless switch.
  • This switch in it self could be seen as a backbone switch for a traditional wireless access or other networks. If each such switch is able to transport data between the other distributed switches in the order of Mbit/s or better Gigabit/s capacities it would lead to the creation of comprehensive and powerful network. Data is switched routed dropped inserted at any place where a station occur. In addition each new station inherently increases the total wireless capacity and increase routing capability and in fact potential re-use efficiency in an area. These types system solutions are generally coned to Wireless W-Self Expansion Network Switching (W-SENS).
  • W-SENS Wireless W-Self Expansion Network Switching
  • connectionless approach includes that scattered stations principally "all stations” placed a locations that "sees” each other electro-magnetically is able to transfer data via corresponding WPs equipped for radio or laser, light-wave. No specific requirement for absolute time synchronisation such as for TDMA access solutions is required. This results in a solution that offers significant flexibility where any new station creates a new possibility to address other stations. In addition it leads to an inherent increased network capacity capability and increase improve routing possibilities, see also figure 25 a, b, c. This further improves the possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum more efficient when directed antenna beams are being used for communication between wireless ports, examples fig 1a and b. I.e. due to the separation in elevations of beams is space and frequency resource sharing implied in the area. It includes means for bandwidth adjustments, transmit power regulation etc. to improve it further.
  • the method and other methods related is in this more detailed system implementation examples in this description is mainly concentration on the implementations including combined use of switches and/or routers typically implemented capable of handling data flows between such as Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports connected.
  • the high speed switch functions (Fast and Giga) could be considered fast switches capable of keeping the switching time low and relatively constant in order to support streams through each switch with neglected delay in order to effectively transfer seamless synchronous transmissions transparently through multiple stations. These capabilities could typically be needed to seamless transparently handle both typical telecommunications flows of data through such system and typical burst interactive type of data effectively.
  • An example of one of many possible implementations is to combine a switch function capable of handling at least multiple fast Ethernet (but preferably for very high capacity capability Gigabit Ethernet switches) port rates and assigned to it one or a selected number of WPs.
  • the highly competitive data & telecom market leads to possible development highly integrated ASICs of low cost, or combinations of ASICs, FPGAs etc. specifically of digital electronics.
  • the WPs include modem, signalling processing units and electronics and functions to arrange appropriate air protocols, standardised or proprietary. If transmission functions and switching functions etc. (see figure 33) are realised in highly integrated electronic devices in ASICs, FPGAs, DSPs, MMICs combined if necessary with discrete radio components filters etc. it could be arranged and mounted directly at the back of an radio antenna and take very little space. In volumes could the cost of such physical units be marginal, as any other commercial electronic item.
  • the stations are further arranged so that the full use the transmission capacity of a each pair of one or multiple WPs could be used, instead of sharing radio channel capacity (and radio head) as in the case with traditional radio access TDMA, CDMA, FDMA.
  • the W-SENS solution has further a benefit in comparison with the traditional wireless access approach today where wireless terminals under a base stations is designed only for access when it have no network intelligence, switching capabilities which enable intelligent repeating capability.
  • the method include a possibility to add a sub-method where the share of a WPs radio transmission units and radio channel by allowing resource- sharing methods like TDMA, FDMA and CDMA with or without SDMA arranged between WPs.
  • a WP is in such case sharing its total capacity between more than one WP at different stations, exemplified in figure 3, 551 and 17 a, b.
  • the design of a station including possible implementation of added WPs in order to expand area coverage, numbers of connections, routing alternatives and capacity etc.
  • it stations where equipped with a switch function of a capacity of up to about 10-16 Gbit/s total switching capacity. If it where capable of handling at least a number of 30 x 100 and 8 x 1000 Mbit/s ports.
  • Every new such station located in a certain area would be able to be expanded to 30-40 directions at least. Every new such station could in addition connect up to 30-40 new stations. This leads to a tremendous increase of switching power and new alternatives.
  • Means to adopt such new topology and to use the gained switching and/or routing capability and tools for re-arrange the network topology is applicable. I.e. change transmitted electro-magnetic power, change of routes, change of transmission transfer capacity of WPs etc.
  • the multiple ports usable WP and UP, TP at every new station location is gradually potentially increasing the actual capacity transfer capability in the air and on the ground.
  • Narrow beams are applicable in high radio frequency bands (via directed lobes) and via laser etc.
  • multiple directions could be served on overlapping carrier frequencies from any station providing a reasonable interference discrimination is applied in radio bands by the directed antennas etc.
  • 1-2 degrees on a main lobe (3 dB level) could allow simultaneous use of spectrum on an direction 3-4 degrees of the first etc. as isolation would be 15 - 20 dB or similar.
  • Each such station could service connection between up to 30 similar stations (without using conventional equipment resource sharing mechanisms as used in conventional TDMA, FDMA, CDMA) solutions. Further every of the 30 scattered stations could from their location serve 30 more and these 30 could serve another 30 etc. These example shows that it could lead to a more or less unlimited number of possible stations and extreme high traffic transfer capacity via the air in any geographical area like a city, sub-urban or rural environment. This on a limited spectrum as methods functions and means for increasingly efficient sharing of frequency spectrum is achieved by the including of beams direction, power regulation, modulation level adoption, routing selection, improved number of terminal points etc. (see fig. 25 and 22).
  • the stations would be scattered in an area where pairs of WPs are isolated effectively from other pairs of WPs in space by their position, transmission elevation and directed antenna laser beams etc.
  • the switching and direction capacity mention above was only one of many possible examples of figures.
  • the power is further demonstrated where each station limited to 4 WPs only. Scenery of a gradual implementation into such network is demonstrated by fig. 22 a and b. I.e. number of possible stations superseding the level mentioned 4°, 4 1 , 4 2 ,4 3 , 4 4 , .. etc. stations. I.e. > 256 stations using four levels where 4 WPs per station.
  • the method described includes ability to establish communication between station in the same network in various directions at the same and/or different time on overlapping or adjacent frequency spectrum using spatial separation by antennas and/or lasers. No actuate timing and synchronisation requirement being necessarily implemented as proposed in earlier implementations using spatial separations for communication in multiple user environments. This is because pair of WP is establishing communication principally irrespective of communication between other pair of WPs at the same stations or on other stations.
  • W-SENS includes options means for virtual operating as multiple functions similar to P-P radio links by adoption of UPs and assignment of enough transfer capacity between involved pair of WPs for a seamless bit and/or byte transparent transfer between UPs.
  • W-SENS includes means to arrange functionality's for stations to virtually function act as central station (base stations) and/or terminal stations corresponding to wireless access systems based on various equipment resource sharing and capacity sharing principles. e.
  • W-SENS network stations include means for virtually acting as one or multiple access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes and/or transparent radio link solution, see figure 20, 21.
  • the fact that it includes means for emulating these other functions, its own network functionality's, means to operate as backbone to other external access systems etc. leads to further significant advantages of the W-SENS approach in comparisons.
  • the method and sub-methods include means to conform W-SENS to act as various existing and evolving wireless standards of solutions mentioned in the areas mentioned above an in addition work on its own conditions in addition, superseding the existing solutions.
  • It includes means for internal operation in the modes similar to radio links, laser links, TDMA, FDMA and CDMA including spatial arrangements. I.e. mean to arranging selection of transmission capacity between switches via WPs arranged in P-MP mode of operations between WPs in FDMA, TDMA, CDMA schemes or combinations with or without spatial coverage by directed antenna beams, etc.
  • Each station connected in a W- SENS including wireless switching and/or routing capability is arranged with means to arrange one or more additional connection by adding WPs and establishes connections with other stations.
  • Functional method and means to arrange communication selected transfer rates is included as sub- methods to the method. These sub-methods include selection of variable transfer rate selection (speed) by changing modem level and bandwidth adoptions in addition in accordance to, transfer rate required, bandwidth available, transfer quality performance needs etc. between each pair of WPs and/or UPs and/or TPs.
  • the functional method and means implemented into systems W-SENS include means to support much higher bandwidth to multiple scattered users via air transmission from any station in comparison to wireless access mentioned.
  • the method which include possibility to combine distant wireless switching routing capability with local switching between ports which may or may not be including wireless ports, see fig. 17 a, b and fig 18.
  • wireless means including any kind of electromagnetic transmission through the air including transmission systems in radio frequency bands as well as laser technologies in suitable wavelengths for air transmission.
  • a reason for including laser communication is several, in spite of its hop length limitations under certain air conditions. One is because it has a narrower beam than a directed radio antenna, which leads to significantly less degradation effect by multipath reflections typical in radio transmission for high speed transfer. Laser has thus a potential possibility to support higher transmission channel speeds like 1000 Mbit/s or in fact higher speed should such standards occur in connectionless communications. Laser communication does not require a licence, Risk of severe interfering would normally not occur between stations.
  • Radio has its advantages and the method include sub-methods for combing the two transmission systems. I.e. by including means to use the best from the two possibilities. Such added methods would allow communication of both radio and light-waves in parallel on the same routes and/or via different routes between station.
  • a W-SENS implementation includes laser transmission WPs that are backed by radio transmission WPs either to work in parallel or being used when required. This includes the possibility to use more than one route between stations and/or WPs for redundancy or other purposes (see just one example of many possible in fig 23).
  • WPs include possible use of fully transparent speeds between switches and/or selectable rates.
  • station WPs may be interconnected at fixed transmission rates, and other WPs based on variable rates.
  • a WP based on laser frequencies could be chosen (to be applied) for fixed capacity transfer capability i.e. full 100 Mbit/s and/or 1000 Mbit/s capacity because of the availability of frequency spectrum etc. In this way is also a totally full transparency between WPs achievable.
  • Methods functions and means for function is included to let the different routes uses different types of WPs. One may be to utilise variable capacity adjustments between pair of WPs (P-P) and another for fixed bandwidth allocation between WPs.
  • Fixed bandwidth could typically applied for laser irrespective of variable traffic demand, as spectrum space is less critical in comparison to radio frequency WPs.
  • Methods functions and means are applicable for communication in W-SENS approaches where one or more WPs supporting very higher capacity transfer and other WPs adjusted for less capacity transfer or not used at all, at least as long as the corresponding high capacity WP link(s) is performing well.
  • Means are included to handle traffic situations in such a way as an eventual degradation could be virtually as invisible as possible to connected users in time period when as an example another link degrades severely. I.e.
  • radio communication WPs that at least are including functions to be adjusted to various selectable transfer rates is applicable at selective time being transferring higher rates if another alternative route is degraded.
  • adding of another route is applicable as an alternative or in addition, see fig. 25.
  • one port - port communication between two stations is connected via radio and another via laser. The laser could be based on constant allocation of the bandwidth for simplicity reason and cost effectiveness and more or less meet full transparency with high speed communication port to port between WPs.
  • a further example between two stations is a laser connection, which typically work well in short ranges, with clear sky etc. over few km.
  • a radio transmission connection which is more insensitive to environment condition but which would have limited frequency bandwidth available in comparison would be backing a laser if it degrades or the two pair of WPs could work in parallel.
  • the radio connection include means to adjust the transmission capacity (bandwidth, modulation, coding) to meet higher speed transmission requirements under the time the (fixed) typically laser transmission system is degraded during rain, snow, fog air pollution etc.
  • W-SENS could typically include methods functions and means at stations containing of at least a switch function with a certain capacity, at least one WP and optionally one UP and /TP or more for traffic connections, if required (if not repeating only).
  • W-SENS switching is applied based on packet switching including IP fast switching/routing capability or ATM switching.
  • packet or IP switching as an example include at least 10 Mbit/s Ethernet or 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet and/or higher speed ports (like Gigabit Ethernet and gradually other standards when they occur) etc. would be closely associated with corresponding WP connections applied.
  • the switch function selected should at least have the capacity to support these types of port capacities and the ability to arrange fast switching between these multiple ports.
  • Methods functions and means are included to make it possible to use read logical data protocols including IP to allowing transparent and/or seamless transparent continuos flow between WPs and between any ports in communication. This includes ability to allocate transfer rates between WPs in correspondence of at least the rate of such transfer. Including means to detect real time requirement, set transfer rates in accordance, set priorities on data that shall be possible to transfer without ARQs, re-transmission etc. and/or apply bandwidth reservations and detect such reservations to allocate transfer rate in accordance.
  • Method and means included to "secure" transparent flow of bits is in the communication process between pair of WPs are to secure that enough bandwidth or transfer rate for actual real time transmission requirements is applied. Further is means applied to prioritise such data traffic that require real transfer type of traffic requirement and assigning enough transfer rate for at least such data.
  • Data transfer requirement of data with less priority as an example typical interactive burst type of data communication requirement, (only one example could be TCP/IP).
  • the ability to set variable bandwidth requirement and set up of transfer capacity in either way down and up link is schematically visualised in figure 12, 4001 , 3001 etc.
  • the allocated flow in either direction between pair of WPs is shown to be different and could typically be less than would be possible as the traffic flow varies.
  • methods functions and means are included to assure that the less critical data than real time data could use the remaining capacity set available as extra capacity besides the capacity that is required for continuous transparent flow of bits of data.
  • Methods functions and means are available to select an appropriate average transfer rate based on an accepted delay, possible rate to use, etc., for interactive data transfers for either direction between each pair of WPs. That includes methods functions and means to store data under highly interactive periods when large chunks of data have to be transmitted and when the actual selected transfer rate for such data through any pair of WPs for the interactive data transmission is not enough. Methods functions and means to store such data under such periods are applicable by assigning an intermediate function of memory at a selectable size. This is schematically shown applied, in fig 12. at 551/M and/or fig.
  • fig 12 4010, 3010 means to visualise the possible vary of the transmission capacity between pair of WPs in various ways (up-link and/or down-link). Further such capacity will include means to select transfer rates depending on multiple factors, like: hop distance, frequency band, modulation/bandwidth per carrier channel, available radio power and/or laser power, capacity requirements including real time and interactive transfer considerations, level of error correction, quality requirement, alternate parallel routing, etc. I.e. means including tools for setting of actual transfer requirement through each pair of WPs is possible to match with the actual possibilities see fig 28. Example, if a transfer rates between two stations are applied with connectionless type of switches.
  • port is assigned corresponding to the standard capacity of 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s dual direction communication and it is considered the wireless connections (WPs) connecting the two sites are not able to allocate enough transfer capacity. I.e. in this case would less than 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s (which may be the case using radio over long hops).
  • the switch function implemented in a system could be of various size depending of the number ports, capacity of the ports.
  • the need for higher and higher capacity in the networks leads to a rapid development of high-speed switching/routing system.
  • fibre connections a standard, and seamless unlimited capacity is achievable in a point to point link for connectionless switching based on IP protocols and/similar and/or ATM switching (of cells, including the 48+5 bytes per cell) should such switches be used.
  • Considering wireless radio communication transfer rates between WPs in W-SENS is more limited than fibre. Thus, in the examples given switching capacities mentioned are fairly high today but not tomorrow particularly considering fibre as a transmission medium.
  • W-SENS allows each pair of WPs in communication to correspond to traditional radio links or superseding these as it includes means for multiple routings, adaptable bandwidth application, modulation level and a possible sub-channel selection approach applied, etc.
  • W-SENS would be able to offer high capacity to many users in an area in comparison to the capacities from earlier wireless solutions.
  • Comprehensive broadband communications services offered to multiple locations are far beyond earlier wireless solutions.
  • the capacities on multiple ports may allow the use of ports utilising the full transparent port capacity between different stations.
  • the exemplified capacity of 10-16 Gbit/s switch capacity seems of course high (it may be higher or less capacity) for wireless purposes communications application today, in relation to the capacities that is available on existing solutions.
  • the meaning with example is to show that W-SENS is applicable to such high capacity meaning it could be used as a powerful communication alternative for new local and regional infrastructures.
  • Radio based WPs include methods functions and means to control: various frequency bandwidth controls by selection of number of allowed subchannels, various total transfer, selections of modulation level per carrier (see also fig 8), transmitted power regulation, based on distance quality requirements, etc.
  • Methods functions and means for spatial direction control, area coverage, routing arrangement and/or re-arrangement.
  • Means in order to arrange selection of transfer rates between WPs, which is supposed to be smaller than capacity of a continuos flow of a carrier or sub-carriers is applicable by the possible selection on time, fragment selection similar to TDMA.
  • UP User ports, (UP) are exemplified in fig. 1 , 2, 3, 12, 17 a b and the numbers 100, 101 , 102 etc. Termination to other networks is mentioned Terminal Ports, (TP), see fig 1 1000, 1021)
  • Network Management Ports (NMPs) applicable to stations.
  • NMPs Network Management Ports
  • a pair or multiple WPs pairs are applicable d to be equipped at stations.
  • Any station includes means for communication with any other station provided they optically see each other.
  • the number of stations and routes increase increased the possible routes and transfer capacity between stations is potentially increased etc.
  • means are included which allows taking advantage of a new topology situation by re-arranging routes and adopting transfer capacity, power level etc. in accordance.
  • This added functional means include a topology design and set up network tool involve operation via network management functions includes, capacity design tools, re-routing, map and topology guidelines.
  • the functional means include mechanisms of re-design where any new station that occurs in an implemented already available network based on the method (and a realised system W-SENS). Functional means are included in a way that such changes are possible to take advantage of by change transmission directions of station WPs to change from one station and its WP to another station and its WP by changing antenna directions or controlling electronically transmission in new directions.
  • Re-routing is includes functional means allowing control of transmission directions in various directions (spatially) and/or elevations by the possible control of different types of antennas.
  • Various types of directable spatial antenna and/or laser beams are allowed to be included.
  • Typically is one beam per WP-WP connections applied. I.e. a number of fixed antennas arranged to point in different directions and select the appropriate are applicable.
  • phased array antennas with one or multiple beams applicable per pair of WP i.e. one beam is directed per pair of WPs, several WPs are considered to be able to be supported included on a common antenna platform (see also fig. 27).
  • Methods functions and means included for any of the integrated switched functions (1 , 2, 3, etc. schematically shown in figure drawings) include ability for external switch functions (fig 17 b 10" etc.) to work as integrated parts of one or more W-SENS solutions separated in various regions. This include methods functions and means for users connected under W-SENS to establish communication with users connected under such other external switch and/or routing system and/or with users connected at any another remote located W-SENS solution. Thus using an external switching/routing network within between, which is generally visualised in figure 16.
  • Method functions means included at stations to work as a backbone switch function for any user connected anywhere in a topology. It includes ability to connect other wireless access systems central and/or base station to one of the stations switch functions and uses such access systems remote stations as transparent extensions to scattered locations which traffic is switched within a selected W-SENS station, see also figure 4.
  • Method functions and means are included to establish a non-hierarchical wireless topology of stations. This include "all - all" communication as long as stations virtually optically sees each other and are within appropriate distance on a appropriate frequency, transmit power etc. regardless of topology, I.e. the meaning central station or terminal station etc. as in conventional access networks is not applied.
  • One example is given in fig 1 , where all stations are allowed to communicate 10, 11 , 12) and they are freely related to each other. User and/or terminal ports are freely defined at any station. This is different in comparison to standard wireless access system (in particular P-MP topologies) where terminal stations are not allowed to talk to each other. This is because they lack switching capability and the configuration itself.
  • TSR 34 dynamic time sharing (TDMA) and space sharing mechanisms (SDMA), TSR 34. Its terminal and/or repeating stations required to take the clock from a master clock station above resulting in a hierarchy unable data transfer between such repeaters, examples from system like TSR 34. This is because the central needs to synchronise the underlying the terminals and control when the respective terminal shall communicate to the central (i.e. which time slots) so that the central station can have its antenna directed at the proper direction at the right time.
  • TDMA dynamic time sharing
  • SDMA space sharing mechanisms
  • Realisation include specifically designed WPs for the purpose which would be virtually acting as a central station and multiple correspondingly specifically designed WPs would virtually as terminals (see example figure 20, 21 , 24). These functions are partly realised by arranging multiple P-MP modes of operation to be applied between WPs.
  • P-MP mode of communication include functions for the purpose of emulating wireless access structures and/or for allow for reduced and shared transmission capacity radio channels etc. between W-SENS stations switching functions.
  • Methods functions and means for arranging communication between stations operating in multiple P-P modes and/or multiple P-MP mode on the same stations in addition is included to create multi system operational functions virtually simultaneously in parallel.
  • Method system and means are included for the possible use of directional and/or sector and/or omni directional antenna systems and/or laser beams. Including method function and means to electronically control beams in direction etc. Including capability to control more than one antenna beam to be steered and/or selected simultaneously each beam in its specific direction. This includes serving one and/or multiple WP operating in P-P mode and/or WPs operating in P-MP modes. Such methods functions and means are applicable to W-SENS solutions. Method function and means to design and set up functions of WP is included. The set up of respective WPs function, its associated ports, its antenna arrangements, method of communication capacity etc, etc. is included and being accessible via network management functions virtually from any station.
  • the method function and means includes besides a separate design of WPs working as central or terminals, WP design includes a possible virtual function to be set to emulate a central and/or terminal function based on setup functions via network management or similar.
  • Method function and means are included for arranging communication between WPs transparently to specific service requirement, i.e. including transfer rate, delay, bit error rate quality etc.
  • Concerning transparent communication of synchronous transfer requirements through when connectionless switching functions are applied at least as near as transparent communication as possible is applied. Considering both synchronous and asynchronous data is required. It includes that selection of enough transfer capacity is applied for synchronous data between involved pair of WPs. It includes secondly at least selection of additional transfer capacity to be transferred transparent or as near as transparent communication as possible based is on is specific traffic requirement, bit error rate quality, delay performance, bandwidth availability etc.
  • connectionless switching functions used selection will principally be made to allocate transfer capacity's between pair of WPs up to at least 10 and/or 100 and/or up to or towards 1000 Mbit/s.
  • radio frequency carriers imply a higher interest in adopting the transfer capacity to actual requirement which often may be less than a full and constant assignment of 100 Mbit/s (fast Ethernet) capacity between a pair of WPs.
  • Using laser beams on short hops and connecting such WPs with full transparent capacity could be considered more applicable.
  • Radio communication via radio links are beginning to reach 400-600 Mbit/s commercially.
  • One of the problems for high transfer rate radios is to utilise spectrum effectively thus needing to use complex modulation methods which would be require several error correction, equalisation coursed by delay spread, etc.
  • Method functions and means are included to overcome to problem of individual bandwidth selection, transfer capacity, transfer quality, hop length limitations, the need of complex equalisation and/or the constant us of a complex modulation method etc.
  • W-SENS are included ability to use one and/or more carriers each modulated separately and carrying its oven data.
  • Method function and means are included to assign a selected number of sub-channels (and/or sub-carriers) to gradual select the transfer capacity and bandwidth between each pair of ports.
  • a narrower radio channel has the advantage of having each less noise in its respective channel than a corresponding wider channel. This is usable in either longer hops or correspondingly more complex modulation methods, which would increasing the potential transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) per channel on the same hop lengths.
  • Methods functions and means are included to select sub-channels to be used, balance factors of quality and modulation level, select appropriate transfer rates on sub-channels, select error correction etc.
  • the method results in possibilities to gradually expand transfer capacity between WPs in fact up to the maximum capacity of the ports used to connect the WPs from the switching function.
  • a today seemingly high capacity transfer requirement of 1000 Mbit/s capacity between Gigabit Ethernet could be applicable via radio by the use of this method.
  • Gradual expansion of transfer rates would be applicable even if the transfer between any two WPs that have the ability to transparently communication via 1000 Mbit/s ports is not reached.
  • communication performance is defined by the channel bandwidth, number of channels applied, modulation method, coding (like CRC - FEC or similar), distance, RF power, environment, frequency band etc.
  • WP wireless communication
  • TP/UP optional ports for termination and or connect users
  • Wireless communication between station in any given area is established via pair of WP in communication, arranged for P-P and/or P-MP arrangements. At least for connectionless switching are traffic directed in alternative selected directions between WP via stations switch functions.
  • the combination of powerful switching capability tailored selection of WP for wireless communication between station leads to surprising results in comparison to previous wired and/or wireless solution for servicing multiple users in a local end/or regional environment. In fact it leads to a "self expanded network capacity" including increasing optional routing alternatives.
  • W-SENS solution coned
  • WPs By applying a required number and types of WPs based on the method and sub-methods include the potential capability to establish any type of network topology used or superseding these, any type of function, including all to all station typology, etc. Communication between stations through the air routed via the built in switch/switches by switching data between pair of ports (WPs) up to full capacity or with reduced capacity based on needs, possibilities etc. Communication between WPs include possible adjustments of transmit capacity, requirement, frequency, frequency bandwidth, distances, directional antenna beams or laser beam for each pair of WPs if applied to being able to achieve spatial division.
  • a method functions means including possibilities to assign communication between UP, TPs and principally transparently assign transfer between pair of WPs through two or more station in order to flow digital data for principally any requirements as long it conform to bandwidth availability and required quality. It includes functions for repeat, drop, insert, terminate (to other backbone network) and switch traffic at any station in an all to all configurations.
  • Stations are included with method function and means to make it possible to create network and/or routing functionality. This to at least a level where traffic is switched and/or routed via selected WPs and expandable to include user ports and or terminal ports and or use of additional external network switches routers etc.
  • a method function and means including use of ATM and/or connectionless switches.
  • connectionless switching are applied various existing and future IP and/or similar protocols for packet data is applicable for handling transparent synchronous and/or asynchronous transfer through each pair of WPs including ability to handle traffic entering from various routes. 5
  • Method function and means for electromagnetic communication between WPs Including ability to transparently assign capability between up to or towards a full rate of 10 or 100 or 1000 Mbit/s (or other capacities should they be standardised).
  • Method function and means at least for radio transmission between pair of WPs in communication Including functions to assign digital transmission capacity in either direction at selective transfer rates principally up to the full capacity of each pair of ports assigned to connect the respective switch function at each side via the air.
  • Means to assign transfer capacity includes optimise of quality requirement in relation to bandwidth and transfer rates. Control of all or any of following functions are included: radio transmitter power level control, modulation type or modulation level control, level of fault error correction, antenna gain, antenna direction, frequency bandwidth by selection of number of sub carriers, antenna polarisation control. Dual polarisation i.e. cross polarisation transfer adoptions when applied.
  • a method function means included to arrange routing alternatives including re-arrange routing To allow: use of frequency spectrum efficient, gradual increased transfer capacity in denser topologies, decrease the average hop distance by reduce transmitted power or increase the modulation level and the possible speed. I.e. includes mechanisms to change any established pair WP in network which changes with new stations added or deleted including the ability to set up of new pair of connections and/or change speed performance or change routing in accordance.
  • Method functions and means are in such cases included to handle redirection of antenna beams etc. in accordance to changes.
  • the same type of basic physical hardware means could be used as one or several modules at multiple stations see some examples in the figure 5, 33, 34.
  • the number and types of WPs including antenna arrangements, UPs, TPs are tailored at each station according to demand. Means for manual assignment and/or automatic detection of configuration is included and actual situation is stored in an applied NMP database.
  • Means are included to control of antenna beams to point in different directions to adopt the network changes and different routing alternatives when fixed beam antennas are utilised.
  • Multiple fixed beam antennas and/or common reflector antennas are to be used including controlled in direction for each pair WPs set in connection.
  • Method functions and means are included transparent communication capacity between WPs by using the full capacity of switch to WPs and between WPs equipped without means to regulate transfer speed at WPs for traffic between any two switching function including at last WPs for laser communication.
  • Method function and means including control of transmission capacity by the use of modulation level control, selection of bandwidth by selecting required number of sub-carriers (FDM).
  • FDM sub-carriers
  • Method functions and means to combine various routing alternatives Including combined use of route based on different electromagnetic frequencies as carriers including use of various transfer capacity per route and/or WPs taking part in transmission, including laser combined radio, including "high" speed communication and parallel or redundant lower speed route.
  • Method functions and means including the possible implementation of WPs with the capability to create communication with multiple other WPs at different stations and creating point to multipoint transfer topologies between WPs and switches. This includes:
  • Equipment resource sharing of radio and modem by splicing capacity at one WP to more than one other WP (one example in fig. 6. 570)
  • Equipment resource share by common use of radio head inclusive modem and with selective use of capacity by assigning required number of subchannels to more than one specific WPs (underneath), FDMA.
  • Equipment resource sharing in time segments by including common use of selective bandwidth allocation i.e. selective number of sub-channels to be used constantly traditional TDMA including alternative to select bandwidth for communication at each specific time segment (FDMA/TDMA)
  • Equipment resource sharing including the above plus modulation level control, error corrections.
  • Equipment resource sharing including modem uses selective coding of subchannels (CDMA), assignment, de-assignments capability.
  • CDMA subchannels
  • Method functions and means including the possibility to assign-WPs at stations where any such WP have the capability as a central function establishing radio communication with more than one other WP(s). These WPs being based at variable locations all radio optically reachable from such central WP.
  • the communication transmission capacity includes being at least based on frequency division where the communication transmission resource of a central WP is shareable with multiple other WPs in order to satisfy the respective communications capacity demand between the respective scattered WPs and a WP.
  • selective transmission capacity it includes possible selective portion of any or selective parts of the following potentially functionality's; frequency bandwidths in Hz for carrier or sub-carriers to be defied for the various links in such P-MP configuration, further including possible selection of modulation level like QPSK, 16
  • backbone switch Method functions and means including that switching function at any station is usable as backbone switch. Including the possibility to be used as a backbone switch for any external wireless system and/or internal virtually created wireless access solution, see figure 4 (a,b) or figure 20.
  • Method functions and means include capability to shift between carrier frequencies of any of the multiples or multiple sub-carriers carriers used for communications between pairs of WPs.
  • Method and means including assignment of transfer capacity based on the detected requirement for transparent communication, versus burst data communication. This include ability to detect transparent transmit requirement at respective WPs, detection of real time protocols based on IP, detecting of priority level on IP protocol and/or any other bandwidth reservation scheme on IP or signalled by cells by ATM switches if these are used. Including ability to assign bandwidth at appropriate quality for possible transfer of synchronous flow through WPs according to quality demands in standard data & telecommunications applications. Including means for the ability to assign appropriate bandwidth between WPs for asynchronous data and/or less prioritised reservations by using intermediate storing of packets in memories when under time when the bandwidth is not enough etc.
  • Method functions and means including connectionless switch functions at station.
  • Method functions and means of at least connectionless switches to include fast switching and/or routing performance are possible.
  • seamless transparent flow could be obtained through such station with limited extra delays added per station.
  • one ms or more could be considered long in some applications (corresponding to about 300 km propagation) if multiple switches were involved in a connection.
  • Telecommunications type of services in particular is sensitive seamless real time performance requirements but also traditional data communication throughput performance due to delays.
  • Method functions and means include possibilities to use any of multiple ports for p-p WPs into variable spatial directions for communication between stations.
  • Selectable number of WPs includes ability to establish communications via selectable antennas and beam direction. Included are means to:
  • Method functions and means including ability to measure quality of data transferred between WPs, including measure of loss of data, overflow on specific links (memories) of WPs and report such data. It includes mechanism to assign capacity in accordance to requirement manually and/or set of transfer capacity automatically accorded to detected information on applied data to WPs. Included are functions for such measures and reports of such information is detectable at any station. This including ability to adjust and set up at an appropriate transfer capacity through the air, via pairs of WPs via operator terminals, like NMS/NMP/NMP' etc. based on SNMP and/or added functions to SNMP and/or similar network management protocols.
  • Method functions and means including ability to let data be transferred between any WPs at any station through a used connectionless switching functions fast and transparent through such station with time delay which could be considered neglected. Including if transferee goes through multiple's of stations each with similar addition delay coursed by every station. Including allow multiple stations to be included of each connection between users or user and/or terminal ports. Including means for clocking out data transferred to a station to a defined port at seamless synchronous if it is required. Means for clocking out received and stored data at defined rates and specifications according to standards like ITU-T including jitter and/or wanderer specifications is included by appropriate selection of local clocks at stations, which clocks out such data. Thus no time synchronism needs to be transferred trough the network. Effects of small time delay variations between different connections depending of the number of station passed etc. could than be ignored. Communications like synchronous leased lines and or distributions services from telephony, videoconferencing, Internet communications, media distribution etc is thus applicable.
  • Method functions and means including system which switch functions at station include to the capacity to handle the sum or the capacity of the a number of ports WPs, UPs, TPs, OPs of various rates (fig. 16, 17, 18 100, 100', 110, 210, 210' etc.), of each station.
  • the number of WPs shall be possible to expand at each station in order to allow a gradual increasing number of communication directions, and capacities etc. with other stations.
  • Method functions and means including at least one switch function per station, which digitally establishing connection of traffic to different direction between scattered stations.
  • a few (four) WPs could be connected for a maximum rate of 1 Gbit/s duplex communication (into two directions)
  • a 20- 30 applicable for maximum 100 Mbit/s duplex capacity i.e. consider
  • Method functions and means to include possibility to geographically scatter the stations randomly include typically narrow beam antennas pointing to respective required WPs in order to arrange communication.
  • Including the possibility to connect a number of connections possible and reach multiple location and in this way create a multi connection network for many scattered users at alternative points and directions.
  • the result by this is that an extremely efficient utilisation of frequency spectrum would be applicable, in as frequency use is getting more and more randomly scattered in elevation and space with increasing user density. I.e. communication is getting relatively better and better isolated horizontally, vertically and by obstacles with discriminating antenna beam angles by the shortening of hops, this allow further to even better efficient use of spectrum.
  • FEC forward error correction
  • FEC forward error correction
  • rf received radio frequency
  • Figure 2 Vision of stations means and communications via wireless ports, user ports, terminal ports.
  • Examples of structure and means are shown in a wireless port and antenna solutions, splicing of a wireless port, into sub-wireless ports.
  • FIG. 10 a,b Shown some possible examples of stations vision of type of physical implementation structure of stations.
  • Examples of use of various modulation scheme between different stations including an example of an alternative parallel route for part of traffic.
  • Figure 14 Example of incoming traffic to a station via the air from two different stations which are both added and transferred via a common wireless port to a forth station.
  • Figure 15 An example shows routing alternatives in a W-SENS solution including use of laser and radio in combination.
  • FIG 17 a, b Show examples of general possible structures of stations based on one or more switching functions.
  • Time segmentation prepared for carrier and/or sub-carrier in order to be able to adopt to various functions which needs accurate and co-ordinated timing, like regular frequency shift, possible TDM and or TDMA structure etc.
  • Figure 21 are generally vision possible adoptions to various co-existence, interoperability standards, etc. in combination with various proprietary air interfaces etc.
  • Figure 29 a, b, c, d, e Show various examples of switching and/or power distributing on intermediate and/or radio frequency, i.e. in order to achieve P-MP communication between wireless ports. It also shows an example of combination use of wireless ports for point - point communication is applicable with one or more point - multipoint applications.
  • Figure 31 a, b, c Shows one example of a modular station structure where expansion of station capability in switch capacity and/or multiple wireless ports is achievable.
  • stations using power distribution and/or switching on intermediate frequency or radio frequency level for a point - multipoint applications are shown.
  • the general idea with this figure is to show an example of an implementation of the method in a system where communication between stations are passed via ports either physical local ports connected to wires/fibre or though ports specifically designed to carry information between station through the air.
  • At each station is at least one switching function taking care of the selection of switching and/or routing information between ports.
  • It further illustrates a wireless communication network consisting of two or more stations based on the method.
  • the idea with the drawing is to generally vision that any station can communicate or distribute or receive information between each other through the air, example 300-304. They need to be equipped with appropriate transceiver means (transmitter and receiver) for it this. This solution results in an in a non-hierarchical arrangements of stations which can freely communicate.
  • Wireless Ports As schematically shown by 550 at each station.
  • no station is central or no station is terminal as in wireless access solutions.
  • Stations (10, 11 etc.) are equipped with electromagnetic transceivers at the WPs (as an example 550/568).
  • These pair of WPs are designed with electromagnetic transmitters and receivers which are the tools to establish communicate between stations through the air, 550.
  • Each pair of WPs are adjusted to its specific quality requirements based on available frequency band, modulation method, transmission power, error detection, error correction, directed radio antenna means (when radio band is used), etc. Thus, multiple frequency bands and standards are applicable.
  • Termination Ports, TP to other networks can be applied at selected stations and ports.
  • User information is generally visualised inserted or dropped via UPs or at TPs (1000) and combinations of UP, TP 1020.
  • Stations are equipped with switching function that include means for local switching between ports at stations (100,101%) and means for switching data between any of the ports UP, TP, WP at any station.
  • insert and drop of digital information and/or repeat and/or termination of information are applicable at any station.
  • the idea with the example in the figure is to define the method applicable specifically ideal for wireless terrestrial networks in local and or regional areas.
  • a view of a possible implementation of the method into a system is generally shown.
  • the stations are viewed from above.
  • the stations are normally fixed located placed on earth in a mast, on a house, on a wall, indoor and/or outdoor, it could in some applications be considered placed: in a balloon, aircraft, satellite, terrestrial movable units, lap - top communication etc. As various WPs could be considered allowing potentially a mixture.
  • Systems implemented based on the method have means for control and/or supervision. This is applicable at any station generally visualised on stations as 200 as exemplified at station 11 and 13.
  • Means for organising routing between stations is applicable and possible to visualise set up, re-route etc via a PC or a any type of network terminal etc. It could be physically located or distantly located from the station or stations it concerns.
  • Stations switching functions capability means that it include a possible work as a switching platform between its own ports (UP,TP, WP) for local and/or distant traffic and/or including other applications, like operating as a backbone switch potentially at each station and location for any external use.
  • Methods are included to use the expansion of stations to increase switching capabilities trough the air or elsewhere in that area for the network it self (various routings etc.) and for external applications as well.
  • large number of connection points (users) would potentially result in a giant switching capability in such area.
  • Means to utilise such added capacity is applicable by re-design or routing, increase transfer speeds, etc. allowing higher transfers through the air.
  • the method and the implementation include means to offer switched services for connected users locally at each station, between different station and/or between users and external networks. This directly from the wireless network solution and in addition similar switching services offered by other switching devises is applicable i.e. switching function includes means of serving external wireless network, wired connections etc.
  • the vision with this figure is to show an example of where stations in figure 1 a) differently located in latitude and longitude also may be different located in high's above ground.
  • the relative high difference is specifically occurring if stations are located in a hilly landscape and/or in separated by relatively short distances.
  • stations or WPs
  • the meaning is also to illustrate how the spectrum space and the frequency reuse would be possible to utilise better and better in a gradually denser network.
  • Transmission power control is here envisioned to prevent unnecessary pollution of the spectrum of emitted electromagnetic power.
  • Such power control is basically estimated to be adjusted to achieve the needed transmission quality between each pair of WPs. Factors possible to include in calculation is generally based on radio hop distance, frequency, modulation level, forward error correction, antenna performance etc. In addition measure of the actual performance and adjustments thereafter is applicable.
  • the meaning further with the illustration is to confirm that the wireless communication between stations through WPs is organised typically via narrow beam antennas (example 320) at each side. Antennas from 10 GHz and above in the radio bands could results in small narrow beam antennas which are getting smaller the higher the band. In the 20-40 GHz bands could as an example antennas 10 - 20 cm be used, thus applicable to use in any environment.
  • the meaning with the figure 1 b) (and 1 a) is also to illustrate that the increase of number of stations in a limited results in increased routing .possibilities as all stations principally can be designed to communicate with each other, provided line of site occur etc. It also shows that if station 10 and 13 which could be considered to be established first. A new station 11 could be reached either via 11 or 13. if another station 14 is installed there wiii be various routing possibilities to/from 14 via 10, 11 , 13 or combinations of them. This shows that the routing alternatives are increasing, the hop lengths are generally shorted (less transmitted power required at maintained capacity and quality) and more alternative elevations are obtained. Further, it visualises how elevations could become increasingly more different the denser the network are getting used by the network to optimise it.
  • FIG. 2 The general idea with this figure is to further explain some possible means of implementing the method and additionally sub-methods.
  • the figure is basically showing traffic flows between stations are arranged via pair of WPs.
  • the figure is just exemplifying is as one of many possible configurations of a system implementation.
  • the stations 10 and 11 are equipped with a switching function here represented by 2.
  • the general ports to carry traffic and/or other networks or extensions to other networks are named 100, 101 , 102 etc.
  • the port related to the switching function and the WP is here named 600.
  • Individual types of ports like various speeds and/or standards is named 110, 111... etc.
  • the interface 110/600 shown at station 10 may be a standard user port or close to similarities in order to make it possible to remotely locate 500 and or 550 via a standard cabling.
  • the switching functions 2 contain an IP switch and/or including routing capabilities for standards ports of today like: 10, 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s and/or other standards and/or other future Ethernet standards. Cabling could be used to connect one or more WPs at each station distant from 2, 10.
  • the WP at respective side containing means for transmitting and receiving digital information at each port as schematically indicated in this figure by 500.
  • 500 suppose to contain signal processing, modulator, demodulator, transmitter, receiver, radio fiiter and being connected to an antenna system, 582 when radio frequencies are used.
  • the unit 501 at station 10 is illustrating another type of WP. Means for arranging communication at each pair or port may be different depending on frequency band used, radio or laser etc.
  • Individual pairs of WPs include communication means including frequency select, modulation, level, error correction level etc. that is selectable specifically for each pair of ports.
  • Multiple WPs at each station can of course be identically designed as well or mixture of various types and standards.
  • Functions include traffic drop and/or repeating at any station. An example in the figure show information that is coming in via the air at station 11 from station 10 being switched to port 112/600 via 11/2 for traffic that shall be repeated to another station or to port 101 for traffic that shall be dropped.
  • the switch 2 in the example is a connectionless switching routing function it is considered to include means for fast switching performance. If the time delay to pass through each stations switching function from port 110 to 112 (and vice versa) is done at a neglected time delay (from the users application perspective) seamless flows could be arranged via multiple repeating steps. This leads to a relative free selection of routes (i.e. many directions at each station and no hierarchical structure as for radio access solutions). Means to select multiple routs are applicable to set-up in practice an all to all station communication arrangements which is to be used in various ways like alternate routing to increase spectrum efficiency and/or increase security and/or increase transfer capacity, redundancy.
  • the figure is suppose to generally show the means to use alternative WPs indicated by 551.
  • This particular WPs transmission means 551 is arranged in such a way that multiple WPs at other stations 11 , 12, ....etc. can communicate through it. I.e. means not only for single pair of configurations as illustrated by 550.
  • a WP, 551 at station 10
  • Other types of WPs in combination of WP pairs for P-P modes would be applicable in a system implementation.
  • the P- MP mode resembles of the resource sharing of a central station in a typical wireless access system between stations, however in this case it could be limited to transfer between switches only.
  • the number of ports and the capacity of each of these ports may be based on standard rates used for connectionless switching as an example 100 Mbit/s duplex or semi-duplex ports, semi-duplex 10 Mbit/s ports or duplex 1000 Mbit/s ports.
  • TDMA wireless fidelity
  • FDMA includes means for transmit and/or receive in multiple directions with other WPs simultaneously. One beam is directed to each corresponding station.
  • FDMA and/or CDMA includes simultaneously operation of multiple beams as long as communication is performed.
  • Means to use various types of antenna systems is included. These may be various types like phased arrays, selection of multiple horns, selection of multiple horns towards a common reflector and/or other arrangements for laser, light wave beam switching devices and/or beam spread techniques multiple arrays.
  • a spatial antenna arrangement is visualised by 581. Included is possible use of sector coverage and/or omni-directed coverage antennas visualised by figure 5 583. Even if this could reduce the spectrum efficiency it simplifies the arrangement and reduces the cost in comparison to spatial antennas and includes a way to simplify distribution simultaneously to many stations.
  • any external wireless access system based on any standard or evolving standard like 802.11 , 802.16 or Hiperaccess, or Hiperlan or ETSl TM4 co-existence standards, TSR 34 etc.
  • the interface towards W-SENS is in such case applicable on appropriate interfaces physical and/or logical standard.
  • Means to include use of internal switching function (2) and/or external switching (2') functions at any location is applicable for connected external wireless access systems.
  • antenna beams shown to be pointing in one flow direction only. The reason is just to simplify the visualised transfer in one direction in the examples given. Means for arranging antennas and antenna lobes in the in the opposite direction is normally occurring as an understatement as duplex communication is performed in most cases.
  • the figure shows examples of applications in schematic network structure.
  • Means are included for Network management functions like set-up, supervision and control functions at stations. Means are included to allow remote network management operation, i.e. any station, any WP etc. is addressable and reachable via communication protocols virtually from any anywhere in the network and/or outside. This includes means for IP addressing and/or similar communications protocols. It is shown applied via station 10 but in fact means including connection virtually at any station. Further station 10 is shown to be equipped with a switch and/or router function type 2 or 3, process control function, 9, one or a number of UPs, 100, 101 , a TP 105 and a number of WPs.
  • the process control function includes processor and applied software functions, which includes handling real time transfer, through station, network management etc.
  • This control supervision function is schematically shown connectable for stations, 200, for direct connection to processing function, 210 these are via a terminal function, and/or a PC etc. included with appropriate application programs for the set-up and/or control and/or supervision.
  • Means for control and supervision of any WP is applicable at any WP.
  • Means to physically reach any WP is included as indicated by 210 shown schematically at station 12. I.e. functions including means for set up the wireless network ports to appropriate speed, power level, bandwidth, antenna direction etc. based on required transmission quality including control and supervision of performance. Possible direct connection supporting roof top installation and maintenance is potentially applicable etc.
  • connectionless switching function visualised by 2
  • Means indicated as generally visualised at station 11 include conversion including at least rates of those between at least Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet ports.
  • Typical synchronous traffic flows used in the telecommunications area which are supposed to be transmitted and/or dropped over W-SENS stations are schematically visualised entering at 121 at the functional unit 120 and being connected to W-SENS a station at 102 for further transfer. I.e.
  • means are included to convert synchronous flow that shall be transmitted over W-SENS to an appropriate asynchronous form and applied with appropriate signalling protocol including addresses for such transfer over W-SENS. I.e. this include means to apply IP signalling protocols based on IPv4 and/or IPv6. Means to achieve transparent transfer of synchronous data over stations based on connectionless switching is applied. Means to apply appropriate signalling for the transfer including transfer of appropriate signalling information of the synchronous signal at corresponding port end and/or ends if broadcast of applied signal is required. I.e. including means to set appropriate protocol to such information that is to be transferred as it being able to indicate reserve of enough transfer capacity including setting priority for such transfer through the stations.
  • Information about synchronous signal it self is transferred to the end and/or ends executed in functional unit 120 in order to allow re-structure the transferred signal at an original shape at the other station end (or ends). Including possibilities to transfer signal information to the corresponding end (ends) to define any selected synchronous form of the synchronous signal that is taken or (derived) at the ends. This includes possible reshape of both data and signalling information should it be needed. I.e. as one example only, an applied ITU-T signal E3 at one end is spiced in a number of ITU-T E1 signals including appropriate signalling at a corresponding end.
  • Means to convert data that have been transferred over W-SENS dropped here visualised schematically at station 11 , 102.
  • the functional unit 120 include conversion of a serial asynchronous stream 102 to a synchronous stream (or multiple synchronous streams if splicing is required) in shown functional unit 120.
  • Means are included to achieve a synchronous drop of data 121 irrespective of the asynchronous transfer inclusive the possibility of various routing alternatives through the network has been used or not and/or continous parallel routs for the same signal have been applied.
  • Means are included for extracting of clock of applied synchronous stream to functional unit 120.
  • Means are included to use such clock by the functional unit 120 to clock out data synchronously in the reverse direction. I.e. including the capability for each application to control the clock stability from each application if required by clocking out the asynchronous received data from station towards the application by the functional unit 120.
  • Means to use another clock from another applied application and or another clock for clocking out data synchronously from 120 is also applicable.
  • Means including conversion between different protocols and switching and transmission methods typically used for ATM, SDH, DTM, or any circuit switching flow and connectionless data flows and switching is applicable.
  • synchronous data streams transferred over stations includes reinsertion of synchronous signals in original (or required form) as it was entered at the other end regardless if the whole bandwidth of a synchronous signal was transferred or not.
  • I.e. means to detect bandwidth requirement on applied signals is applied and means to assign appropriate transfer capacity though W-SENS stations is applied.
  • Method functions and means are included as a consequence of what is said for transferring originally synchronous data (121) asynchronously by reserve capacity through the various pair of WPs to at least correspond to such and the required signalling.
  • the method includes similar function for applications based on LAN, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet etc. I.e. asynchronous data ports, which is directly applied to a station, as exemplified at station 11 , 101.
  • the required transfer of data that is exemplified by voice IP, video IP, video conferencing etc. By detecting the sum of such transfers a required transfer means to assign transfer capacity per pair of WPs is applicable.
  • Means are included to assign external wireless systems in order to extend W-SENS.
  • W-SENS In the figure is two types visualised. In one case is an external a central station, a shown applied to station 12 via port 105 which traffic flow is controlled by the switching function 3/2 of station 12. The dotted parallel lice between switch functions 3/2 symbolise signalling protocols.
  • the W-SENS system is in this case offering a backbone switching facility (2/3) and the external access system offer extensions "as transparent as possible" to connected users under the switching function 2/3 of 12.
  • Means are included to use multiples of similar access systems at selected stations in W-SENS. Means are included to allow connection between users connected under a wireless access system (a) via 3/2. It include users connected under another similar external access system at the same station and/or other W-SENS stations and/or other external switches and/or routers (like 10', 10" etc. in figure 18).
  • Another case shown by b is another wireless access system connected to port 101 at station 12.
  • the port 101 at 12 and port 105 at station 10 is virtually offering a transparent connection between the external backbone switch 1001 and the wireless access system b.
  • means are included to allow multiple connected users via central station b and/or similar stations as b to be virtually connected under one or more external switches/routers 1001 , as generally visualised via a connection shown as a dotted line between b and 1001.
  • This dotted line represents virtually a synchronous including ATM based and/or an asynchronous depending of the type of external switch etc. and application.
  • station b includes application of a mobile base station. I.e. applications of connection between a number GPRS and/or W-CDMA etc. base stations requiring to be connected a one or more external switch and or router functions related to the service the mobile network offer.
  • Means to apply other wireless access networks at selected stations in W- SENS structures based on evolving ETSI BRAN standards like the various Hiperaccess, Hiperlan standards and corresponding US and Japanese standards are included.
  • Other standards like bluetooth included etc. This includes possible switching and/or routing of user traffic and/or signalling between various external access base stations (similar) through stations in the W-SENS structure should such application be required. This include transactions of data for functions like hand-over, roaming etc.
  • any WP (550) has to be equipped with means for transmit and/or receive functions in radio bands (568) or higher frequencies (laser etc.).
  • radio bands 568
  • laser etc. higher frequencies
  • Means to selectively arrange various bandwidth and/or transfer capacities for the transmit transaction direction is included. l.e . including balanced and/or unbalanced communication between any WPs.
  • the actual design of each WP is possible to be differently arranged between those applied on a same station.
  • the electromagnetic carriers are at least the following means schematically included:
  • ⁇ one receiver (558) one transmitter (a radio head)
  • means to convert data received from air to port 100
  • ⁇ for controlling the processes on one or more WP at the same station and/or corresponding WPs at other station(s) is visualised as a processing function 566/1 where process control mechanisms for the communication between ports, switch function, handling of respective WP transfer internal in the station and corresponding WPs at other stations is performed via software
  • At least an antenna system is included (some possible exemplified by 582, 583 and 581) and at least a duplex filter arrangement 569 when frequency duplex is applied.
  • Means to intermediate store data (visualised by 551 M and/or 551 MUP) under periods when the data transfer requirement is higher than the allocated transfer rate though to a corresponding WP.
  • Means are included to control the average capacity requirement for burst data by including control of the load of an intermediate digital memory function Means are included to:
  • the processing function unit visualised by 566/1 may be located elsewhere or taken care of by processing unit or units for the switching function(s) indicated by 9.
  • the processing functions unit(s) is considered containing control programs for setting up and controlling and/or supervision of transmission between WPs.
  • Means for applying external communication devices for the set-up, configuration, control and/or supervision is applicable by assigning network management function terminal via an selectable WPs and/or on stations which is generally visualised by 210 for WP or an optional similar port 200 for a station.
  • Separation in sub-WPs of one WP is applied allowing a basic WP modem capacity, based on more tan one sub-carrier, to be spliced including the possible use in different directions creating virtually more than one WP. I.e. if a modem were focused on only one WP all capacity could be applied with higher transfer capacity WP in one direction and with one other WP.
  • WPs are further generally visualised, as an example only, of method and means how WPs is split up 570 into sub-WPs.
  • the method is also applicable for a WP, which is not separated in sub-WPs.
  • One such possible physical realisation is to use an intermediate frequency separation between radio heads (laser if applied) and logics, i.e. via cabling on a lower frequency than the bearer frequency.
  • Means to improve hop-lengths reduce cost and size of radio heads is applied by locating these as near as possible to horn and/or applied directly to a horn etc.
  • This method includes the use of antenna (generally exemplified by 581 or 583 or similar).
  • Means to allow location of a number of small radio transmitter/receivers on an antenna system is exemplifies by (581).
  • This antenna exemplified shows supports of multiple parallel beam operation (like multiple horn works on a common reflector). I.e. a radio head per horn is applied which in turn is connected to its respective WP and/or sub-WP in order to select the antenna coverage or direction.
  • the meaning with the various antenna lobe sizes shown is to indicate inculcation of regulation of transmission power depending on hop distance to corresponding WP.
  • Means to allocate any radio head to an number of directions is included in order to make it possible to select direction per WP, sub-WP etc. for continuos streams in point to point mode of operations between WPs and/or sbb-WPs. Transfer of data via the air between multiple WPs is applicable. This includes communication between one WP (sub-WP) and a number of other WPs (sub-WPs) in a point - multipoint mode, P-MP. This include means of selecting a number of sub-carriers and/or sub-channels (see generally figure 8 a) between respective pair of WPs for their respective transfer between each other.
  • Multiple carriers are also applicable to be possible to be used in common by multiple scattered WPs (sub-WPs).
  • Means to use the same and/or overlapping frequency bandwidth of one WP (sub-WP) communications resources at a station to be used by multiple other WPs (sub-WPs) at other stations (at least in the direction toward the scattered WPs) is applied.
  • Multiple users which transfer data between WPs (sub-WPs) on overlapping frequency bands (carrier, sub-carriers), include means to logically separate such traffic between the various users.
  • Means to separate multiple users traffic via WPs operating on overlapping frequencies is to separate users in segment on carriers, sub-carriers. Example of one of many possible segmentation structures per carrier is shown in figure 19.
  • Sharing of communication resources between users in the opposite direction from multiple WPs to one WP is not applicable on overlapping frequency due to interference.
  • Means to utilise powerful coding as used as in spread spectrum technologies like CDMA, W-CDMA, etc. and/or frequency division separation of sub-carriers are applied FDMA and/or if time division between the scattered WPs, TDMA, is applicable.
  • frequency-hopping schemes between a number of commonly sub-carriers different is in addition applicable.
  • Methods functions and means supporting continuos streams at selectable transfer rates including selection of number of carriers, selection of modulation level, error recovery.
  • ⁇ FDMA/FDMA i.e. individual selection of channels, sub-carriers in each direction (down and/or uplink)
  • ⁇ FDM/FDMA i.e. common share of bandwidth sub-carriers etc. by a group of WPs in down link direction (to multiple WPs) and selective use of separate frequencies on reverse up-link direction
  • ⁇ TDMA/TDMA i.e. share of a bandwidth
  • using time frame structure including means to allocate time slots within frames to select individual transfer capacity between WPs (sub-WPs) either in down and/or up-link direction
  • TDM/TDMA i.e. time division separation done logically on information transferred form a WP to multiple WPs and TDMA in the up-link direction
  • Means are included to utilise spread spectrum transmission utilising coding and/or frequency hopping for WPs arranged for point - point mode and or WPs arranged for P-MP mode.
  • Means to apply spatial division for the WPs arranged in P-MP mode of operation i.e. SDMA (spatial) are included (as visualise by 581 , figure 3).
  • Method in W-SENS approaches include effective adoption to station topology changes allowing new routing possibilities when new stations occurs in a network.
  • Means for structuring and/or restructuring of networks are included.
  • Means to allow the possibility to vary transfer and/or add transfer directions in unpredictable directions are included for point-point mode of operations as well as point-multipoint mode of operations between WPs.
  • the functionality is to prevent the need to (always) install physically new antennas (like 582, for every new added direction. I.e. by the time of installation of a new station an antenna which have a capability to add new main lobes into another added directions (including overlapping directions) could be applied. This if it would it economically considered applicable initially when there might be no knowledge of where the new WP and/or station will be.
  • the illustrated antenna 581 shows one such antenna with a capability to arrange WP and/or sub-WPs in multiple antenna lobe directions. It also visualises a possible spatial separation between communication of pairs of WPs in point-point mode and/or point - multipoint modes.
  • Arranging WP in pairs of Point-Point (P-P) communication means that a radio head (transmitter/receiver and filter, 568, 569) is used per lobe.
  • SDMA Space Division Multiple Access
  • an antenna solution similar to 583 with continuos coverage is applied i.e. included at least for FDMA/FDMA, FDM/FDMA, FDMA/TDMA, TDM/TDMA, TDM/CDMA.
  • Means to regulate transmitted power is applied including ability to make changes based on various of hop length and / or transmission, fading margin, bit error performance, etc. for each specific lobe direction and pair of WPs (sub-WPs) in communication.
  • the means to arrange for a spliced approach (sub WP) mentioned here is to make it possible to better utilise the total capacity according to variable demands. I.e. it also improve frequency efficiency instead of using the total bandwidth in all multiple directions as commonly used in standard TDM/TDMA, FDM/FDMA, CDMA and or similar approaches with or without spatial direction control.
  • Means of sharing equipment include: ⁇ sharing of station facilities by allowing the applying of a number of WPs working in multiple point - point mode with other scattered station
  • Switching and/or routing of traffic between stations in selected directions is for transmission and/or reception of data from user applications (like 1010/1020) and/or including communication with other stations (like 300, 301..) in different direction by digital switched/routing function applied at station
  • a group of sub-WPs may commonly share a sub-capacity (and physical bandwidth) of the total potentially available by a central WP.
  • Each sub-WP includes means to specifically select its bandwidth i.e. number of sub-channels and/or sub-carriers.
  • Other sub-WPs may select the use another bandwidth segment or use overlapping frequencies etc.
  • means are included to allow: ⁇ respective WP and/or sub-WP (the central or the remotes) to tailor for there respective transfer requirement and adopt to variable bandwidth requirements to reduce cost,
  • connectionless packet data I.e. reduce cost and bandwidth consumption than if all of the possible bandwidth options where available everywhere.
  • optimise quality of transfer of connectionless packet data is means for storing intermediate peak burst of interactive data (as an example by the use of TCP/IP) applicable.
  • the dotted square of 566/1/1 means to represents the actual processes controlled for a number of WPs. Similar functionality's as described for 551 M is considered for digital ports 100, 110 etc. visualised by 551 MUP. In addition these may as well work in co-ordination with each other if both are implemented.
  • a vision of a possible station platform is represented by 10.
  • a number of WPs, Ups, is shown in the figure to be controlled by a switching function unit 2.
  • a station is equipped with means for controlling the communication to and from a station.
  • Such controlling means is visualised by a functioning processing unit, 9.
  • One processing function unit 9 includes means for virtually emulate the processing functions of a WP or more (generally visualised by 9/1).
  • Control function, modems, separation of sub-carriers into sub-WPs etc. is shown in some general examples of systems implementation possibilities of a type of WP.
  • Means included for communication is: selection of sub-carriers to radio heads rate on sub-carriers, selection of error control and error correction on sub-carriers selection of number of sub-carriers, of power level of sub-carriers of intermediate frequency directions switching (ISW, fig. 31b)
  • FB4 is generally indicating functional means for combining 4 sub-channels on an intermediate frequency level and connect these channels to radio head 568 via an intermediate signal 565/1.
  • FB4 is generally indicating functional means for combining 4 sub-channels on an intermediate frequency level and connect these channels to radio head 568 via an intermediate signal 565/1.
  • the number of sub-channels for transmit and receive are equal. I.e. means are included to select a required number of channels grouped and the capacity in transmit respective receive direction.
  • a typical example is a frequency cannel plan based on 28 MHz, which may be spliced in a number of combined bandwidths, like 1.75, 3.5, 7, 14, 28 MHz. Other may be 1 MHz channels, 5, 10, 20, 40. 50, 100 depending on circumstances like applications, standards and countries. Arrangement of sub-carriers bandwidth and total bandwidth considered usable varies according to application etc. Means are included to make the carrier and/or sub-carrier bandwidth grouping feasible to be organised in a bunch of effectively grouped sub-carriers. I.e. as for Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation ODFM modulation (exemplified by a Hiperlan standard) etc. Additionally are means arranged to include: ⁇ effective filtering of a selected number of parallel sub-carriers
  • include selectively possible vary of modulation level
  • Method functions means include sub-channels to be possible to control for:
  • Groups of carriers controlled to selectable modulation levels i.e. control of group by group (example - a group of OFDM modems each containing a number of sub-carriers over a certain band - one example is a number of OFDM modems similar to those used by an evolving ETSI Hiperlan standard)
  • Control of carriers in frequencies is required to select appropriate radio channel, arrange frequency hoping schemes etc.
  • Means for internal control of any WP is available to a degree needed for functions envisaged. This includes signalling visualised by 2101 for control and supervision of modem, quality performance supervision, signal processing etc. 2102 is visualised to include control supervision of radio or light wave transmission. 2103 is visualising include control of antenna direction for spatial arrangements. Control and supervision signals includes typically interaction between a processing unit here represented by 566/1 and the other functional units of a WP, inclusive 566 which is visualised as a simple data control or flow mechanism and or switching function (see also fig 33 2 * ). The processing units of a WP could be seen as a function if it is remotely processed outside of the specific WP. As in cases of a central processing function for the switching performance is including real time communication control of one or more WPs.
  • FIG 5 is a central processing function, 9, visualised at station 10.
  • the WPs include means to locally and/or remotely control and supervise one or multiple WPs. Control of flows and performance include possible transparent use of either sides processing units function i.e. including remote overtake of one WP at one sire of another WP.
  • a result of this is any of two WP in communication could take over control of the other to increase security and flexibility at time of set up etc.
  • Tools are available to support installation, set-up, basic configuration, rearrange communication between stations, WPs etc.
  • Methods functions and Means are included to set up communication between any two WPs are included. This means include set up of required signalling between any two ports to perform communication effectively.
  • Generally described processing function units 566/1 are exchanging signalling data between each other by the use of one or more carrier which applied data demodulated and set to selected digital form at the receive end.
  • the communication process include: control of transfer requirement ⁇ set of bandwidth and number of carriers, control transmitted power if needed, control received level, record transmission quality, select speed on carriers or sub-carriers, ⁇ adjust and optimise antenna direction etc.
  • control data include information speed select
  • Such remote set up mechanism also include possible remote control of alignment between two antennas manually and/or distantly to adjust lobes towards each other, i.e. to properly align antennas to highest received level at both ends and/or reduce transmission error.
  • Means for controlling transfer rate settings and quality optimisation is included it is controllable via an network management function visualised by 210 for any WP (at least those equipped with a processing unit 566/1 ) and 200 for any station.
  • Means for remote control supervision of any station and WP from any station is applied by the functionality of network management functions. Means are included for manual and/or automatically selection of transfer requirements between pairs of WPs, including optimisation of a total transfer rate balanced with a selected transfer quality balanced on actual traffic requirement for such transfer between any pair of station stations connected.
  • Point-point mode of operation or FDMA type P-MP mode of operation are continuos streams of one or more sub-channels or sub-carriers (TC1 , TC2...RC1 , RC2..etc.) is applicable.
  • Means for combining digital user data and signalling information is applied on the sub-channels.
  • One of many possible data and signalling structures are possible.
  • FIG. 19 One example of a structure with reserved time for user data and signalling type of information is generally shown in figure 19.
  • the advantages with this protocol shown is that if continuos streams are used the time interruption indicated for signalling is applicable for various other possible features. It is applied to simplify frequency shift (under signalling time segment), speed changes, blocks of equal size of users data used independent of speed, optional use of time division (and TDMA) where the signalling time would be utilised as guard and contain synchronisation etc.
  • time division and TDMA
  • Methods functions and means included in a WP to perform required functions are 566, which is a function where typically; ⁇ serial data of 110 is matched with parallel data, signalling data of information to be transferred analysed,
  • the figure shows example of implementation of the method functions means in a system or part of a system.
  • Means include selection of modulation level, number of sub-channels (thus transfer rate) inclusive selection of electromagnetic radio frequency carrier selectively per direction.
  • FIG illustration show generally a selectable number of sub-channels are applied for the transfer of information between the two WPs, 550.
  • Figure 7b indicate number of channels allocated for transfer from station 10 to 11 and that the number is shifted to be less at a certain time.
  • Figure 7c illustrates a few number of station are allocated for transfer from station 11 to 10 initially and that the number of channels are increased after time xx.
  • Figure 7d illustrates a few number of station are allocated for transfer from station 11 to 10 initially and that the number of channels are increased after time xx.
  • the idea here is to generally visualise methods functions and means by one example of flows of data between stations 11 and 10.
  • stations 11 and 10 In order to simplify the explanation of this example are only two stations interconnected via WPs and Ups. It should be understood that a number of UPs and/or TPs and/or stations and/or pair of WPs could be involved in transactions of data including those between any functional devices of stations (processor functions, network management - signalling etc.).
  • the user connections in the example implies services multi service support for users being connected to a connectionless environment like Ethermet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or any future evolving standard of similar kind etc.
  • Transfer of Asynchronous Transfer Mode signals of various rates is further exemplified being transferred transparently should this be required.
  • Synchronous telecommunications signals of ITU-T standards from at least E1/T1 up to at least STM-1 rates 155 Mbit/s, overlayered with various protocols including telecommunication transfer SDH, SONET, IP and ATM.
  • ⁇ Data to be transferred at station 10, 10Ot includes ability to handle applications which uses various IP protocols (exemplified by at least the following included IPv4, IPv6, rslP, nat, IPsec etc.).
  • ⁇ Data signal entered, 100t contains signalling information which allow it to be switched and/or routed to interface 110t (a typical serial interface),
  • ⁇ Data entered (110t) which have to be routed to more than one WP at a station for parallel routing etc. is capable of being spliced it into various routes and/or distributed in parallel to more than one WP controlled by the switching function and/or its process function 566/1.
  • ⁇ Data content from 110t entered at WP 550 is including ability to analyse the type of transfer required, ⁇ Data to be transferred include ability to filtered out at 550,
  • ⁇ Data which has to be transferred as seamless synchronous (and/or synchronous) include analyse in 550 and the process of securing that enough transfer rate is applied between WPs is included (taking into consideration other user ports requirements).
  • ⁇ Data which accepts transfer of a certain (defined) degradation in terms of variable delays is defined and secured in a similar way as for synchronous
  • Data at least data that accepts variable transfer delays include possibility to passed via an intermediate buffer memory function 551 M interactive when user traffic at peaks are higher than the applied transfer capacity to the other station continuously supports
  • ⁇ Data status of such intermediate memory function is detectable in order to be used to regulate the transfer rate between the corresponding WPs at least for interactive data (typical may be example TCP/IP based traffic etc.).
  • ⁇ Data supposed to transferred to the other station inclusive signalling between stations and/or WPs and/or UPs etc. is packed in a logical format for the transaction in correspondence to a communications procedure via the air which may be based on standards and/or proprietary standards
  • ⁇ Data is transferred to a corresponding WP (in the example in point-point mode) where it is repacked at station 11 550 to a selected format and transmitted via 100r to switching function of station 11 where it is switched to UP 1010.
  • the method functions and means include use of more than one carrier.
  • the following methods functions and means are included: ⁇ ability to scale capacity between WPs by assigning a selectable number of sub-carriers
  • the figure generally visualises use of one type of FDM modulation for communication between WPs.
  • TC1 , TC2, TC3, TC,4....up to TCn is allocated for the traffic in on direction and another number of sub-channels (RD1, RC2 up to RCp) for the communication in the opposite direction.
  • the visualisation is only meant to schematically show a certain frequency spectrum of each sub-channel.
  • the actual frequency bandwidth of each subchannel is here shown to be about equal, however this may differ from application to allocation.
  • the use of a same frequency bandwidth apply to the use of Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation, OFDM, schemes and/or the use of similar band pass filtering of the sub-channels and other advantages.
  • the figure shows one of many possible modulator structures.
  • the figure visualises an example of a modulator (MOD) which modulate a number of sub-channels and applying a filter group consisting of 8 channels
  • FDM FDM, FDMA, TDM and or TDMA and or combinations including spatial separation are applicable.
  • Such functions are generally visualised by CH1 SPLIT or SW), at fig 8b and c.
  • the idea with this figure is to show one of many possible examples of means to arrange a number of sub-channels for one or more radio heads (or laser heads) in either in/out direction of a WP and or sub-WPs.
  • Functional unit CC4 means to show how 4 sub-channels in either in/or direction are used or usable. However, it is exemplified that variable bandwidth set-up is applicable by indicating 4 channels out and at least 1 channel in. The whole capacity of a modem may be used for one radio head (laser) or more directions or other combinations, as this is only a general visualisation.
  • Multiple ports are applicable to be connected at principally any at any station, in the example exemplified by 10, 11 , 12, 13, 14, 15 and their corresponding possible extensions like 13' and/or 13" etc. included to be usable to configure for various communications services and types of transactions.
  • the system implementation shown is indicating systems based on connectionless switching functions in the stations. Transparent communication is principally applicable, irrespective of the number of stations passed at least seen from a user perspective.
  • Stations virtually functioning in any station topology configuration principal are operations in a non-hierarchical structure implied in regard to each other.
  • ⁇ Station include options to add WPs to connect to new stations, delete WPs if stations are disconnected, re-configure WP for changing topology demands (different transfer capacity, directions etc.)
  • ⁇ Station include options to add various number and types of ports
  • Switching functions of stations include transferring, splitting of user data into more than one WP and/or sub-WP (route) to support various transfer routes to the same destination and/or multiply a similar message to multiple locations.
  • ⁇ Switching functions include UPs at various stations and/or at the same stations to transfer information via WPs or not ⁇ Stations are capable of emulating functions of wireless access solutions
  • Any station than can see another one and where these stations are equipped with a corresponding WP communication could be performed.
  • Synchronous, seamless synchronous flow requirements, asynchronous packets and/or cell is transferable virtually transparent.
  • the abbreviation 13/13713 (as generally described in figure 17 b and 18) indicate a possible use of a mixture of stations topologies which use one and/or multiple switch and/or router functions.
  • Methods, functions and means include: ⁇ Switching and/or routing between WPs and/or TPs and/or UPs inside stations (10 or 13 etc.) includes switching
  • the general idea is further to show (A) broadcast of user information i.e. where one source multiple its destinations (media distribution, films etc.), by applying broadcast protocol on applied data and means to respond to send such data along appropriate routes for each destination.
  • B, D indicates an establishment of a number of possible transparent connections between user application for asynchronous or synchronous communication, etc. between ports. I.e. principally including termination relaying and/or insertion of data and establish such connections at virtually any station.
  • Application included are transparent transmit of data between switching systems and/or mobile base stations, multiple indoor access base stations, multiple access solutions which include connections between these base stations. I.e. included are connections to external fixed wireless access system (example fig. 4 -b-) connecting scattered data and/or telecommunications networks etc.
  • FIG 3 show also some possible means to realise a seemingly access solution where WPs are organised in P-MP mode of operations for virtual creation of multiple point connections, however multiple point-point WP could as well be included to logically functioning as an access.
  • FIG 4 is an external access system (a) connected to switch (2) in a W-SENS wireless system.
  • Figure 10 a Figure 10 a is principally visualising one of many possible physical structures of a station and an example of a station connected to an external user network (packet data oriented - i.e. Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and a synchronous connections etc.).
  • Example in figures (1 -9) are WPs shown connected to digital ports 110, 111 etc.
  • switching and/or routing functionality's are located physically and or how differently switches/routers are interrelated, i.e. placed on roof top, in the basement, in the localities of user premises etc.
  • the figure shown an example of a switching function 2 related to a possible number of WPs connected via a port 110 or more ports 111 depending of the total flow required at a functional unit 600 include possibilities to be located at a distance from 610. I.e. 600 may be located outdoor and 610 indoor separated by x-m via a wire or fibre in order to simplify installation.
  • the functional unit 610 which also shown to contain a switching function 2' that could be a users network switch/router supporting internal communication of the data network shown by 1010, where 1012 represents multiple user connected to a local data network.
  • the block 1010 could represent one or more server functions etc.
  • Applicability of transparent synchronous connections is indicated by 101 .
  • Each such distributed switch function 2 at 600 could be arranged to handle a number of WPs in various directions and it could in fact alone include the services required.
  • connections between the switching functions and the WPs can be made short and one rugged version of 600 could be placed outdoor near an antenna system and support an number of directions form each such site. Including means to:
  • arrange physically close connections between respective WP, radio and antenna horns etc. ⁇ establish a station (or part of a station 600) to be built into a multi-lobe antenna equipped with a number of WPs etc.
  • An example of a possible implementation is to locate 4 x the 600 units (or more) on 4 separate walls of a building etc. all these connected to 610 located in a building at a terminal room etc. i.e. in order to establish a station node for a very high capacity arrangement covering various directions. Principal difference here between earlier description of a typical station could be to replace 110 with 100 and 600 with 10.
  • This figure illustrates some examples of packing data that was entered into a WP into some various formats to carriers and/or sub-carriers for the transmission over the air.
  • Transmission through the air that include carrying digital modulated information on radio frequency carriers includes possibilities to use a number of sub-carriers in parallel order to enhance communication between
  • Radio links are as an example typically limited to about 400-600 Mbit/s these rates could be superseded by the use of multiple parallel sub-channels implementation.
  • the OFDM modulation method in a coming Hiperlan short range standard could be applicable as well as the modem structures shown here for demonstration purpose or other modems for multi carriers and/or single carriers as well should it be required on specific WPs.
  • Methods means and functions are arranged to transfer data sequentially concerted and transferred secure limited time delay, limited extra ove.r- heads to achieve an appropriate security.
  • 11 c shows a slight variation.
  • picking and placing interrupted as a data block is applied and a new packet is applied is staring at a specific selectable sub-channel channel, in this case shown to be CH1.
  • Signalling for pack and/or repack data flow including of various options of signalling between WP and stations in the stream flown between WPs is applied.
  • serial structure of each such cell would similarly be applied byte by byte sequentially channel by channel in a similar way as for packets of variable lengths.
  • ATM cells would be extra protected in its content by error detection and/or in particular protect its five byte address code error correction codes to protect in particular this data with enough security etc.
  • connectionless switching functions I.e. as converted to asynchronous Ethernet types of ports (122 fig. 7 d) etc. when connectionless switching functions is applied.
  • a low level information protocol structure described in figure 19, i.e. information block shown in time segments that are called "data” include possible structure in such sizes as it at least could fit into short IP packet of 64 bytes and/or include an ATM cell of 53 bytes.
  • data In cases where ATM cells where transferred a number of bytes of error correction and error detection is possible additionally added to fill the "data" block should it be required. In fact this is considered a valuable option to specifically secure as the 5 byte header of an ATM cell is to poorly protected which could otherwise course loss and confusing in the network in making wrong decisions. Transfer of ATM cells or at least its addressing information is applicable to be secured to a level superseding BER 10-13 should this be needed.
  • utilise applied error detection codes applied on Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet data packets cells etc. ⁇ selectively add error detection's codes on selected parts of each part of a information as requires more security (like ATM header)
  • Methods functions and means include fast and transparent transfer of data at least for data of synchronous entering into a WP in order to avoid time delay in the transfer to corresponding stations switching functions in the signalling process and applying procedure to the transmission system by including: ⁇ Sequentially applying coding on data to be transferred
  • the figure means to visualise variable transfer flows requirements between various WPs and their in/or direction transmission. Selection of flow capacity and bandwidth adjustment is applicable at leased for radio transmission. I.e. one alternative approach would be to apply a total available transparency capacity between WPs to correspond directly to the UP/TP capacities. Methods functions and means are included for connectionless switching functions applied at stations where:
  • the WP would be supporting transparently the full capacity of 10, 100, 1000 Mbit/s through the air constantly applied for traffic between stations
  • ⁇ WPs are assigned between full bandwidth and/or no connection at all
  • connectionless switches instead of connecting communication between connectionless switches in a similar way as is cables where used are communication between such switches adapted to actual transfer capacity and type of traffic used in order to achieve as transparent communications as possible in particular when radio frequency carriers are used.
  • the reason for adoptions to radio transmission requires effective method functions and means in order to make it possible to share the frequency spectrum efficient among the stations, improve and/or optimise transfer capacity and/or improve adjustment for variable hop lengths, re-routing etc.
  • Methods functions and means are included in order to support the communication capacity and/or quality between UPs, TPs depending on traffic transfer requirements by: selection of physical bandwidths per pair of WP controlling of numbers of carriers and rates setting of modulation level on carriers between WPs, ⁇ setting of error correction setting of transmission power adoptions to measure quality performance,
  • controllable routing alternatives for ability to increase transfer capacity between UPs/TPs and/or increase security
  • W-SENS Wireless-Self Expansion Network Switching
  • An implementation results in an automatic aggregated switching capability/capacity in an area, but not only usable for an increased number of wireless connections, as also local switching at each spot would be possible to implement.
  • Methods functions and means includes establishing of end (UP) to end (UP) switched services within a geographical area between interrelated stations and/or between scattered W-SENS systems located at various area including ability to interconnect these W-SENS areas via other networks.
  • UP end
  • UP end
  • W-SENS end
  • standardised switching platforms for 2, 2'
  • Methods functions and means are included for establishment of new stations, re-arrangement of topologies, routes, etc. including use of flexible re-directable antenna solutions supporting selection lobes, lobe direction control, radio head (or laser) for connection to corresponding lobe direction and/or lobe directions etc.
  • a simple fixed directed antenna at one selected direction could be enough at first however if routes are added more sites would be reachable to improve the network thus pre-investments allows a simplified restructuring to new routes.
  • Methods functions and means are included to remotely via a network management tool function re-arrange traffic routes and/or add new routes and/or directions at stations prepared for such potential changes.
  • the principle idea with this figure is to vision differences between of full transparent unlimited connection between typically 100 or 1000 Mbit/s ports of switch and/routers. This is because the bandwidth limitations often needed to apply when radio spectrum is used because of limitation in bandwidth, variable hop length to cover, cost considerations, adoptions to actual bandwidth requirements and quality optimisation between each pair of WPs to use spectrum efficient etc. Considering some cases and for the sake of simplification a full and transparent bandwidth allocation may be applied if enough frequency spectrums are available. This may be the case for light wave, laser type of communication applied. However, in such case may another modulation channel structure be applied with one and/or fewer carrier (in fact similar to fibre transmission) as problems with delay spread would be of less significance for short hops and narrow beams etc. A pair of WPs connecting stations 10,12; 10,11 ,13,14; etc. are schematically indicating this.
  • the variable bandwidth allocation and speed control etc. mechanisms is generally shown by the interconnections of station 10, 11 and 12 etc.
  • the dotted lines between pairs of WPs are visualising a maximum total possible bandwidth between the respective stations.
  • Number 4011 at station 10 represent a maximum possible transmitted rate at a specific WP and 3011 represents a maximum receivable received rate (example station 10, 11).
  • the corresponding figures for station 11 is 3010 and 4010.
  • the indication 4001 between station 10 and 11 and 3001 represents the allocated actual transfer rate to and from the respective WPs and 4010 and 3010 represents the transmission direction.
  • the stations 13 and 14. indicated by dotted lines indicate an example of possible new stations. Also note the possible new routing between these two stations would be applicable in parallel to improve capacity between station 10 and 12 and/or allow redundancy, etc.
  • the figure visualises a view of the stations from above. It is also visualised that hop lengths between 10 and 13, 13 and 14, 14 and 12 is shorter than between 10 and 12 directly. I.e. traffic would be passing more station but using much shorter hops.
  • the increased number of stations would allow in increased number of new stations to be connected as typically line of site between WPs are normally envisaged.
  • An increased number of stations that are no-hierarchically connectable would further typically be separated in more variable elevation of the antenna beams which in addition improve the likely interference probability, hide receivers from each other by increased probability of physical obstacles, threes, hoses etc. This enhances the re-use of frequency spectrum probability considerably.
  • the figure illustrates some few examples of flows of user data trough stations, including separate routing.
  • the idea in addition is to generally visualise an example where different number of sub-channels /sub-carriers) are arrange for the transfer capacity that is needed for transferring the user information between stations and/or WPs applied.
  • the dashed lines a, b and c is here generally representing the routes.
  • the bandwidth are represented by 10-12, 10-11 and 11-12 which means to correspond to a number of sub-channels at operating on certain selected modulation levels each.
  • the meaning with the different filled rectangles is to show a possible different modulation levels selected on these sub-channels.
  • Figure 14 The figure shows data entered at one station from more than one direction (on separate WPs) is combined in a to another station (applicable to one WP).
  • the image generally visualises an example of how an allocated rates (4002) for transferring information (A) through the air from station 11. to 10. Further an allocated rate (4005) for transferring information (B) through the air from station 12 to 11. !t is also the meaning to generally visualise that the modulation level and/or information rates may be different. This is visualised in different structures on the information blocks of data transferred 11/100/WP/T1 for station 11-10. Respective 12/100/WP/T1 for station 12 - 10. These two flow are combined shown to be transferred into a WP which applies a capacity for the transfer at lesat enough for the summarised data (A+B).
  • This data including A and B is further applied on the a carrier and/or sub-carriers, modulated up-converted to the required electromagnetic high frequency carrier (radio or laser) and transferred via the air.
  • the corresponding WP it is down-converted and reshaped into appropriate form at the WP of station 13 where it all or partly may be dropped at one or more UP etc.
  • the transfer rate between the WPs for the station 10 - 13 connection is adjusted to conform to at least the sub of the incoming information from station 11 and 12, A+B. In this case for this flow is station 10 working as a repeater.
  • the idea with this figure is to visualise a few of many possible where multiple stations are interconnected in a network including redundancy routing to increase transfer and/or and improve security.
  • the example of network topology routing type of stations, external access solutions and/or virtual wireless access and/or number of WPs, UP etc. is only given as one example of possibilities and for demonstration purposes only.
  • Complementary arrangements between radio and laser for increased security and/or transfer capacity is visualised between stations 10 and 11.
  • the example means to visualise that two or more WPs (at 10 and 11 ) can be arranged in parallel, to increase capacity and/or improve redundancy between them.
  • a possible additional routing applicability via a number of stations 10-12-15- 11 is additionally shown.
  • the block 6000 means to generally symbolise an external wireless access system applied to station 10 and/or an internally virtually created wireless access system within W-SENS.
  • the wireless access is demonstrating ability to connect another station 14 via its WP. This is thought at least applicable as it (6000) operates as an internally created virtual access solution (see also figure 20).
  • stations 14 i.e. 1010' including data and or telephony services.
  • Such arrangement could encourage the use of very high rate licence free laser communication over limited distances as it could be effectively backed with radio transmission solutions and/or routing alternatives.
  • Methods functions and means includes arrangement of routing alternatives between stations for increase of capacity and/or security by including:
  • Means to route different type of data including synchronous, seamless synchronous and/or asynchronous selectable routes
  • FIG. 16 The idea with this figure is to visualise a block schematic view of one of many possible type of modular station arrangement. In this case is switching functions spliced into separate blocks, like 10/1 , 10/2, 10/N and 10'. In addition normal switching and routing capability is shown to perform in networks outside of each station but closely associated with each other. Exemplified via logical signalling via port 100" between R10'" (an external switch/router function to shown W-SENS applications) and 10' and/or similarly between port 100' 10' and 10/1 ; via port 100N' 10' and 10/N etc.
  • This example is referring to an implementation of a connectionless type of switching i.e. Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and other types of future standards in this segment.
  • the basic principles reviewed should be thought of be applicable if ATM switching functions where used at the stations in stead.
  • Some of the reasons behind arranging the stations spliced is to apply switching capability next to remote typically located roof-top mounting to scattered locations from a common platform 10' as an example in a terminal room etc. Allowing closely location to one or more WPs (and/or radio or laser means) close connected to antenna systems.
  • connections 1001' ....100N' could generally be seen similar to 100, 101 , etc. earlier described general station model as in figure 4 and 5. These ports 1001' etc. could be seen as an ordinary user port of a switching/routing platform connecting the scattered switches/routers 10/1 , 10/2 etc. where signalling between 10/1 , etc, and 10' is applied logically via standard communication.
  • the connection 1001' etc. may be based on fibre and/or copper and/or include wireless (radio and/or laser).
  • the connections of the respective WPs to 10/1 , 10/2 etc. is applicable to 110, 111 , 112 etc. as earlier described.
  • the functional unit 10' could be said to represent a connectionless switch/router of a customer and/or it could be representing a switching/routing combing the traffic in the various scattered functional units 10/1 , etc. at a certain nodal point.
  • it include integration of the W- SENS approach with a standard switch/routing platform (exemplified by R10'") which could as an example be a customer platform.
  • R10' standard switch/routing platform
  • the idea behind this is to include traffic to be interchangeable with the use of the features in respective air based and/or wire based.
  • W-SENS being an integrated part in standard switches/routers (10') network allowing traffic to be interchanged via scattered W-SENS. Illustrated by connection of 10' to R10'" and 15' to R12'".
  • Communicating arrangements though the air is including means to performed in a seamless logically similar way (seen from 10') as when other transmission media would be used, however with the rate and bandwidth adoptions envisaged in this document for wireless communication between WPs.
  • 10/1 includes means to act as a switch/router between the switch/router.10' and its respective WPs.
  • 10/1 includes means to act as a switch/router for traffic flows between station 12 and 13 through 10/1 via corresponding WPs.
  • the switching performance of particularly functions 10/1 , 10/2 etc. are equipped for means that include fast switching between WPs in particular. I.e. in order to transfer information that is routed through the network with seamless no or limited extra delay that does not severely effects standard flows of data at least within a reasonable number of repeating steps in an area.
  • the functional unit 10/1 ,10/2 etc. include means for connecting the respective functional unit 10/1 etc. to user applications (illustrated by port 100 etc.) i.e. also as describer visualised for station 10, 11 etc. in other figures.
  • Means are included to 10', 10/1.10/2 etc. for the ability to set-up, supervise and control, schematically shown by 200/1 for a remote switched function and/or 210 at WP or 200' for an integrated solution at 10'. Means are included to perform these operations from any of the ports visualised including at virtually at any station and/or at external network functional unit 200". Means included management functions to be based on Simple Network Management protocols, SNMP, and/or future and/or added enhancements of it.
  • the functional units R10'", R11'" etc. are considered to external connectionless networks. If ATM switching or combinations where used (in stead of the Ethernet based switching) it could represent such networks.
  • WPs is manageable via network management functions accessed via any of these functional units.
  • the figures 17 a and b are generally visualising two examples of many other possible building structures of stations in W-SENS approaches. Means including interrelated communication with each other meaning that pair of WPs between of the two can establish and perform as been described in this document. Other types of building structures than shown are of course obtainable.
  • the figure 17 a) shows one station with a switching functionality, which would be capable of connecting a number of and various types of WPs. It shows how a number of WPs connected via 110-113 is applied to an antenna solution, which contains a multiple beam arrangement into various directions. A few other WPs are shown. I.e. typically one direction per WP connecting stations at different distances.
  • the figure 17 b shows an example of a spliced arrangement of switching functions of a station consisting of two scattered sub-stations functions 10/1 , 10/2 connected to 10'.
  • the port visualised on station 11 represent the ability to connect users and terminate traffic at that port. I.e. means are included at sub-stations for external applications similar to what has been described for station.
  • the square 9000 generally indicate stations and/or sub-stations, which are directly switching and routing the wireless communication traffic within an area.
  • the square 10.000 generally visualise a comprehensive logical network (W-SENS). It could be seen as an approach, which serves a number of users scattered in a specific geographical area including wireless switching services and/or connections to external communications services.
  • Various types of means for network management set-up, control and supervision of W-SENS and applied external networks are generally visualised available at any of the mentioned locations. This includes as well means to logically access network management functions, databases, etc. via user ports as well. Like 200 at 10/1 or 200' at 10' or 200 at 12 or 200" at 10". Means for set-up, control and supervise is applicable principally at any location.
  • figure 19 The idea with figure 19 is to show one example, of many possible solutions of protocol applied for the transfer of digital bits and byte structure on each carrier, sub-carrier etc.
  • timing positions as a basis for time frame structure realisations (i.e. applied for TDMA versions including guard, synchronisation, switch time of antenna directions if dynamic spatial directions would be applied)
  • a certain case would be to arrange communications between WPs ports synchronously. I.e. synchronous communication is established between ports where a number of sub-carriers are set-up, certain frequencies are selected for transmission, a certain modulation level is set-up. I.e. this result in a transfer of a certain bandwidth and transfer capacity between WP where the proposed protocol structures could be used or ignored. Instead a logical protocol would be applicable which including an overlayered structure on selected sub-carriers.
  • the background for the means of applying a protocol of this type is to show communication possibilities of both IP and ATP, signalling and signal processing between any pair of WPs operating under various conditions.
  • a further reason is that it includes means for arranging communications for WPs organised in a P-MP mode. This includes means for arranging various equipment resource-sharing scheme like FDMA or TDMA or CDMA or combinations. Exemplified by FDMA that needs changes in time slots FDMA needs changes of sub-carriers regularly.
  • the signalling segments increments visualised between P1 like S1SxC1 , S2SxC1 etc. on channel 1 this certain segments is usable for users data and or signalling, error detection's error corrections etc. i.e. extra capacity used besides the data blocks D1SxC1 , D2SxC1 etc.
  • Data blocks represented by D1SxC1 etc. include adoption to a size (number of bits, bytes etc.) that would correspond to certain number or size of data on standard data packets and ATM cells transferred.
  • Timing segment visualised as S1 SxC1 , S2..etc. is usable.
  • the figure 19 a shows an example of separate sub-carriers each carrying user data and/or signalling.
  • Methods functions and means including of:
  • the number of selection of sub-carriers depending of each sub-channels appropriate rate (modulation level) and the sum assigned between the WPs for each particular hop.
  • An example of structure is shown for data and/or data and/or signalling blocks of data, (example fig 19 a) for CH2, D1SxC2 and D2SxC2 etc.).
  • the structure shown is understood to be consecutively repeatedly structured in time as indicated.
  • Co-ordination of timing between individual sub-channels is included.
  • An example of arrangements and means of time co-ordination between the subchannels, irrespective of the modulation level, are shown in the figure 19 b).
  • two channels CH1 and CH2 shown to be modulated differently, i.e. where CH1 transferring half the number of bits that is transferred on CH2.
  • P1 repeated time interval
  • Method functions and means are arranged to achieve an equal or seamless overlapping or equal repeated timing interval P1 which includes coordination between sub-channels as to allow frequency shift, time division etc. irrespective of the modulation level etc. of sub-channels without necessarily loosing data.
  • Method functions and means are included to support various communications procedures between ports are: ⁇ organise data entered into WP from packet switching function in an asynchronous (like Ethernet IP etc.) and/or synchronous (circuit switching, like ATM, including DTM) to be applied to certain transfer capacity between pair of WPs
  • allocate transfer capacity between WPs at least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point-point mode including FDM and/or FDMA and/or TDMA and/or CDMA mode of operation in point-multipoint mode, by assigning one and/or more carriers and/or sub-carriers (sub-channels)
  • allocate transfer capacity between WPs at least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point-point mode including FDM and/or FDMA and/or CDMA by assigning modulation method and demodulation method on carrier and/or sub-carrier
  • include adjustment of regulation of appropriate received radio transmission level to include a balance to the modulation level used and/or the detected error performance required between WPs by adjusting radio transmitter energy
  • include dual direction signalling via one and/or multiple sub-carriers between WPs in order to adjust communication between respective WPs in accordance to communication service requirement i.e. including transfer capacity, Bit Error Rate and transfer delay performance.
  • Carriers, sub-carriers etc. are including applicable adjustment capabilities to various multiplexing requirements based on timing protocol (one type of many possible exemplified in figure 19) applied. Transfer of user data, signalling between stations, WPs, etc, including selection of various capacity for signal processing is applicable to be mixed to meet transfer capacity and quality requirements for each pair of WPs.
  • Mixed signal processing and data include ability to repeatedly transmitted in blocks (like SISxCn, DISxCn, S2SxCn, D2SxCn .... etc. within T01 , T02 etc. I.e. where a number of blocks could correspond to the number of bits transmitted between each time specified as P1.
  • DISxCn data block
  • SIxCn signalling block
  • Method functions and means include combining number of and types of data blocks applied on carriers, sub-carriers for:
  • a selected part and/or number of such data block of 64 bytes could be used in addition per frame (T01) and/or multi-frame (T01 , T02 ....etc.) arrangements. I.e. if one of the 8 data blocks where used an additional 12 % is added to the 5 to 6 % for the signalling processing. Other combinations are of course applicable by selecting other number of segments.
  • Methods functions and means including application of signalling and or signal processing data etc. on separate sub-channels from sub-channels carrying typically user data is applicable in addition to include it on same sub-carriers as previously described.
  • Methods functions and means includes applicability to vary the multiples of groups of OFDM modulated sub-carriers functions to operate in parallel operation, i.e. to select an appropriate number of groups at an selected appropriate modulation level to achieve a selected transfer rate between pairs of WPs is applicable.
  • one group of sub-carriers of a modem set could deliver up to about 50 Mbit/s per 20 MHz, based on a 64 QAM modulation scheme per subchannel, four such groups of modems could deliver up 200 Mbit/s. I.e. within less than 80 MHz and eight groups could deliver 400 Mbit/s on 160 MHz bandwidth.
  • WPs including the station functions are applicable to meet existing and/or evolving co-existing and/or interoperability standards in the wireless area. Both as WP are used as multiple transmission means between stations and/or when WPs and station functionality's are integrated with software functions so as to virtually create emulation of stations in wireless access systems to reside on stations in W- SENS.
  • variable possible air interfaces is applicable to be included derivable from the optional means of the basic arrangements of transfer of user data, signalling and coding in sub-channels .
  • variable kind of proprietary air protocols is applicable to be included in parallel at any station.
  • the figure illustrates stations 10, 11 , 12 and 17, 18 as stations considered equipped with WPs (sub-WPs) arrange for transparent synchronous point- point communications arrangements between stations and/or similar arranged for point-multipoint arrangements.
  • WPs sub-WPs
  • the central station connect a number of station 13, 15, 14 in point - multipoint mode.
  • stations are able to virtually acting as as terminals (VWA 14, VWA 15) in addition station VWA13 is additionally designed to work as a repeater (with add/drop capability of user traffic shown by VW100 1010), for the terminal VWA 16.
  • the station VWA13 is applicable to operate as a central by WP 551 , which communicated with VWA16 and other stations typically below the line of sight to allow access towards VWA12.
  • VWA station which either operate as central, terminal and repeater, i.e. similar to a wireless access is applicable by the use of the methods functions and means basically explained for the W-SENS. Should such functions be required it would be applicable by assigning appropriate functioning WPs for such functions virtually in any number at any station.
  • a WP organised to operate as central exemplified at station 12 would include connection to the switching function visualised as 2BS i.e. utilising the actual stations switching functionality it is operating on and/or any of the W-SENS stations.
  • a WPs include both the ability to work as a central station and an underlying station in P-MP modes. I.e. an investment in a WP including transmitter and receiving equipment which is operating under a central WP together with a number of other WPs. This means that its capacity may not be fully utilise towards the central and as such if it should be able to use the remaining transmit and receive capacity with other WPs considerable a cost savings could be applicable with an enhanced switching and/or routing capability.
  • a WP which could be considered as underlying to more than one central WP is possible to utilise for improved redundancy and more efficient use of investment etc.
  • ⁇ A WP which is sharing its capacity with other stations (example 551 towards VWA 12), working as an underlying WP to VW12 include functions and means to share its transmission recourse capacity with other stations (example VW21) as a central ⁇ A WP which is working as an underlying station towards a central includes ability to work as an underlying to other central WPs
  • connect a WP to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufactures base station
  • connect appropriate WPs to stations and realise stations to operate as if they where stations in a wireless access system coping with appropriate standards for these and/or such stations interaction with other switching and/or routing systems
  • the dotted lines 511 , 512 are schematically meaning to show that various air interface protocols may be applied and operate in accordance to any wireless communication standard and/or proprietary standard.
  • the idea with figure 22 is to demonstrate and exemplify effects by using the method (W-SENS) and appropriate parts of sub-methods, implemented into some exemplified system variations in this patent application. It is visualised how very high capacity switching/routing functions at stations could support to perform possible alternative transparent flow of data between stations via WPs.
  • Each assigned WP to a station includes a transfer capacity and a selection of possible transfer capacity, which is typically much less than the total switching function capacity at the same station.
  • the figure is showing an idealised and/or theoretical structure in form of a star network topology applied for each station.
  • Figure 22 a is indicating a general model saying that if every "layer-level" of stations can connect another "layer” of station. The higher the levels of stations connected the higher the sum of the possible numbers of stations that can potentially co-operatively transfer information for users in the area. In the table below the figure 22 a) this is further explained.
  • switching delay assumed to be less than about one and/or a few microseconds per station would allow a seamless transparent flow in principle neglecting the numbers of stations in any local and/or regional area.
  • one microsecond is referred to about 300 m of propagation delay through the air, i.e. this and even delays which would be much higher is possible to neglect.
  • practical communications system implementation figures of higher 10, 20, 30 or more would still be possible to ignore.
  • Methods functions and means to support the expansion of networks and switching/routing options with every new station added into new is included by: ⁇ visioning and/or managing switching/routing selections via network management tools (see also fig 28),
  • an example of this effect is that a maintained transmission power level and a reduction of the hop lengths to half the distance results in a gain of 6 dB over noise.
  • the difference between a carrier to noise figure of QPSK and a modulation level like 16 QAM is that double transfer capacity of 16QAM leads to a required increase of signal over noise about 6-7 dB.
  • the increased signalling level is applicable to be used to increase transfer rate.
  • By changing the modulation level from QPSK to 16 QAM a doubling of the transfer rate would in principle be applicable at about maintained quality (however, not taken into account any eventual added overhead that are added for signal processing).
  • Transfer rates at specific selected sites and/or improve of frequency re-use are improved in a selected part of an area.
  • Figure 22 b shows an example of a scenario of an expanded network over time to illustrate the effects of implementations of a W-SENS approach.
  • the figure shows how network and stations interrelation is changed as new stations are added. It is also the meaning to visualise how routing alternatives are increased the more stations available.
  • the dotted lines are visualising established hops being potentially possible to gradually disconnect as visualised by 300x and 300y. At initially stages may long hops (between station 10 and 11 hop 300 etc.) normally be required. This could as an example require WPs to be equipped mainly for radio transmission in appropriate frequency bands as generally indicated by 300 between stations 10, 11 etc.
  • the figure 22 b is describing a scenario with a growing number of stations along the time.
  • At time 1 visualised may be to connect some few users wirelessly at fairly distant away from a network node point connected to a fibre backbone passing a city, sub-urban region etc.
  • the scenario at time 2 is meaning to visualise how a considerable number of stations have been connected. It is visualised that the hop length is relatively shorted than originally in addition many more potential places occur where traffic could be dropped and/or inserted to an existing fibre backbone which could offload traffic trough the air if required in order to improve the spectrum efficiency further.
  • the scenario at time 3 meaning to show an even denser station structures where many more users are connected.
  • As the network increases into density are also the use of new stations for low power radiation, high frequency (including laser) applicable.
  • Methods functions and means are included to connect stations equipped with WPs requiring less and less radiated power the denser the stations are located.
  • WPs are visualised applicable for connecting stations to each other to increase transfer capacity and/or improve the security and/or connection transfer capacity and bandwidth availability. These WPs may be based on radio and/or light-wave frequencies or around these typically used for laser.
  • Method functions means includes: ⁇ application of more than one WP at stations to arrange communication with a corresponding set of WPs at another station
  • ports 1000 of stations 10 and 11 could communicate via the paralleled arranged WPs (beams 320, 315) or via the other route via station 13 (321 ,316; 323,317).
  • WPs beams 320, 315
  • station 13 321 ,316; 323,317
  • any of the possible pair of WP connections between stations could be deleted and WPs which could offer properly transferred quality could be selected as an example if quality degrades etc. I.e. utilising very high frequency radio bands and/or laser etc.
  • Methods functions and means includes selection of both bandwidth (i.e. number of sub-channels) modulation level on carriers, transmission power level adjustments etc. are in addition applicable to maintain availability when the (air) environment course degradation.
  • Sensitivity to transfer quality degradation effected by air environment increases with longer hops and higher frequencies.
  • a few km could be considered to deliver appropriate quality (i.e. in the range of about 99.99%) when radio frequencies utilised in the range of 30-50 GHz, specifically in wet, worm and humid climates for high speed broad bandwidth digital transmission using reasonable transmission power level.
  • the full availability (exemplified by 99.99 % etc.) may only be applicable for hops less than a few 100 meters.
  • laser may offer a perfect quality during 80-90% of a long time period over longer hops (few km etc.) which may be utilised offering a licence free high bandwidth solution under long periods.
  • Methods functions and means for pair of WP in communication includes:
  • control polarisation of antennas apply cross polarised and/or single polarised transfer
  • Methods functions and means are included for WPs to: be arranged full port transparent communication capacity between stations at least based on connectionless switching functions include ability to be arranged for capacity transparency in correspondence to standard port (UP/TP) based on standard rates used on Ethernet standards use of WPs including transparent 10 Mbit/s and/or semi-duplex and or dupiex 100 Mbit/s and/or duplex 1000 Mbit/s transparency assignment of transfer capacity between ports including assignment of capacity permanently to the corresponding bit rate of any of the standard ports transparency.
  • assignment of transfer capacity between ports includes assignment of capacity to the rate of any of the standard ports rates under periods when each selective pair of WP have to be used for transfer
  • including means to maintain signalling capacity between ports which virtually is not allocated
  • including means to shift assignment of transparent capacity via WPs between standard rates i.e. between 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000
  • include available means to estimate the time which the full transparent capacity shall be allocated
  • FIG. 24 The idea with this figure is to demonstrate a possible scenario of many possible to occur in reality.
  • the W-SENS is at multiple selected stations showed applied via 1000 to another backbone network 1055, here supposed to be a fibre-based solution.
  • Fibre backbone ring solutions include often ability to access traffic from either side of the ring at add/drop locations to improve availability.
  • TP arrangements at W-SENS stations include means to add/drop traffic between fibre and W-SENS ports in order to route traffic to either fibre ring direction.
  • Etc. including ability to allocate connection to the appropriate available route ⁇ traffic drop/insert of multiples of stations (W-SENS) forming network that transferring information between each other station and UP/TP is including ability to selectively terminate air traffic at selected stations where deemed appropriate to improve security and/or offload use of frequency spectrum and/or other reasons
  • Termination point is schematically shown for an implemented W-SENS approach. This is visualised by station 12 which traffic could be wholly or partly routed via station 21 and/or terminated at station 20 as station 12 and 21 is shown to schematically able to establish communication if required via the dotted line 307/316, indicating laser and/or radio transfer.
  • An external switching/routing solution to the W-SENS is visualised by 12"', another is 1001. In the example given are these connected to a fibre backbone, 1055. It is anticipated that multiple users in the envisaged W- SENS implementation shown could support multiple connections transparently between the said external switching/routers and the respective application located under selected stations and user ports. Such traffic is meant to be possible in parallel to other types of connections for example to internally in W-SENS switch traffic between stations and ports.
  • the idea with this figure is to demonstrate the multiple inherent built in capabilities in highly dense station environment in W-SENS approaches.
  • the "A" in upper left hand is visualising radio communication between two stations, 1 la and 12a. Only one antenna beam direction 320A is shown as mentioned earlier in the document (to simplify drawings).
  • a corresponding figure at the top right hand side is visualising a certain transfer capacity, 11 - 12C, applied at a selected bandwidth modulation level and transfer rate at a certain transmission quality,.
  • Each station 11a and 12b have the possibility to be expanded to more stations, directions, improving the transfer capacity in total through such station, i.e. by assigning WPs and establish new communications routes to other stations. This is generally visualised by the dotted lines 11ax, 12, ax.
  • the figure left below "a" represents a station 13a to be applied between the previously mentions stations 11a, 12a.
  • the new station is assumed placed in the middle between the two originals.
  • the radio transmission power can be decreased about 6 dB with maintained quality and modulation level for the hops, 320a, 320b.
  • the exemplified increased ratio between signal to noise carrier and the increased availability factor would be possible to utilise in order to increase transfer capacity between respective WPs. This is possible by changing the modulation level. I.e. as an example if QPSK modulation where used at first 16 QAM modulation on carriers, sub-carriers would double the transfer rate between stations.
  • the hop length has generally a considerable strong influence on the overall quality performance for wireless communication in comparison to other factors. Reducing it generally would improve significantly improve the use of wireless even and specifically for electromagnetic frequencies above the radio bands.
  • This figure is generally visualising that the occupied spectrum per hop would be significantly decreased by the use of reduced hop length if the same transfer quality and transfer capacity were concerned .for the new shorter hops.
  • the rectangles represents the average spectrum area occupation (on way) and the dotted lines (triangle) is schematically visualising radiation occupation of a main lobe of a directed antenna.
  • This figure is illustrating a possible further improvement of transfer capacity on a limited frequency bandwidth. It illustrates the use of relatively increase of variations of elevations and possible increased hiding of stations (via an increased number of obstacles the shorter the hops and the closer to the user) in a W-SENS network.
  • the aggregated capacity transfer between station 11a and 12a would be possible, not only as two alternate routes, but also to increase the transfer capacity between ports at station 11a and 12a.
  • the transfer rate between 11a-13b and 13b 12a could be increased thus the new route via the shorter hops could offer a higher transfer capacity than the corresponding between 11 a - 12a on a given frequency spectrum.
  • FIG. 26 The figure above shows stations which are based on connectionless switching functions (packet structures, IP protocol based etc.) and stations based on circuit oriented switching functions based on ATM switching.
  • connectionless switching functions packet structures, IP protocol based etc.
  • circuit oriented switching functions based on ATM switching.
  • One example of methods functions and means arranged for possible integration between the two types is exemplified.
  • WPs normally 550
  • Stations are shown equipped with WPs used for transfer of data packets like IP etc. for synchronous, seamless synchronous, and/or asynchronous transfers.
  • WPs adopted for point-point and/or point-multipoint transferring ATM cells between stations based on ATM switching functions applicable for transfer of data based on synchronous, seamless synchronous and or asynchronous port standards.
  • ⁇ data on ATM cells entering into a WP for transfer to a corresponding WP is detectable in terms of addressing and/or in terms of transfer priority
  • connectionless type of switching assigned WP capacity is shown as 5541 respective 5531 and for ATM as 554A and 553A.
  • the use of the same figure of the flows between the WPs does not mean that it is or has to be the same frequency, bandwidth, capacity etc.
  • the possible selectable transfer rate between in any transmit or receive direction of the WPs are visualised by 4003 and 3003.
  • Station 10 shows a possible adaptive interconnectivity point between stations based on packet switching and/or ATM switching by the use of a specific WP adopted for communication with a stations (19) based on ATM switching functions. Further are shown capabilities of assigning Ethernet, ATM or/and standard interfaces used in the telecommunication, and/or media distribution environment, J-PEG etc.
  • antennas include not only radio but also corresponding optical means for transmit and/or receive laser or light-wave communication in one and/multiple directions.
  • the figure 27a is exemplifying a station, 10/10/1 etc. equipped with a number of WPs (550') each connected to a transmitter/receiver and via a filter to an antenna system 581 *. It is visualised:
  • any WP may select directions which may overlap in area and time with another parallel WP thus requiring either separation in frequency and/or time segments if applied
  • the generally visualised antenna system is shown to offer solutions in the geographical area schematically indicated to 331. I.e. the possible area, which could be served and the appropriate transmission power regulation to each hop etc. is shown applied by the variable antenna lobe sizes indicated. I.e. station 11 is further away than station 17.
  • phased array antennas supporting the possible use of multiple antenna beams each beam being applicable to use for one WP and/or sub-WP, each beam controllable in direction.
  • FIG 27 b Shows a similar situation as the previous antenna system. In this case however it is considered that each WP is to be connected to an antenna lobe that each works in its specific direction.
  • the antenna system would be arranged by selected directed antennas, either single fixed antenna, parabolic, horns etc. Alternatively is the use of a common reflector for multiple horns considered. By using multiple WPs the required area coverage or direction is selected.
  • the possible area cover is visualised to 332.
  • the area coverage is generally shown to be 333.
  • a radio head 568/569, is shown to be shared via the functional unit RSW. It include capability to arrange at least a an antenna lobe in a wanted direction in selected time by switching between antenna lobe directions in time which means to use one radio to be switched in multiple directions to communicate with other WPs in P-MP mode.
  • ISW intermediate level
  • the intermediate switch is selecting a radio head per direction and time.
  • the indication PDS means here a power distribution functional unit on radio frequency band and IDS means a similar power distribution arrangement on intermediate frequency bands.
  • Methods functions and means to communicate in various directions includes intermediate frequencies distribution and/or switching. It would include the use of practical and low cost implementations. I.e. distribution and/or switching is applied on:
  • the communication resources are applicable to be spliced into multiple virtual Sub-WPs.
  • the area coverage is shown to be 334.
  • Methods functions means included is to: set-up basics at installation time, ⁇ bandwidth transfer capacity between WPs, capacity allocation principles, re-configure, define routing alternatives, set quality performance, supervising, ⁇ WP performance, transfer quality performance between UPs/TPs etc. etc. etc. detect transfer capacity used by individual users apply billing solutions
  • This figure is generally showing an example of one of many possible visions of an implemented system via a network management system arrangement.
  • the example given may include information about stations that are connected with each other via WPs, frequencies are occupied, transfer rate - bandwidth allocation per pair of WPs, quality performance, power regulation, routing, redundancy etc.
  • supervision and control is controllable from various ports, including via UPs/TPs of any station.
  • Figure 29 a b c d The figure shows complementary means for sharing arranging a WP and variable modem capability, by part capacity, FB, or up to full modem capability FBx, in various directions.
  • Figure 29 a shows a time division splice via an intermediate frequency switch ISW (for TDMA or TDMA/SDMA or TDM/TDMA).
  • Figure 29 b shows an example of spatial arrangement where the power of one modem, FB, is distributed to multiple antennas pointing in required selected direction as a seamless FDMA/SDMA alike application per WP or multiple virtual WPs if the modem is spliced into more then one FB.
  • Figure 29 c and d shows a similar situation where the resource is shared or combined in a similar way but this time on a radio frequency level.
  • Figure 29 e is finally visualising a general model of possible means for a W- SENS based station which contains directional control digitally, performed via 10/10710/1 etc. between the WPs.
  • Means for such equipment resource sharing methodology is being established for communications connections between multiple switches.
  • This communications arrangements includes in addition similar set-up, control and supervisory arrangement as have been described for WPs arranged in pairs mainly.
  • a WP contains at least a port for connections to and from another switch/router function and/or other network and/or ports to the air connected for communication to and from another WP at another station, T300 represents the Wireless Port Air Transmit, WPAT.
  • WPAT Wireless Port Air Transmit
  • the receive side R 300 is called WPAR. Similar acronyms are used for the opposite direction, xxxxxxxx
  • Methods functions and means includes WPs to set communicate with another WP via processing functional unit 566/1 to:
  • Method functions and means for virtual emulation of required functions of 566/1 at different location is included if such processing unit is physically applied at an WP, sub-WP or not.
  • one functional processing unit to control more than one WP at the same station and/or for one stations functional unit 566/1 to virtually act for another stations selected WPs as its own functional unit.
  • the functional processing unit 566/1 is included with means for supervision and/or control, which is physically shown accessible via port 210, 210' and/or virtually via any other network management port 200, 200' and/or another station and/or virtually via user ports.
  • W-SENS stations In the cases user ports are access network management functionality's of W-SENS stations, WPs, UPs,TPs etc. at least selected data is accessible dependent on authority. Methods functions and means on network management applied for W-SENS include:
  • connectionless communication and switching means for handling communication between paired WPs and 566/1 and their communication with respective switch side is including: ⁇ IP addressing of logical units in W-SENS ⁇ Fast switching/routing at least for data WP switched data transfer
  • Equipping a station include application of at least a switching functional unit of a station, at least a processing functional unit, at least one applied WP, at least one UP and/or TP if traffic has to be dropped or inserted and/or managed. Here it is called 10/10,0/10/1.
  • Such structure is applicable to allow for simple installations with gradual expansion capabilities in capacity, ports, functionality and new WPs (sub- WPs) for new directions etc.
  • Such station is designed for being able to transfer higher capacity in many more directions via one and/or an number of WPs WPs which could be connected to each basic station units 10/10,0/10/1.
  • An initial implementation could be done by a) (10/10,0/10/1) which is possible to expand to b) (10,1) an another basic unit -with or without switching functionality and/or processing functional unit. This can be further being expanded gradually into more units. If it needed or foreseen from beginning that more directions have to be covered this arranged as an example by A1 complemented by A2, A3, A4 etc. Thus 10,0 and 10,1 is in this case considered to being prepared for fewer WPs and user ports than the station type called 10/10/1. Further below are station 10' considered to represent a general available connectionless switch and/or router as mentioned in figures 16, 17 and 18 and 10" is considered to represent an external network which users under one or more W-SENS networks can communicate via.
  • DSW in the figure generally refers to digital switching between beam elevations in point-point mode. Intermediate switching and or power distribution ISW/IDS. Radio frequency switching and/or distribution
  • RSW/PDS refers to possible selections of antenna beams elevation in P-MP mode.
  • These include protocols for FDM and/or TDM and/or FDMA and/or TDMA; This including spatial communication or not (fig.29). It includes possible realisation of virtual wireless access station functionality as central and/or terminal.
  • This figures complement the figure 31 a and visualise methods functions and means for establishing point - multipoint operation organised by a.WP and/or sub-WP including:
  • This arrangement include establishment of transfer capacity of various transfer speeds between WPs establishing communication with more then one other WP i.e. in P-MP mode of operation.
  • P-MP modes of operation include methods functions and means for: ⁇ frequency (like no of sub-carriers selected and modulation level)
  • ⁇ code (like operation on overlapping frequencies where channels of data information is applied and modulated on carriers including codes unique for each data channel to allow for carrying multiple data channels on overlapping frequency bands, CDMA, W-CDMA etc.)
  • ⁇ combinations of sharing principles ⁇ omni-directional antennas (including TDM/TDMA mode, FDM/FDMA mode, CDM (Code Division Multiplexing)/CDMA and or combinations.
  • FIG. 19 The figures visualise some additional information to figure 19 and its description. It show a use of an added protocol to carriers in this case demonstrated by two transfer channels Block a) and Block b) separated in time segment.
  • Block a assumed to typically carry users data
  • Block "b” typically carry signalling, error detection, error corrections codes etc. repeatedly on each sub-channel, as also shown in figure 19.
  • 32 b is shown how the various Blocks are separated in time with normally a higher number of bytes for data transfer and less number of bytes for signalling. It is also shown to include possible interruptions in the data flow to repeatedly occur when Bloch "b" (signalling information etc.) is transferred. It is visualise that a consecutive time interruption P1 is possible to co-ordinate under time of a Block "b". Method functions and means are included to allow a seamless transparent flow of user information etc. regardless of:
  • Figure 32 c shows principally that the illustrated time separation of blocks of various size on carriers to make mentioned functionality's applicable in addition include a transparent flow utilisation, a+b, by an overplayed logical protocol, if this is deemed applicable, as it may in cases for point-point WPs (sub-WPs) with very few changes of transfer speeds on carriers, number of carriers, frequency or where principally no error detection coding and/or error correction coding is applicable and/or where such coding is included in an overlayered protocol etc.
  • sub-WPs point-point WPs
  • ⁇ traffic requirements between ports UPs and/or TPs is identified either manually, and/or automatically measured and/or ⁇ mechanisms to adopt the transfer rate in the W-SENS network for required transfer capacity is applied (by routing between stations, bandwidth allocation, modulation level adjustment etc. per pair of WPs involved)
  • ⁇ WPs are arranged at station to establish transparent synchronous communication between corresponding stations and respective WPs
  • ⁇ bandwidth and transfer capacity is selected in the In and out direction of each WP (exemplified between station 10 and 11 out represents at10+bt10 and in ar11 +br11 )
  • the port 100 is visualising an example of a port operating at a capacity in dual direction of Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or STM - 1 etc.
  • the WP from station 10 - 11 is at the time shown set to an unbalanced rate indicating more transfer capacity being allocated from station 10 to 11 then the opposite way.
  • the dotted lined 100 TL indicates application of logical protocol from the station 10 to an applied WP, which is detectable at WP and appropriate, applied signalling, is transferable to the other corresponding station, included switching and/or routing instructions etc.
  • 100 RL includes logical protocol from the WP to the station 10 and in fact it includes possible protocols from other stations concerned.
  • Communication protocols between pair of WP includes fast assignments and/or de-assignment of capacity, bandwidth in selected steps of sub- carriers, modulation level, error coding.
  • IP addressing of communications unit identifications is included. Using connectionless switching based on IP leads to the possible include of addressing set-up supervision and control from any port 210/2107200 and or user ports (100 etc.) as well.
  • the figure shows an example of one of many possible ways of realisation of functions of a basic station and/or WP function, based on the method and sub-methods mentioned. It is just shown as an example to verify the possibility to realise a W-SENS approach based on a limited number of basic functional core units. It is of course only one example and many other possibilities to realise stations WPs ports etc. would be possible.
  • connectionless switching is considered in the example.
  • a fast switching and/or routing functional unit 2 * typically arranged for high capacity transfer and fast switching routing capability is shown in the figure.
  • a number of ports are principally shown be to be possible to connect to 2 * .
  • the number and the specific types of ports would depend in actual requirement type or ports and connections to 2 * could vary from installation to installation.
  • a possible network management port 210olP is visualised.
  • FIG. 31 a and figure 33 it is shown how data from a local application can be transferred via the switch to a number of possible WPs to the wanted direction and corresponding WP and station.
  • the figure generally illustrates the multiple direction and multiple possible switching alternatives for local and/or remote transferees possible.
  • Incoming data (on CH1 ..CH3) from another station and WP arrives from the air via the antenna system, receiver, demodulator, re-packing functions unit DTO etc. entering into the switch functions 2*.
  • Received to the switch in packet forms this data can either be possible to control to be terminated fully or partly at a location via one or several ports (PTE) or transferred to port 1 PTE. It can in addition fully or partly be transferred to the same or another WP, i.e. eventually in another direction via one or a number of ports (PAI).
  • PTE ports
  • PAI number of ports
  • Methods functions and means include: ⁇ co-ordination of transferees through WPs on overlapping directions which either risks to interfere and/or actually interfere with other WPs or sub- WPs is to co-ordinated is at least controllable via frequency bandwidth selection for any WP ⁇ timing control between WPs operating in P-MP mode on overlapping frequencies
  • means for other counter measures to handle interference and/or optimise transfer quality in general is applicable for WP transfers.
  • each new station at each new location is potential increasing the total transfer capacity in the air for a geographical region considerable and in addition it allow for multiple more routes to be applied by using multiple WPs.
  • every new station is potentially adding capacity to be possible to be utilised by other stations and users in a certain geographical area and/or it allow expansion of the area service coverage.
  • New station allow shortened hop lengths, increased routing alternatives, reduced transmission power, increased spectrum utilisation etc. which is further helping to better utilise every such new station for the air and/or potentially for the ground application (at customers locations as well) in combination.
  • Example, a group of 10.000 stations (16 Gbit/s x 10.000) spread in a city represents a total switching and potential transfer capacity through the air of
  • functional unit represented by 566/1. It is connected to the switch 2 * and it performs its control of other functional units typically via the switch. I.e. the ability to interact between data to be transmitted and or received via the air is managed via an interaction between DTI, DTO and 566/1.
  • the functional units shown could be a built in microprocessor for each WP or optionally the process and control mechanism may be running on another processor located at another switch, and or WP etc. I.e. the mentioned processor 566/1 may also include functions to handle similar processes for other switches at other stations and their WPs etc.
  • network management ports include connection via processing unit port 210.
  • the shown fast switch allow transparent flow of data between is ports, 1 PA yPAI and 1 PTE..xPTE for synchronous or asynchronous type of data flows requirements with a minimum delay, i.e. to allow for traffic routing to pass multiple stations with insignificant time delays for most standards application.
  • Internal buffer memories are considered built in and additional memories are included for functions as describer fig 12. 551/M, i.e. applicable to increase the efficiently of handling interactive data transfer bandwidth allocations.
  • DIR and DIT interfaces represent the digital serial format towards the air transmission functions.
  • the functional units for data that is organised for air transmission, including functions for protocol analyse volume analyse for bandwidth requirements, re-structure of received data are represented by DTO and DTI.
  • DIQR and DIQT represent digital interfaces towards modulator (567) and demodulator (552) arrangements.
  • the signal 2110T* represent transmit control functional signals including of settings of the transfer flow between the actual WPs and/or sub-WPs (like fig 5 570) etc. for various types of WPs for point - point or point - multipoint modes of operation.
  • the signal 2101 R* represent receive control including and supervision of received data quality, instructions from the corresponding data received quality at the actual site including receiving of quality performance of the other end, receive of instructions from the other end regarding modulation changes, carrier changes, coding changes, frequency changes etc.
  • the internal control and signalling of respective WPs transmission devices including antenna control is represented generally by 2101 , 2102, 2103.
  • An internal and/or externally applied memory function supposed to handle interactive data transfer under the time the transfer rate available between WPs are less than peek data allowed is visualised by 551/M and/or 551 MUP (figure 5).
  • a port 1 PTE is applicable to Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbit/s in and out to the WP) and that 200 Mbit/s is the maximum capacity to be possible to transfer in each direction between a specific pair of WPs.
  • Methods functions and means is applied for analysing data transfer requirements considered being required to be sent as real time data and/or interactively.
  • One example is to "tag" and detect real time data with protocols higher priority than other data. Method functions and means are thus included to enable handling of differently tagged data separated:
  • ⁇ data transfers accepting variable speeds include the routing via intermediate memories 551 M etc. to handle the traffic peaks by smoothing out the transfer time delay when the capacity through WPs is less then a temporary need
  • ⁇ record transfer volume requirements is to watch the load on memory (551 M) associated between the PTE port and the DIT.
  • Traffic terminated to users and/or other station functions is here market 100T and 100R etc. or traffic to and from WP and other WPs are generally market 110T and 110R etc.
  • Alternative marking of the ports are 1 PAl...yPAI which is aimed for the air and the ports to other WPs or stations functions.
  • the ports 1 PTE ....xPTE represents the ports to other station functions or and/or user applications.
  • the type of interfaces considered to be included is as an example full duplex Ethernet 1000 Mbit/s and/or 100 Mbit/s full duplex and/or half duplex and/or 10 Mbit/s half duplex.
  • the packet decoder could include support of Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3/802.2 SNAP, IEEE 803.3/802.2, Netware 802.3 RAW for IPX only. Error indication encapsulation type Ipv4 and Ipv6 indication and the IP header checksum result.
  • the switch function 2* would be possible as an example to manufactured highly integrated or as an ASIC circuit basically which in addition may include principally other at least logical electronics functional blocks of the exemplified station.
  • the use of highly integrated components would make it possible assign WPs or stations virtually on roof tops behind a small antenna system for high frequency radio (typically > 10 GHz) or laser heads for such transmission means. Radio heads laser transmitters receivers etc. on high frequencies where at least radio heads should be possible to design for highly integrated lowest possible transmission power level and dissipation making it economically and physically attractive to connect them at antennas horns.
  • radio heads laser transmitters receivers etc. on high frequencies where at least radio heads should be possible to design for highly integrated lowest possible transmission power level and dissipation making it economically and physically attractive to connect them at antennas horns.
  • the radio extra buffer radio level would be possible to reduce in emission in accordance and possibly disconnected at certain time and re-used if needed. This is to illustrate one of many practical implementation arrangements to realise systems based on the W-SENS method efficiently.
  • each station including various radio wave carriers and light waves, B applicable to work as backbone for external wireless access solution - by letting other access system utilise any of the switching functions of a station
  • supports resource sharing in space, elevation, frequency - power regulation, planning rescheduling of routes increase possible increased variation in elevations, shortens hops, increase the possibility to transfer on higher speeds to maintained quality
  • supports equipment resource sharing of radio and or radio and modem in time and/or frequency and/or code - by the use of variations of P-MP schemes
  • supports both spatial and optionally omni-directional approaches - by the use of directed narrow beam antennas, laser beams etc., sector antennas
  • supports end to end communication between users connected to the stations also without routing via a network hierarchy -
  • supports all to all communication between stations - i.e. any station that radio optically can see another one can also principally be connected

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
  • Radio Relay Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to a network arrangement with switching and routing working in interaction with a wireless system including a radio network with variable capacity adaptation, a station for wireless switching and communication, and a port unit therefor. The core of the arrangement is a station comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.

Description

NETWORK ARRANGEMENT, STATION FOR WIRELESS SWITCHING, AND PORT UNIT THEREFOR
Field of invention This invention relates to a new physical and logical communications network and an architecture based on adoption of stations with wireless communication and switching between ports. The network solution could typically be implemented as a terrestrial network servicing multiple users at scattered locations.
Background
The invention offers principally any type of digital communication and/or distribution including broadband services by connecting users or applications at multiple stations' locations in an area which may be local or regional when applied as a terrestrial network. The network flexibility, capacity and capabilities are capable of growing as the number of stations is increasing. The invention provides a self-generating capability expansion the more the network i.e. the more stations is growing.
Stations include means for wireless communication between station sites, including very high capacity (in relation to the capacity per port) and fast switching function capability to switch and route digital data between sites through pairs of ports arranged for selected transfer capacity and to achieve seamless transparent flows of data with principally negligible time delay for the respective user data flows routed through such station. Wireless transmission through each pair of ports through the air includes conversion of digital information to be applied on one or more carriers. These carriers are up- or down-converted to suitable high frequencies including radio bands and/or laser frequencies.
The invention also relates to practical system implementations, and a primary focus has been laid on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol switching and/routing as it ideally combined with the invention. However, the invention does not exclude use of other switching solutions like ATM. In addition, conversion enabling transfer of other types of signals than the used switching platform is described.
State of the art
Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless methods for transferring digital information for data and telecommunication applications varies typically depending on transfer requirements. Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in different ways.
One prior method is to establish fixed connections without bandwidth variation for any uplink or downlink direction as it is done with point - point radio links. These are typically used for bit transparent continuous flows and no bandwidth or capacity variation between applications regardless of traffic demands or if interference occurs.
Another prior method is to arrange a wireless access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is connected to a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunication users' via remote wireless terminals.
A central wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless terminals placed at or near the location of the users. In addition repeaters with or without drop and insert traffic capabilities may be used to expand the coverage in cases where the central node is not able to connect directly.
Various wireless systems and solutions have been implemented or proposed over the years in order to support multiple scattered users in an area. This ranges from simple radio links connecting scattered groups of users remotely via telecommunications switches for telephony or switching/routing units for data users. The wireless access design approaches have been designed so that the wireless accesses were meant to virtually replace a wire etc. and connect users to a switching network that is different to the access system. This is a similar situation as with the copper wire for telephony networks, RadioLan like IEEE 802.11 etc. for data network access.
The user at the end in these cases has a simple radio terminal which does not need advanced functionality and the central or base station includes connection to one switching and/or routing platforms. In the radio access solutions the capacity and means (radio etc.) of a central station are shared by a group of terminals arranged in various schemes, typically arranged in a star topology point-multipoint (P-MP) but also more complex topologies exist. The access solutions includes typically sharing in time, frequency and codes TDMA, FDMA, CDMA or combinations thereof in order to share common equipment and radio transmission capacity among multiple users, with variable capacity demands for each connection. In addition optionally SDMA is provided by steerable (narrow) antenna beams applied in order to save spectrum, allow more users, increase the transmission speed, and decrease the influence of multi-path propagation. The invention
The invention offers a wireless solution including: establishment of connection of backbone solutions to other systems, accesses to other switching and /or routing platforms, switched connections between base stations or similar of internal inherent and/or external wireless access solutions and/or communications between users in wireless system including inherent Internet network functionality and/or with users in inherent or external wireless access solutions (including radio Ian, WLAN) fixed as well as mobile and, connections between connected users connected within a wireless solution to applications outside of such system. Backbone solutions and user traffic capability and inherent Internet capability transfer refer to digital transmission connection of capacities required for speech, video conferencing and media distribution from kbit to few Mbit/s (like El/Tl, E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit/s) up to at least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities) and gradually up to at least 1000 Mbit/s or more in order to include through broadband traffic and simultaneous multi user performance for media entertainment and business traffic. In fact transfer rates towards and including 1000 Mbit/s or multiples of it, may be applicable in radio and/or laser transmission applications via the wireless ports of the wireless system which inherently also is designed to be capable of supporting both high speed and secure communication arrangements.
The invention includes support of single and/or groups of users and communications services similar to leased lines or similar to virtual leased lines (with varying demands and capacity over time) between external applications and users ranging from a simple voice IP to advanced Internet video streaming services like product animations and entertainment films, news gathering etc. requiring up to one Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s or much more per individual user on demand.
The invention provides various routing alternatives in order to improve transfer capacity in a network implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc.
The invention is shown realised into systems based on fast connectionless type of switching. This type of switching function is shown to include adaptive wireless communication means between selected pairs of ports. Packet-oriented transmission services including control of various Internet Protocol (IP) based solutions are supported. This include means to support of interactive bursted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP protocol or similar. Additionally the invention handles IP based real time synchronous or seamless synchronism or near real-time IP protocols in order to support continuous streams of data typically required for voice and/or image transfer through such wireless systems.
A station is considered combined with at least one high capacity switch function with comprehensive switching and/or routing functionalities between User Ports or Terminal Ports (UPs or TPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs). A WP contains at least one wireless receiver and transmitter and modulator-demodulator (modem) and means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. between WPs. Means are included for coordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency re-use, organise communication between each pair of WPs and UPs / TPs. Such means include selective adoption of more than one sub-carrier, selection of transmission speed on sub-carriers or sub-channels at least for radio transmission. Means are included to signal information from packet data including real time IP and/or interactive IP data to be transferred through WPs to detect the bandwidth or capacity transfer requirement between each pair of WPs based on the information derived from the inherent switch (routing) function and transfer such information to respective WP and/or WPs involved in the transaction to make it possible to adopt to required capacity and quality performance. Means are inherently included at each WP to receive control information and/or transmit control information i.e. to select carrier and/or sub-carrier set number of carriers (bandwidth), adjust speed, adjust selective sub-channel level (to meet quality and/or standard spectrum mask performance), adjust error correction to meet appropriate quality performance, and adjust frequency on individual carriers and/or groups of carriers.
The invention enables traffic and/or distribution of data between stations to be switched/routed effectively between the wireless ports and the user or terminal ports based on the route needed, bandwidth availability, terrain and line of sight situation, redundant routing for security and/or capacity and/or based on sharing of frequency spectrum requirement in space with others to avoid degradation interference. Data is switched, routed, dropped, or inserted at any place where a station exists. In addition each new station inherently increases the total capacity, total wireless capacity and increases routing capability and in fact potential re-use efficiency in an area as means for adopting to new routing alternatives or set-ups and variable transmission performance capabilities is applied such as control of OFDM modems and transmitted energy and new direction alternatives when new stations are inserted.
The implementation of the method as described based on fast switches includes the possibility to establish principally unrestricted communications network topologies over relatively large areas locally regionally i.e. from about a few meters to tens of kilometres or more (before traffic is trunked through other backbone solutions like fibre etc. to another area) because the design of the switching function is such that a negligible time delay loss is achievable using fast connectionless switch platforms. Fast switching means a relatively short time delay per station in relation to the communication services that are transferred and passing stations. For dual communication like speech- or video telephony 4-5 ms may be required in total. As an example, this allows 100 microseconds per station when up to about 40 - 50 hops in total are taking part in an eventual conversation. In addition high speed switching capacity performance is applied, in comparison to the traffic transfer capacity between each pair of WPs, at least at stations through which traffic shall be routed, thus allowing potentially multiple WPs to be applied in various directions to scattered stations and users. This further improves the possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum more efficiently in particular when directed antenna beams are being used for communication between wireless ports. Due to the increased separation in elevations of beams, the more stations used in an area the more frequency resource sharing is optimised in such area.
The invention could be implemented into various systems and configurations using either packet types of switching and/routing including Internet Protocol (IP) connectionless based switching and routing at each station and/or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) type of circuit or cell-oriented or connection types of switching. Other switching methods or protocols could be applied with means to adopt allocated traffic to appropriate transfer through the air.
Highly integrated high speed fast switching units with routing capabilities emerge on the market today which makes it possible to ignore the physical size and influence of such functions even if they where inserted at each station. Furthermore, with the massive use these switches, these could be produced at a significantly reduced cost. This would allow low cost and feasible size stations which allow implementation behind a window, on a wall, a rooftop where the electronics is typically so small that it easily may be located behind a radio antenna, laser transmitter/receiver or similar. The invention includes that variable WPs can be working in accordance with different radio transmission and radio access standard requirements including means in OFDM modems enabling to select directly and/or control remotely via network management functions and/or automatically depending on bandwidth and/or capacity and/or quality requirement. The invention enables resource-sharing in wireless ports with methods such as TDMA, FDMA, CDMA and spread spectrum Frequency Hopping as in the radiolan access standard IEEE 802.11 traditionally used for access radio solutions with or without SDMA. In addition means using OFDM modems to perform traffic flows between radio based WPs is applicable to perform communication between WPs including means to control bandwidth, speed, transmission power, quality, standard emulation etc.
In the case of OFDM, the invention provides for assigning of selected activation and number of selected sub-channels (and/or sub-carriers) allowing gradual selection of the required bandwidth and transfer capacity between each pair of ports. It includes inherently or actively further means for adjustments between each pair of ports; possible selection of modulation level per sub-channel, error correction per subchannel, transmission power regulation per sub-channel and groups of channels in relation to transfer quality performance requirements, hop lengths, speed requirements, control of actual frequency spectrum performance requirement, adoption to wireless access or radio link spectrum and/or such equipment standard performance requirements, climate factors, terrain, redundancy routes based on bit error rate performance requirements and/or capacity requirement. These control functions may be realised as automatic or manual or a combination via network management functions which includes SNMP adoption and IP communication capability between an external data network and the switch at any station and its connected WPs via IP protocols.
Multiple carriers as used in OFDM has several advantages allowing much higher robustness against multipath influence (delay spread) with relatively longer time lengths on high level modem methods in comparison to single carriers. It has however some drawbacks as the radio transceivers have to take into consideration peak powers which may occur instantly. Effective precautions to eliminate and/or minimise these peak power effects are included like Coded ODFM. Another advantage of using multi carriers in general via OFDM and/or Coded OFDM and/or generally other means is that less noise in its respective sub-channel occur than in a corresponding wider band single carrier channel. This is usable to bridge either longer hops or use correspondingly more complex modulation methods which would increase the potential transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) per channel on the same hop lengths.
In addition the invention includes means to arrange functionalities for stations to virtually act as central stations (base stations) and/or terminal stations corresponding to wireless access systems based on various equipment resource sharing and capacity sharing principles. Thus, network stations include means for virtually acting as one or multiple access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes and/or transparent to radio link solutions with variable bandwidth requirements.
Systems implemented based on the invention would have the capability to complement typical existing and evolving solutions based on wire or fibre network in addition to compete or cope with other types of radio methods mentioned.
In the description the term wireless intends to include any kind of electromagnetic transmission through the air including transmission systems in radio frequency bands as well as light wave and/or laser technologies in suitable wavelengths for air transmission. There are several reasons for including light wave or laser communication, in spite of its hop length limitations under certain air conditions. One is because it has a narrower beam than a directed radio antenna, which leads to significantly less degradation effect by multipath reflections typical in radio transmission for high speed transfer. Laser has thus a potential possibility to support higher transmission channel speeds on each carrier. Speeds like 1000 Mbit/s or in fact higher speed, should such standards occur in connectionless communications, are possible. As an example these could be based on wavelength multiplexing technology. Laser communication does not typically require a licence. Risk of severe interference would normally not occur between stations.
Radio has its advantages and the invention enables a combination of the two transmission systems. The combination would allow communication of both radio and light-waves in parallel on the same routes and/or via different routes between stations, including laser transmission WPs that are backed by radio transmission WPs either to work in parallel or being used when required. This includes the possibility to use more than one route between stations and/or WPs for redundancy or other purposes like improved transfer capacity per connection or virtual IP based data flows through the system.
The invention provides for setting of transfer capacity via network management functions and/or possible automatic regulation of transfer capacity for the different types of real time and interactive transfer at the respective involved WPs. It includes further quality transfer settings between pairs of ports and defines possible selections of routes and other functions specifically mentioned for interacting and assigning transfer speed based on data derived from traffic at selected switches or switches for traffic requirement passing respective WPs. The invention provides a non-hierarchical wireless topology and internal switching capability within the network and it allow access between any two stations if air communication i.e. line of sight is possible. This is important as it saves spectrum and investments reduce equipment costs and speed up new infrastructure for broadband access requirement. This is different in comparison to standard wireless access system (in particular P-MP topologies) where terminal stations are not allowed to talk to each other. This is because they lack switching capability and the configuration itself. Further example is an MP access solution including systems using dynamic time sharing (TDMA) and space sharing mechanisms (SDMA). Its terminal and/or repeating stations are required to take the clock from a master clock station above resulting in a hierarchy unable to transfer data between such repeaters. This is because in the TDMA solution the central needs to synchronise the underlying terminals and control when the respective terminal shall communicate to the central (i.e. which time slots) so that the central station can have its antenna directed at the proper direction at the right time.
Summary of the invention
The present invention provides a station for wireless switching and communication comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
Preferably, the wireless port has a controllable bandwidth e.g. by means of an OFDM modem, wherein the bandwidth utilised by the modem is controlled by varying the number of subchannels used, varying the modulation level, varying the transmission power, and/or varying the error correction.
Also, the wireless port may be capable of emulating various wireless standards and protocols and resource sharing schemes such as FDMA, TDMA, CDMA or combinations of them.
In a preferred embodiment, the station further comprises a network management port (NMP) for communication with an external network management unit.
Preferably the switching unit is adapted both to connectionless and circuit-oriented switching and conversion therebetween, wherein the connectionless switching is based on packet switching and/or IP protocols, and the circuit-oriented switching is based on ATM. The present invention is also directed to a network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations of the above type, further comprising a network management unit capable of adding and deleting stations in the network.
In one network some stations are capable of functioning as repeating and terminal stations.
In a further network an external switching unit is provided for controlling the internal switching units of the stations. Preferably the external switching unit is adapted to set up alternative routes between stations.
In a further network complementary parallel routes are set up between pairs of stations. One complementary parallel route may be a radio channel, e.g. low bandwidth microwave, and the other complementary parallel route may be a high bandwidth laser channel.
In a further network some stations are capable of establishing point to multipoint communication. A wireless port may be adapted to work as a central for other wireless ports, sharing its capacity with a number of underlying wireless ports, such underlying wireless ports being able to commonly share its capacity with the central wireless port. A wireless port, which is sharing its capacity with other stations, and working as an underlying wireless port to these other stations may adapted to share its transmission resource capacity with other stations as a central. A wireless port which is working as an underlying station towards a central may be adapted to work as an underlying wireless port to other central wireless ports.
In a further network, the network is capable of emulating generic access systems. A wireless port is adapted to be connected to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufacturer's base station.
The present invention is also directed to a port unit for wireless switching and communication for connection to a station of the above type. According to the invention, the port unit comprises a modem and a radio unit and is arranged to be controlled by a control program through the station to which it is connected.
Detailed description
The invention is described in detail in the attached appendix A and drawings. APPENDIX A
The W-SENS - approach
This invention describes a method for establishing a new physical and logical communications network and architecture based on adoption of wireless communication and switching between ports. The network solution could typically be implemented as a terrestrial network servicing multiple users at scattered locations. However airborne locations of stations carried by various types of aircraft's, balloons etc. and/or satellite based etc. variations is applicable should it be required.
Background
This document is describing a method with complementary methods, which makes it possible to offer digital broadband services by connecting users at multiple stations locations in an area. The network flexibility, capacity and capabilities are capable to grow as the number of station are expanding thanks to the principles used on the contrary too earlier methods and/or systems known. In fact it leads to a self-generating capability expansion the more the network is growing, here coned to Wireless - Self-Expansion Network Switching, W-SENS.
Stations include means for wireless communication between station sites, including vary high capacity (typically in relation to traffic transferred capacity per station connection) fast switching function capability to switch and or route digital data between sites through pair of ports arranged for selected transfer capacity. Wireless transmission through each pair of ports through the air includes conversion of digital information to be applied on one or more carriers. These carriers are up or down converted to suitable high frequency electro-magnetic carrier frequency from including radio bands and/or above, including laser frequencies etc.
The method implemented in systems leads to surprising advantages (in relation to previous used wireless solutions) in terms of increased network capacity, flexibility and to a capability that is in practice will raise with network complexity. The more stations the more new station and the more air capacity is obtainable. Potentially are any wireless topology though of today applicable P-P, P-MP or MP (i.e. radio relay, wireless access etc.) to be included in a network based on the method etc. and it could also supersede these solutions.
In this description is also shown a number of added methods which are considered selectively included to work in combination with the method. In the examples of possible realisations into practical system implementations, a primer focus has been laid on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol switching and/routing as it ideally combined with the method. However the method, sub-methods, etc. does not excludes use of other switching solutions like ATM etc. In addition conversion of transfer requirement of other types of signals than the used switching platform and/or is described.
Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless methods for transferring digital information for data & telecommunication applications varies typically depending on transfer requirement. Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or of asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in different ways. One method is to establish fixed connections without bandwidth variation for any uplink or down link direction as it is done with point - point radio links. These are typically used for bit transparent continuous flows between applications regardless of traffic demands.
Another method is to arrange a wireless access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is connected to a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunications users wireless terminals. The communication between central/base and terminal stations operates in TDMA, FDMA or CDMA or combinations of them. Spatial division (SDMA) may be arranged by controlling antenna beams to point in directions of each communication requirement. The Radio Link (RL) consisting of a direct line of site connection or multiple hops in a repeated chain and/or loops and/or branch structure via multiplexing/de-multiplexing arrangement.
We are mainly refereeing to fixed applications as we are focusing of a method here, which shall be able to support very high bandwidth solution. However it does not prevent to use external mobile assess solutions and virtual creations of such systems to include into the network as been demonstrated.
The latter is for fixed applications often refereed to fixed wireless access FWA or broadband versions (B-FWA) of it (in Europe is this type presently standardised by ETSI/BRAN, HA or HL) or similar in the United States are LMDS solutions or IEEE 802.11 or 803.16 mentioned. Typical transmission applications could require balanced (equal capacity in both directions) but unbalanced (unequal capacity in up or down link) communication is getting more and more used in particular in modern access.
Considering access systems, a central wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless terminals placed at or near the location of the users. In addition repeaters may be used to expand the coverage in cases where the central node do not radio optically are able to directly connect.
Digital wireless media distribution system are typically considered separate solutions from these mentioned solutions above in that they have been focused on operating in broadcast mode. I'.e. these may be aimed to transmit huge information in the direction (unbalanced) where multiple scattered users are located (from a central node -downlink) and eventually less information could be arranged in a return channel (uplink), if such exists. Modern interactive communication like Internet, WEB communication, including speech, image transfers and possibly media distribution requires more than only one-way solution. Further bandwidth requirement may vary in time and direction, which should be handled properly in order to make it possible to utilise spectrum effectively and improve the traffic transfers on invested infrastructure.
Various wireless access systems and solutions have been implemented or proposed over the years in order to support multiple scattered users in an area. These access design approaches have been designed so that the wireless accesses where meant to replace a wire etc. and connect users to a switching network that is different to the access system. I.e. this is a similar situations as with the copper wire for telephony networks, RadioLan like IEEE 802.11 etc. for data networks access. The user at the end have a simple radio terminal with do not need advanced functionality and the central or base station includes connection to switching and/or routing platforms.
In the radio access solutions is capacity and means (radio etc.) of a central station shared by a group of terminals arranged in various schemes, typically arranged in a star topology point-multipoint (P-MP) nut also more complex topologies are shown. This includes sharing in time, frequency and codes TDMA, FDMA, CDMA or combinations thereof in order to share common equipment and radio transmission capacity among multiple users, which variable capacity demands for each connection. In addition optionally are SDMA arranged by.steerable (narrow) antenna beams applied in order to save spectrum, allow more users, increase the transmission speed, decrease influence of multi-path etc.
Nor does the communication solutions based on radio links offer integrated service adaptable capacity, multiple path capability, or increasing capabilities adaptive for multi-user connection requirements etc. Nor does these access solutions supports an all to all communication mode as in a mesh network topology structure, or support the capacity typically offered via radio links to multiple users, or including network capability in is self. Neither does a combination of them.
No wireless method and/or system solution exists which both is effectively operational to offer backbone solutions to other systems, accesses to other switching platforms, switched connections between users in a wireless system and/or, connections between connected users in a wireless solution to applications outside of such system. With backbone means here digital transmission connection capacities means from few Mbit/s (like E1/T1 , E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit s) up to at least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities). In fact transfer rates towards and including 1000 Mbit/s or multiples of it, may be applicable in radio and/or laser transmission applications.
The high capacity transfer would typically be depending on multiple direction of point - point transfer transmission method and modem used etc. Also so called connections can be indirectly considered as access for many users groups, a company connection etc.
Thus supporting groups of users may include multiple applications and users ranging from a simple voice to advance Internet and entertainment films etc. requiring up to one Mbit s or more per individual user. Connecting an apartment block could mean requirement of 100 Mbit s or more. The method and system based on the methods concerned is applicable be able to support such connection services. Thus to use such system as a tool for operators, Internet service providers, corporate networks etc. or mobile operator including W-CDMA base station transmission. The support of transfer and/or access and/or connection should at least be such that the use via the method and sub-methods and suggested systems described here is supposed to include the offer of capacities, which realistically and effectively support multiple users specifically in a city or sub-urban environment. This bearing in mind the emerging network capacity in next generation networks like Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, and other coming generation of connectionless type of networks standards and for connection oriented ATM, DTM switching and transmission.
The method and sub-method including ability to various routing alternatives in order to improve transfer capacity in a network implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc. The method is shown realised into systems based on fast connectionless type of switching as it is exemplified in this document. This type of switching function is shown to include adaptive wireless communication means between selected pair of ports. The packet oriented transmission services including control of various Internet Protocols (IP) based solutions would thus meant to be supported. This include means to support of interactive busted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP protocol or similar. Additionally means to handle IP based real time synchronous or seamless synchronism or near real-time IP protocols in order to support continuous streams of data typically required for voice and/or image transfer through such wireless systems.
As generally exemplified in many of the appended figures implementations based on such switching and wireless network topology is applicable for principally all kind of service requirement and any network topology could be supported. I.e. a station is considered combined with at least one high capacity switch function with comprehensive switching and/or routing functionality's between User Ports (UPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs). A WP contains at least one wireless receiver and transmitter and modulator demodulator and means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. between WPs. Means are included for co-ordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency re-use, organise communication between each pair of WPs and Ups, Further to organise the sum of pair of WPs to achieve appropriate quality, transfer capacity in total an any area where such system is implemented. Such means include selective adoption of more than one sub- carrier, variations capability selection of transmission speed on sub-carriers or sub-channels. The method and sub-methods could than effectively be implemented as a new type of comprehensive wireless network system serving multiple users in an area. It would not only be usable for transparent connections through the system or used as an access network, it would in addition effectively be capable of serving users connected with connectivity within such system. Thus functions including backbone (switching and transmission) facilities offered to other solutions (example wireless access solution), access type of solutions (transparent pipes through) for other systems, connections and internal switching between users located at any station.
The use of packet data oriented connectionless switching capability at each station is shown typically closely integrated with wireless transmission facilities (as wireless ports, examples fig 1 ,2,3,4,5,6, 16, 17a, 17b, 18... 33 etc.). It includes potentially offering of integrated switching services for switching WPs but also local switching in combination including transfers between UPs on other stations wirelessly connected via WPs. Thus, virtually offer as a switch/router function for local and/or remote communications requirements. Similar functions from additional network platform extended are applicable and/or possible to integrate between other switches/routers as shown in fig.16, 17 and 18. This examples shows how the method implemented could effectively support the realisation of a wireless network based both as standalone networks and as extensions and effectively integration with other for example already existing networks, fig 18. Where integration is performed via logical communication added for the purpose. In the figures, examples and further description are shown for demonstration purposes the implementation of the method and methods mainly related a connection less type of switching system platform. However ATM switching may have some advantages to use in regard to transfer surely synchronous data but would requires better clocking etc. than packet switching.
To create access, backbone and connections for various connectionless type of switched traffic seamless continuous streams of data typically for telecommunications trunks etc. leads to difficulties or design considerations. The disadvantage with standard packet data protocols to fully and absolutely securely transparency transfer information without loosing data is to be weighted against the flexibility connectionless switching. A method and means to secure such synchronous data transfer is to assign transfer bandwidth through the air between the respective WPs to get enough assurance of not loosing data, us real time type of IP protocols use of priorities for such traffic etc. by the IP protocols.
No other system or method exist for combining wireless and/or wired connect between switches that support comprehensively geographical communication multi - point services at multiple geographical locations. I.e. being able to effectively forming multiple locations service platform nodes containing access, backbone and internal traffic capability wirelessly. Local traffic may by switched optionally in addition via a switch function principally available at all locations where a station is located, example 2 at fig 4 or 2' or 2" at fig 16. Thus, multiple services similar to what is possible via standard switching/routing platforms is effectively obtainable by arranging communication between the stations (10, or 10', 11 , or 11' etc. 12 fig. 1 ,2, 18 etc.). Further provided the physical implementation of a station with the mentioned capabilities switching functions, transmission arrangements etc. are that it could be comparable in size and/or cost to typical wireless access solution based on TDMA, FDMA, CDMA etc. as highly integrated ASICs designs are feasible for generally any digital solution regardless performance. In addition means for point - multipoint (P-MP) arrangements for the transmission pipes between WPs that do not require utilising full capacity in point - point (P-P) mode is applicable. The method and sub- methods include that traffic between stations it switched/routed effectively between the wireless ports and the user or terminal ports based on the route needed, bandwidth availability, terrain and line of sight situation, redundant routing for security and/or capacity etc. This is exemplified for connectionless platform where multiple stations at various locations contains a high speed fast switching connectionless switch. This switch in it self could be seen as a backbone switch for a traditional wireless access or other networks. If each such switch is able to transport data between the other distributed switches in the order of Mbit/s or better Gigabit/s capacities it would lead to the creation of comprehensive and powerful network. Data is switched routed dropped inserted at any place where a station occur. In addition each new station inherently increases the total wireless capacity and increase routing capability and in fact potential re-use efficiency in an area. These types system solutions are generally coned to Wireless W-Self Expansion Network Switching (W-SENS).
It includes assign of all or part of the traffic in such network or to be logically combined with external switching platform (example fig 18) at any location or to multiple external switching platforms at different station locations. No method exists where it effectively includes a possibility to create any type of wireless network topology like P-P, P-MP, MP-MP at the same time. The implementation of the method as described based on fast switches includes the possibility to establish principally unrestricted communications network topologies because the design of the switching function are such that a neglected time delay loss is achievable using fast connectionless switch platforms like CXe-16. Further means to a connectionless approach includes that scattered stations principally "all stations" placed a locations that "sees" each other electro-magnetically is able to transfer data via corresponding WPs equipped for radio or laser, light-wave. No specific requirement for absolute time synchronisation such as for TDMA access solutions is required. This results in a solution that offers significant flexibility where any new station creates a new possibility to address other stations. In addition it leads to an inherent increased network capacity capability and increase improve routing possibilities, see also figure 25 a, b, c. This further improves the possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum more efficient when directed antenna beams are being used for communication between wireless ports, examples fig 1a and b. I.e. due to the separation in elevations of beams is space and frequency resource sharing implied in the area. It includes means for bandwidth adjustments, transmit power regulation etc. to improve it further.
No method exists for stations in communications networks, equipped with switching functionality and one or more adopted ports for wireless communication (Wireless Port, WP) where each such port communication with at least one other such WP at any corresponding station it communicates with. No method exists where such high capacity wireless multipoint communication services are obtainable, where use of such multiple paths is possible to establish. The solution to use scattered switches and multiple wireless port and adopt directed electromagnetic beams between these wireless ports and varies bandwidth and modulation complexity, error correction etc. The method could be implemented into various systems and configurations using either packet types of switching and/routing including Internet Protocol (IP) connectionless based switching and routing at each station or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) type of circuit or cell oriented or connection types of switching or other switching methods.
The method and other methods related is in this more detailed system implementation examples in this description is mainly concentration on the implementations including combined use of switches and/or routers typically implemented capable of handling data flows between such as Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports connected. The high speed switch functions (Fast and Giga) could be considered fast switches capable of keeping the switching time low and relatively constant in order to support streams through each switch with neglected delay in order to effectively transfer seamless synchronous transmissions transparently through multiple stations. These capabilities could typically be needed to seamless transparently handle both typical telecommunications flows of data through such system and typical burst interactive type of data effectively. An example of one of many possible implementations is to combine a switch function capable of handling at least multiple fast Ethernet (but preferably for very high capacity capability Gigabit Ethernet switches) port rates and assigned to it one or a selected number of WPs. The highly competitive data & telecom market leads to possible development highly integrated ASICs of low cost, or combinations of ASICs, FPGAs etc. specifically of digital electronics.
This would allow a low cost and feasible size which allow implementation behind a window, on a wall, a roof top where the electronics is typically so small that it takes easily place behind a radio antenna, laser transmitter receiver or similar.
Electronics for fast switching large volumes of data fast is preferable highly integrated. There are switches available at least as demonstrators today in chip formats which allows several Gbit/s of packets data (or ATM cells) being switched or routed with a minimum of transmission delay (as an example < 1 microsecond which corresponds to 300 m transmission delay through the air). Thus, fast switch functions based on highly integrated hardware which as an example is capable of transferring and switching multiples of 100 or 1000 Mbit/s of data with no significant time delay for a typical user even if many multiple switches are passed. Delays in the order of 4-5 ms would as an example accepted for voice communication without echo compensation. In GSM systems are about 90 ms delays occurring. The WPs include modem, signalling processing units and electronics and functions to arrange appropriate air protocols, standardised or proprietary. If transmission functions and switching functions etc. (see figure 33) are realised in highly integrated electronic devices in ASICs, FPGAs, DSPs, MMICs combined if necessary with discrete radio components filters etc. it could be arranged and mounted directly at the back of an radio antenna and take very little space. In volumes could the cost of such physical units be marginal, as any other commercial electronic item. The stations are further arranged so that the full use the transmission capacity of a each pair of one or multiple WPs could be used, instead of sharing radio channel capacity (and radio head) as in the case with traditional radio access TDMA, CDMA, FDMA. The W-SENS solution has further a benefit in comparison with the traditional wireless access approach today where wireless terminals under a base stations is designed only for access when it have no network intelligence, switching capabilities which enable intelligent repeating capability. The method include a possibility to add a sub-method where the share of a WPs radio transmission units and radio channel by allowing resource- sharing methods like TDMA, FDMA and CDMA with or without SDMA arranged between WPs.
I.e. a WP is in such case sharing its total capacity between more than one WP at different stations, exemplified in figure 3, 551 and 17 a, b. The design of a station including possible implementation of added WPs in order to expand area coverage, numbers of connections, routing alternatives and capacity etc. Just as an example of an implementation, it stations where equipped with a switch function of a capacity of up to about 10-16 Gbit/s total switching capacity. If it where capable of handling at least a number of 30 x 100 and 8 x 1000 Mbit/s ports.
Every new such station located in a certain area would be able to be expanded to 30-40 directions at least. Every new such station could in addition connect up to 30-40 new stations. This leads to a tremendous increase of switching power and new alternatives. Means to adopt such new topology and to use the gained switching and/or routing capability and tools for re-arrange the network topology is applicable. I.e. change transmitted electro-magnetic power, change of routes, change of transmission transfer capacity of WPs etc.
The multiple ports usable WP and UP, TP at every new station location (including integration with other switching networks at various locations, - see figure 17, 18) is gradually potentially increasing the actual capacity transfer capability in the air and on the ground.
Wireless communication into these exemplified 30 new stations is able to take place simultaneously. Narrow beams are applicable in high radio frequency bands (via directed lobes) and via laser etc. Thus multiple directions could be served on overlapping carrier frequencies from any station providing a reasonable interference discrimination is applied in radio bands by the directed antennas etc. Just as one example 1-2 degrees on a main lobe (3 dB level) could allow simultaneous use of spectrum on an direction 3-4 degrees of the first etc. as isolation would be 15 - 20 dB or similar.
Should frequency interference occur various means for avoiding quality degradation is applicable to the method. Like selection of separated frequency band, use alternative routes, variable modulation level, different coding etc, for the specific transfer. Each such station could service connection between up to 30 similar stations (without using conventional equipment resource sharing mechanisms as used in conventional TDMA, FDMA, CDMA) solutions. Further every of the 30 scattered stations could from their location serve 30 more and these 30 could serve another 30 etc. These example shows that it could lead to a more or less unlimited number of possible stations and extreme high traffic transfer capacity via the air in any geographical area like a city, sub-urban or rural environment. This on a limited spectrum as methods functions and means for increasingly efficient sharing of frequency spectrum is achieved by the including of beams direction, power regulation, modulation level adoption, routing selection, improved number of terminal points etc. (see fig. 25 and 22).
The stations would be scattered in an area where pairs of WPs are isolated effectively from other pairs of WPs in space by their position, transmission elevation and directed antenna laser beams etc. The more stations the . shorter the distance and the less transmission power required and the more possibilities to connect others or route traffic to avoid interference and terminate to other backbone networks etc. The switching and direction capacity mention above was only one of many possible examples of figures. The power is further demonstrated where each station limited to 4 WPs only. Scenery of a gradual implementation into such network is demonstrated by fig. 22 a and b. I.e. number of possible stations superseding the level mentioned 4°, 41, 42,43, 44, .. etc. stations. I.e. > 256 stations using four levels where 4 WPs per station.
The method described includes ability to establish communication between station in the same network in various directions at the same and/or different time on overlapping or adjacent frequency spectrum using spatial separation by antennas and/or lasers. No actuate timing and synchronisation requirement being necessarily implemented as proposed in earlier implementations using spatial separations for communication in multiple user environments. This is because pair of WP is establishing communication principally irrespective of communication between other pair of WPs at the same stations or on other stations.
Systems based on the method was coned W-SENS as it is sensible new wireless network approach different in comparison to conventional Fixed Wireless Access, based on TDMA, FDMA and CDMA with or without SDMA or with the radio link solution. However it may include all these functions. W-SENS includes options means for virtual operating as multiple functions similar to P-P radio links by adoption of UPs and assignment of enough transfer capacity between involved pair of WPs for a seamless bit and/or byte transparent transfer between UPs. In addition it includes means to arrange functionality's for stations to virtually function act as central station (base stations) and/or terminal stations corresponding to wireless access systems based on various equipment resource sharing and capacity sharing principles. e. wireless access working according to TDMA, TDM/TDM A, FDMA, FDM/FDMA and CDMA, including spatial separation or not (SDMA). Thus, in a W-SENS network stations include means for virtually acting as one or multiple access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes and/or transparent radio link solution, see figure 20, 21. The fact that it includes means for emulating these other functions, its own network functionality's, means to operate as backbone to other external access systems etc. (see fig. 4), leads to further significant advantages of the W-SENS approach in comparisons.
The method and sub-methods include means to conform W-SENS to act as various existing and evolving wireless standards of solutions mentioned in the areas mentioned above an in addition work on its own conditions in addition, superseding the existing solutions.
It includes means for internal operation in the modes similar to radio links, laser links, TDMA, FDMA and CDMA including spatial arrangements. I.e. mean to arranging selection of transmission capacity between switches via WPs arranged in P-MP mode of operations between WPs in FDMA, TDMA, CDMA schemes or combinations with or without spatial coverage by directed antenna beams, etc.
Every new station added results in a possible increase of wireless switching capacity by each such station. Each station connected in a W- SENS including wireless switching and/or routing capability is arranged with means to arrange one or more additional connection by adding WPs and establishes connections with other stations. Functional method and means to arrange communication selected transfer rates is included as sub- methods to the method. These sub-methods include selection of variable transfer rate selection (speed) by changing modem level and bandwidth adoptions in addition in accordance to, transfer rate required, bandwidth available, transfer quality performance needs etc. between each pair of WPs and/or UPs and/or TPs.
Systems implemented based on the methods would have the capability to complement typical existing and evolving solutions based on wires or fibre network in addition to compete or cope with other types of radio methods mentioned. I.e. fixed standard P-P radio links (including new p-p solutions like WinNet, 100 Mbit/s links), laser links etc. Examples of some broadband fixed wireless access solutions presently under standardisation for interoperability capability within ETSI/BRAN are HiperAccess, HiperLan, (and/or IEEE 802.11 , 802.16 etc. in US). Other standards to cope with are ETSI TM4 co-existence standards for wireless access and radio relays. There are a number of products falling under this category today. Some examples are TSR 34, Siemens - WalkAir, SR 500, Netro, and other products of wireless access type where radio channels and radio equipment are shared of a central station.
The functional method and means implemented into systems W-SENS include means to support much higher bandwidth to multiple scattered users via air transmission from any station in comparison to wireless access mentioned. The method which include possibility to combine distant wireless switching routing capability with local switching between ports which may or may not be including wireless ports, see fig. 17 a, b and fig 18.
In the description is wireless means including any kind of electromagnetic transmission through the air including transmission systems in radio frequency bands as well as laser technologies in suitable wavelengths for air transmission. A reason for including laser communication is several, in spite of its hop length limitations under certain air conditions. One is because it has a narrower beam than a directed radio antenna, which leads to significantly less degradation effect by multipath reflections typical in radio transmission for high speed transfer. Laser has thus a potential possibility to support higher transmission channel speeds like 1000 Mbit/s or in fact higher speed should such standards occur in connectionless communications. Laser communication does not require a licence, Risk of severe interfering would normally not occur between stations.
Radio has its advantages and the method include sub-methods for combing the two transmission systems. I.e. by including means to use the best from the two possibilities. Such added methods would allow communication of both radio and light-waves in parallel on the same routes and/or via different routes between station. A W-SENS implementation includes laser transmission WPs that are backed by radio transmission WPs either to work in parallel or being used when required. This includes the possibility to use more than one route between stations and/or WPs for redundancy or other purposes (see just one example of many possible in fig 23).
WPs include possible use of fully transparent speeds between switches and/or selectable rates. I.e. station WPs may be interconnected at fixed transmission rates, and other WPs based on variable rates. I.e. a WP based on laser frequencies could be chosen (to be applied) for fixed capacity transfer capability i.e. full 100 Mbit/s and/or 1000 Mbit/s capacity because of the availability of frequency spectrum etc. In this way is also a totally full transparency between WPs achievable. Methods functions and means for function is included to let the different routes uses different types of WPs. One may be to utilise variable capacity adjustments between pair of WPs (P-P) and another for fixed bandwidth allocation between WPs. Additional are methods functions and means included to handle fixed and variable capacity between WPs in P-P and/or P-MP mode, in time, at selected frequencies and/or codes. Fixed bandwidth could typically applied for laser irrespective of variable traffic demand, as spectrum space is less critical in comparison to radio frequency WPs. Methods functions and means are applicable for communication in W-SENS approaches where one or more WPs supporting very higher capacity transfer and other WPs adjusted for less capacity transfer or not used at all, at least as long as the corresponding high capacity WP link(s) is performing well. Means are included to handle traffic situations in such a way as an eventual degradation could be virtually as invisible as possible to connected users in time period when as an example another link degrades severely. I.e. means to back up connections via alternative WPs and/or via other routes (routes) is applicable. As an example radio communication WPs that at least are including functions to be adjusted to various selectable transfer rates is applicable at selective time being transferring higher rates if another alternative route is degraded. In addition adding of another route is applicable as an alternative or in addition, see fig. 25. Further example, one port - port communication between two stations is connected via radio and another via laser. The laser could be based on constant allocation of the bandwidth for simplicity reason and cost effectiveness and more or less meet full transparency with high speed communication port to port between WPs. A further example between two stations is a laser connection, which typically work well in short ranges, with clear sky etc. over few km. A radio transmission connection which is more insensitive to environment condition but which would have limited frequency bandwidth available in comparison would be backing a laser if it degrades or the two pair of WPs could work in parallel. The radio connection include means to adjust the transmission capacity (bandwidth, modulation, coding) to meet higher speed transmission requirements under the time the (fixed) typically laser transmission system is degraded during rain, snow, fog air pollution etc.
The possibility of supporting various communication requirements at multiple locations in an area locally and/or regionally is a crucial affair due to the high cost to establish new in particular high capacity services and the long time it would take to use cables fibre etc. The possibility to use of wireless networking means for multiple connections, accesses, backbone, distribution, internal services, etc. an a comprehensive gradually expandable network in any environment and to principally any end existing of foreseeable future user requirement is applicable by the use of W-SENS, as exemplified. W-SENS could typically include methods functions and means at stations containing of at least a switch function with a certain capacity, at least one WP and optionally one UP and /TP or more for traffic connections, if required (if not repeating only). W-SENS switching is applied based on packet switching including IP fast switching/routing capability or ATM switching. Using packet or IP switching as an example include at least 10 Mbit/s Ethernet or 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet and/or higher speed ports (like Gigabit Ethernet and gradually other standards when they occur) etc. would be closely associated with corresponding WP connections applied. Thus, the switch function selected should at least have the capacity to support these types of port capacities and the ability to arrange fast switching between these multiple ports. Methods functions and means are included to make it possible to use read logical data protocols including IP to allowing transparent and/or seamless transparent continuos flow between WPs and between any ports in communication. This includes ability to allocate transfer rates between WPs in correspondence of at least the rate of such transfer. Including means to detect real time requirement, set transfer rates in accordance, set priorities on data that shall be possible to transfer without ARQs, re-transmission etc. and/or apply bandwidth reservations and detect such reservations to allocate transfer rate in accordance.
Method and means included to "secure" transparent flow of bits (typically required for synchronous requirements) is in the communication process between pair of WPs are to secure that enough bandwidth or transfer rate for actual real time transmission requirements is applied. Further is means applied to prioritise such data traffic that require real transfer type of traffic requirement and assigning enough transfer rate for at least such data. Data transfer requirement of data with less priority as an example typical interactive burst type of data communication requirement, (only one example could be TCP/IP). The ability to set variable bandwidth requirement and set up of transfer capacity in either way down and up link is schematically visualised in figure 12, 4001 , 3001 etc. The allocated flow in either direction between pair of WPs is shown to be different and could typically be less than would be possible as the traffic flow varies.
I.e. methods functions and means are included to assure that the less critical data than real time data could use the remaining capacity set available as extra capacity besides the capacity that is required for continuous transparent flow of bits of data. Methods functions and means are available to select an appropriate average transfer rate based on an accepted delay, possible rate to use, etc., for interactive data transfers for either direction between each pair of WPs. That includes methods functions and means to store data under highly interactive periods when large chunks of data have to be transmitted and when the actual selected transfer rate for such data through any pair of WPs for the interactive data transmission is not enough. Methods functions and means to store such data under such periods are applicable by assigning an intermediate function of memory at a selectable size. This is schematically shown applied, in fig 12. at 551/M and/or fig. 5 at 551 MUP. Means to detect transfer delay, data overflow detection of such memory function is included. Thus, a method is included where a selection of a variable size of a memory function is optionally included. Assigning of variable transfer rates for interactive data as well as variable store capacity for each pair of WP in order to handle interactivity data transmission effectively. The method and an applied systems "pair of WP- links"
(visualised in fig 12 4010, 3010) means to visualise the possible vary of the transmission capacity between pair of WPs in various ways (up-link and/or down-link). Further such capacity will include means to select transfer rates depending on multiple factors, like: hop distance, frequency band, modulation/bandwidth per carrier channel, available radio power and/or laser power, capacity requirements including real time and interactive transfer considerations, level of error correction, quality requirement, alternate parallel routing, etc. I.e. means including tools for setting of actual transfer requirement through each pair of WPs is possible to match with the actual possibilities see fig 28. Example, if a transfer rates between two stations are applied with connectionless type of switches. If port is assigned corresponding to the standard capacity of 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s dual direction communication and it is considered the wireless connections (WPs) connecting the two sites are not able to allocate enough transfer capacity. I.e. in this case would less than 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s (which may be the case using radio over long hops).
If the actual capacity for at least for the seamless transparent flow of data is set to be enough and the extra capacity above this is set between the WPs selectively in either direction be used for remain interactive traffic as described earlier. Methods functions and means for setting of transfer capacity via network management functions and/or possible automatic regulation of transfer capacity for the different types of real time and interactive transfer is applicable at the respective involved WPs. The method of varying the transfer rate and means for it if applied in to a system is further is described in this document, see also figures 8, 14, 13, 11.
The switch function implemented in a system could be of various size depending of the number ports, capacity of the ports. We here exemplified a type of switch only to simplify the explanation. The need for higher and higher capacity in the networks leads to a rapid development of high-speed switching/routing system. Using as an example fibre connections a standard, and seamless unlimited capacity is achievable in a point to point link for connectionless switching based on IP protocols and/similar and/or ATM switching (of cells, including the 48+5 bytes per cell) should such switches be used. Considering wireless radio communication transfer rates between WPs in W-SENS is more limited than fibre. Thus, in the examples given switching capacities mentioned are fairly high today but not tomorrow particularly considering fibre as a transmission medium.
W-SENS allows each pair of WPs in communication to correspond to traditional radio links or superseding these as it includes means for multiple routings, adaptable bandwidth application, modulation level and a possible sub-channel selection approach applied, etc.
Thus W-SENS would be able to offer high capacity to many users in an area in comparison to the capacities from earlier wireless solutions. Comprehensive broadband communications services offered to multiple locations are far beyond earlier wireless solutions. Considering in addition both radio and laser communications the capacities on multiple ports may allow the use of ports utilising the full transparent port capacity between different stations. Thus, the exemplified capacity of 10-16 Gbit/s switch capacity seems of course high (it may be higher or less capacity) for wireless purposes communications application today, in relation to the capacities that is available on existing solutions. However, the meaning with example is to show that W-SENS is applicable to such high capacity meaning it could be used as a powerful communication alternative for new local and regional infrastructures.
Radio based WPs include methods functions and means to control: various frequency bandwidth controls by selection of number of allowed subchannels, various total transfer, selections of modulation level per carrier (see also fig 8), transmitted power regulation, based on distance quality requirements, etc.
Methods functions and means for spatial direction control, area coverage, routing arrangement and/or re-arrangement. Means in order to arrange selection of transfer rates between WPs, which is supposed to be smaller than capacity of a continuos flow of a carrier or sub-carriers is applicable by the possible selection on time, fragment selection similar to TDMA.
User ports, (UP) are exemplified in fig. 1 , 2, 3, 12, 17 a b and the numbers 100, 101 , 102 etc. Termination to other networks is mentioned Terminal Ports, (TP), see fig 1 1000, 1021)
Communication between UPs, TP and UPs via multiple stations over a landscape, etc. is principally interconnected via one or a multiple set of radio ports (WPs) connected. Meand for managing W-SENS approaches is visualised via Network Management Ports (NMPs) applicable to stations. Network control or sub-network control, WP control, fig 16 10, 1071 ,.10'N, 10" and fig. 18, 10.000, 9.000, NMS, NPM, NMP71 etc.
A pair or multiple WPs pairs are applicable d to be equipped at stations. Any station includes means for communication with any other station provided they optically see each other. As the number of stations and routes increase increased the possible routes and transfer capacity between stations is potentially increased etc. As an example if a new situation occur it could be of a great advantage to make use of it to include methods for re-arrange the routing between stations accordance. Thus, means are included which allows taking advantage of a new topology situation by re-arranging routes and adopting transfer capacity, power level etc. in accordance. This added functional means include a topology design and set up network tool involve operation via network management functions includes, capacity design tools, re-routing, map and topology guidelines.
As stations principally could be arranged to communicate in any direction or elevation with other stations via applied WPs, antenna systems or laser beams etc. The functional means include mechanisms of re-design where any new station that occurs in an implemented already available network based on the method (and a realised system W-SENS). Functional means are included in a way that such changes are possible to take advantage of by change transmission directions of station WPs to change from one station and its WP to another station and its WP by changing antenna directions or controlling electronically transmission in new directions.
Re-routing is includes functional means allowing control of transmission directions in various directions (spatially) and/or elevations by the possible control of different types of antennas. Various types of directable spatial antenna and/or laser beams are allowed to be included. Typically is one beam per WP-WP connections applied. I.e. a number of fixed antennas arranged to point in different directions and select the appropriate are applicable. Included are methods functions and means to control any of multiple horns arranged via reflected common sub-reflector to create multiple directional antennas to be connected to one or more WPs. Included are also methods functions and means using arrays of multiple horns and selecting the appropriate horn for a corresponding direction of another WP. Included are also functional means using phased array antennas with one or multiple beams applicable per pair of WP i.e. one beam is directed per pair of WPs, several WPs are considered to be able to be supported included on a common antenna platform (see also fig. 27).
The possible control of selection of alternative directions by possible selection between different pair of WPs means that systems implement on the methods offer seamless similar services but at much higher possible transfer rate etc. in comparison to traditional wireless access. I.e. multiple scattered users served by W-SENS leads to several considerable improvements in comparison as higher transfer rates, free topology etc. is achieved. Radio and radio channel capacity is not necessarily shared (among many stations and reduced in capacity). Further is advanced switching and/or routing possible and network integration to other "backbone" network at any point. The station could work as a backbone for an integrated access solution, see example figure 24 where one WP is establishing a P-MP communication with other WPs at different stations. The method of using multiple point - point communications between ports (via the air) and switch between them leads to a total station capacity, which would be much higher than in conventional access approaches. Additionally every switch functions added in a given area adds both the switching capacity in W-SENS it also potentially improve possible capacity transfer capacity.
Methods functions and means included for any of the integrated switched functions (1 , 2, 3, etc. schematically shown in figure drawings) include ability for external switch functions (fig 17 b 10" etc.) to work as integrated parts of one or more W-SENS solutions separated in various regions. This include methods functions and means for users connected under W-SENS to establish communication with users connected under such other external switch and/or routing system and/or with users connected at any another remote located W-SENS solution. Thus using an external switching/routing network within between, which is generally visualised in figure 16. Method functions means included at stations to work as a backbone switch function for any user connected anywhere in a topology. It includes ability to connect other wireless access systems central and/or base station to one of the stations switch functions and uses such access systems remote stations as transparent extensions to scattered locations which traffic is switched within a selected W-SENS station, see also figure 4.
Method functions and means are included to establish a non-hierarchical wireless topology of stations. This include "all - all" communication as long as stations virtually optically sees each other and are within appropriate distance on a appropriate frequency, transmit power etc. regardless of topology, I.e. the meaning central station or terminal station etc. as in conventional access networks is not applied. One example is given in fig 1 , where all stations are allowed to communicate 10, 11 , 12) and they are freely related to each other. User and/or terminal ports are freely defined at any station. This is different in comparison to standard wireless access system (in particular P-MP topologies) where terminal stations are not allowed to talk to each other. This is because they lack switching capability and the configuration itself. Further example is a MP access solutions including the use of dynamic time sharing (TDMA) and space sharing mechanisms (SDMA), TSR 34. Its terminal and/or repeating stations required to take the clock from a master clock station above resulting in a hierarchy unable data transfer between such repeaters, examples from system like TSR 34. This is because the central needs to synchronise the underlying the terminals and control when the respective terminal shall communicate to the central (i.e. which time slots) so that the central station can have its antenna directed at the proper direction at the right time.
No method and no system is shown in wireless networks where such free communication ("all-all") between any station is applicable. Where the meaning of central or terminal station is not applicable, where it is possible to establish comprehensive multi users communication as long as stations virtually "optically" sees each other. In order to adopt transfer between stations with low speed communication requirements between ports and/or to virtually include standardised solutions are method and function and means included to adopt to various resource sharing schemes used by wireless access solution and its standards.
It includes possible adoptions on stations to available standards or evolving standards etc. by European and/or US and/or Japanese standards any other institute. Like ETSI/TM 4 (BRAN, HA, HL) or IEEE etc. Virtual realisation of multiple functions of these standards are considered applicable and being potentially possible to operate in parallel to W-SENS method and its methods functions and means implementations. This is applicable by adopting actual specific WPs and associated user and/or terminal ports to conform to these standards. I.e. should as an example a specific air protocol exist for a specific standard required to be applied means to adopt to it for the communication via respective WP would be applied for this specific communication. See also figure 20 and 21. Realisation include specifically designed WPs for the purpose which would be virtually acting as a central station and multiple correspondingly specifically designed WPs would virtually as terminals (see example figure 20, 21 , 24). These functions are partly realised by arranging multiple P-MP modes of operation to be applied between WPs. Thus P-MP mode of communication include functions for the purpose of emulating wireless access structures and/or for allow for reduced and shared transmission capacity radio channels etc. between W-SENS stations switching functions. Methods functions and means for arranging communication between stations operating in multiple P-P modes and/or multiple P-MP mode on the same stations in addition is included to create multi system operational functions virtually simultaneously in parallel.
Method system and means are included for the possible use of directional and/or sector and/or omni directional antenna systems and/or laser beams. Including method function and means to electronically control beams in direction etc. Including capability to control more than one antenna beam to be steered and/or selected simultaneously each beam in its specific direction. This includes serving one and/or multiple WP operating in P-P mode and/or WPs operating in P-MP modes. Such methods functions and means are applicable to W-SENS solutions. Method function and means to design and set up functions of WP is included. The set up of respective WPs function, its associated ports, its antenna arrangements, method of communication capacity etc, etc. is included and being accessible via network management functions virtually from any station.
The method function and means includes besides a separate design of WPs working as central or terminals, WP design includes a possible virtual function to be set to emulate a central and/or terminal function based on setup functions via network management or similar. Method function and means to make it possible to change radio network topology without necessarily physically have to re-direct a fixed antenna, reconfigure communication between ports is included. This is possible by the possible control of antenna beams etc. into new directions and/or to add new beams.
Method function and means are included for arranging communication between WPs transparently to specific service requirement, i.e. including transfer rate, delay, bit error rate quality etc. Concerning transparent communication of synchronous transfer requirements through when connectionless switching functions are applied at least as near as transparent communication as possible is applied. Considering both synchronous and asynchronous data is required. It includes that selection of enough transfer capacity is applied for synchronous data between involved pair of WPs. It includes secondly at least selection of additional transfer capacity to be transferred transparent or as near as transparent communication as possible based is on is specific traffic requirement, bit error rate quality, delay performance, bandwidth availability etc. Considering connectionless switching functions used selection will principally be made to allocate transfer capacity's between pair of WPs up to at least 10 and/or 100 and/or up to or towards 1000 Mbit/s. Using radio frequency carriers imply a higher interest in adopting the transfer capacity to actual requirement which often may be less than a full and constant assignment of 100 Mbit/s (fast Ethernet) capacity between a pair of WPs. Using laser beams on short hops and connecting such WPs with full transparent capacity could be considered more applicable.
Radio communication via radio links are beginning to reach 400-600 Mbit/s commercially. One of the problems for high transfer rate radios is to utilise spectrum effectively thus needing to use complex modulation methods which would be require several error correction, equalisation coursed by delay spread, etc. Method functions and means are included to overcome to problem of individual bandwidth selection, transfer capacity, transfer quality, hop length limitations, the need of complex equalisation and/or the constant us of a complex modulation method etc. In W-SENS are included ability to use one and/or more carriers each modulated separately and carrying its oven data. Method function and means are included to assign a selected number of sub-channels (and/or sub-carriers) to gradual select the transfer capacity and bandwidth between each pair of ports. It includes possible selection of modulation level, error correction per sub-channel, radio (or laser if needed) power regulation in relation to hop lengths climate factors, terrain, redundancy routes based on bit error rate performance requirements. A narrower radio channel has the advantage of having each less noise in its respective channel than a corresponding wider channel. This is usable in either longer hops or correspondingly more complex modulation methods, which would increasing the potential transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) per channel on the same hop lengths. Methods functions and means are included to select sub-channels to be used, balance factors of quality and modulation level, select appropriate transfer rates on sub-channels, select error correction etc.
The method results in possibilities to gradually expand transfer capacity between WPs in fact up to the maximum capacity of the ports used to connect the WPs from the switching function. A today seemingly high capacity transfer requirement of 1000 Mbit/s capacity between Gigabit Ethernet could be applicable via radio by the use of this method. Gradual expansion of transfer rates would be applicable even if the transfer between any two WPs that have the ability to transparently communication via 1000 Mbit/s ports is not reached. I.e. communication performance is defined by the channel bandwidth, number of channels applied, modulation method, coding (like CRC - FEC or similar), distance, RF power, environment, frequency band etc.
Summary method, sub-methods etc.
The method for a wireless network offering communications services at many locations locally, regionally. It is based on stations including switching function, one or more ports for wireless communication (WP), optional ports for termination and or connect users (TP/UP). Wireless communication between station in any given area is established via pair of WP in communication, arranged for P-P and/or P-MP arrangements. At least for connectionless switching are traffic directed in alternative selected directions between WP via stations switch functions. The combination of powerful switching capability tailored selection of WP for wireless communication between station leads to surprising results in comparison to previous wired and/or wireless solution for servicing multiple users in a local end/or regional environment. In fact it leads to a "self expanded network capacity" including increasing optional routing alternatives. Implemented in a system it is coned Wireless Self-Expansion Network Switching, W-SENS solution.
By applying a required number and types of WPs based on the method and sub-methods include the potential capability to establish any type of network topology used or superseding these, any type of function, including all to all station typology, etc. Communication between stations through the air routed via the built in switch/switches by switching data between pair of ports (WPs) up to full capacity or with reduced capacity based on needs, possibilities etc. Communication between WPs include possible adjustments of transmit capacity, requirement, frequency, frequency bandwidth, distances, directional antenna beams or laser beam for each pair of WPs if applied to being able to achieve spatial division.
2
A method functions means including possibilities to assign communication between UP, TPs and principally transparently assign transfer between pair of WPs through two or more station in order to flow digital data for principally any requirements as long it conform to bandwidth availability and required quality. It includes functions for repeat, drop, insert, terminate (to other backbone network) and switch traffic at any station in an all to all configurations.
3
Stations are included with method function and means to make it possible to create network and/or routing functionality. This to at least a level where traffic is switched and/or routed via selected WPs and expandable to include user ports and or terminal ports and or use of additional external network switches routers etc.
4 A method function and means including use of ATM and/or connectionless switches. When connectionless switching are applied various existing and future IP and/or similar protocols for packet data is applicable for handling transparent synchronous and/or asynchronous transfer through each pair of WPs including ability to handle traffic entering from various routes. 5
Method function and means for electromagnetic communication between WPs. Including ability to transparently assign capability between up to or towards a full rate of 10 or 100 or 1000 Mbit/s (or other capacities should they be standardised).
6 Method function and means at least for radio transmission between pair of WPs in communication. Including functions to assign digital transmission capacity in either direction at selective transfer rates principally up to the full capacity of each pair of ports assigned to connect the respective switch function at each side via the air. Means to assign transfer capacity includes optimise of quality requirement in relation to bandwidth and transfer rates. Control of all or any of following functions are included: radio transmitter power level control, modulation type or modulation level control, level of fault error correction, antenna gain, antenna direction, frequency bandwidth by selection of number of sub carriers, antenna polarisation control. Dual polarisation i.e. cross polarisation transfer adoptions when applied.
7
A method function means included to arrange routing alternatives including re-arrange routing. To allow: use of frequency spectrum efficient, gradual increased transfer capacity in denser topologies, decrease the average hop distance by reduce transmitted power or increase the modulation level and the possible speed. I.e. includes mechanisms to change any established pair WP in network which changes with new stations added or deleted including the ability to set up of new pair of connections and/or change speed performance or change routing in accordance.
Method functions and means are in such cases included to handle redirection of antenna beams etc. in accordance to changes. The same type of basic physical hardware means could be used as one or several modules at multiple stations see some examples in the figure 5, 33, 34. The number and types of WPs including antenna arrangements, UPs, TPs are tailored at each station according to demand. Means for manual assignment and/or automatic detection of configuration is included and actual situation is stored in an applied NMP database.
8
Method function and means to include use antenna solutions to include achievement of effective spatial division adaptable to be possible to organise in different directions (elevations) manually or electronically to optimise quality and minimised influence from multi-path reflections, interference from overlapping frequencies etc. Means are included to control of antenna beams to point in different directions to adopt the network changes and different routing alternatives when fixed beam antennas are utilised. Multiple fixed beam antennas and/or common reflector antennas are to be used including controlled in direction for each pair WPs set in connection.
9
Method functions and means are included transparent communication capacity between WPs by using the full capacity of switch to WPs and between WPs equipped without means to regulate transfer speed at WPs for traffic between any two switching function including at last WPs for laser communication.
10 Method function and means including control of transmission capacity by the use of modulation level control, selection of bandwidth by selecting required number of sub-carriers (FDM).
11 Method functions and means to combine various routing alternatives. Including combined use of route based on different electromagnetic frequencies as carriers including use of various transfer capacity per route and/or WPs taking part in transmission, including laser combined radio, including "high" speed communication and parallel or redundant lower speed route.
12
Method functions and means including the possible implementation of WPs with the capability to create communication with multiple other WPs at different stations and creating point to multipoint transfer topologies between WPs and switches. This includes:
Equipment resource sharing of radio and modem by splicing capacity at one WP to more than one other WP (one example in fig. 6. 570) Equipment resource share by common use of radio head inclusive modem and with selective use of capacity by assigning required number of subchannels to more than one specific WPs (underneath), FDMA. Equipment resource sharing in time segments by including common use of selective bandwidth allocation i.e. selective number of sub-channels to be used constantly traditional TDMA including alternative to select bandwidth for communication at each specific time segment (FDMA/TDMA) Equipment resource sharing including the above plus modulation level control, error corrections.
Equipment resource sharing by common use of antennas arranged for spatial communication Equipment resource sharing including modem uses selective coding of subchannels (CDMA), assignment, de-assignments capability.
13 Method functions and means including the possibility to assign-WPs at stations where any such WP have the capability as a central function establishing radio communication with more than one other WP(s). These WPs being based at variable locations all radio optically reachable from such central WP. The communication transmission capacity includes being at least based on frequency division where the communication transmission resource of a central WP is shareable with multiple other WPs in order to satisfy the respective communications capacity demand between the respective scattered WPs and a WP. To achieve selective transmission capacity it includes possible selective portion of any or selective parts of the following potentially functionality's; frequency bandwidths in Hz for carrier or sub-carriers to be defied for the various links in such P-MP configuration, further including possible selection of modulation level like QPSK, 16
QAM 64 QAM, 128, 266 QAM (or other) etc. on carriers and sub-carriers, number or groups of sub-carriers when FDM and/or.OFDM type of modulation method used, individual transmission performance for every hop include regulation of radio transmitted power, control of antennas spatial direction for the selective routes. Sector or omni-directional antennas to cover all scattered WPs or part of them under any central WP is applicable. It is included specifically when data needs to be broad-caste from one source to many, see figure 5 583.
14
Method functions and means including that switching function at any station is usable as backbone switch. Including the possibility to be used as a backbone switch for any external wireless system and/or internal virtually created wireless access solution, see figure 4 (a,b) or figure 20.
15
Method functions and means include capability to shift between carrier frequencies of any of the multiples or multiple sub-carriers carriers used for communications between pairs of WPs.
This include possible control of the frequencies to principally fixed position typically in a licensed situation and/or including schemes of frequencies to jump between applicable to unlicensed application. Additionally it include means for other schemes like frequencies shifted at regular time intervals according one or multiples of possible pre-set plans and/or initiated by bit error rates recorded per pair of WP. These means include settings via network management control function terminal (example 200, 210). 16
Method and means including assignment of transfer capacity based on the detected requirement for transparent communication, versus burst data communication. This include ability to detect transparent transmit requirement at respective WPs, detection of real time protocols based on IP, detecting of priority level on IP protocol and/or any other bandwidth reservation scheme on IP or signalled by cells by ATM switches if these are used. Including ability to assign bandwidth at appropriate quality for possible transfer of synchronous flow through WPs according to quality demands in standard data & telecommunications applications. Including means for the ability to assign appropriate bandwidth between WPs for asynchronous data and/or less prioritised reservations by using intermediate storing of packets in memories when under time when the bandwidth is not enough etc.
18
Method functions and means including connectionless switch functions at station.
19
Method functions and means of at least connectionless switches to include fast switching and/or routing performance.
Including means for switching between ports with about one or a few microseconds (this is considered fast and adding little extra delay as 1 us corresponding to about 300 m propagation time in air).
I.e. seamless transparent flow could be obtained through such station with limited extra delays added per station. As an example one ms or more could be considered long in some applications (corresponding to about 300 km propagation) if multiple switches were involved in a connection.
Telecommunications type of services in particular is sensitive seamless real time performance requirements but also traditional data communication throughput performance due to delays.
20
Method functions and means include possibilities to use any of multiple ports for p-p WPs into variable spatial directions for communication between stations.
Selectable number of WPs includes ability to establish communications via selectable antennas and beam direction. Included are means to:
■ Arrange any of multiple of radio heads to be assigned to selected fixed antenna lobe directions
Ability to use any of more a pre-set of antennas lobe direction. Use more than one "narrow" beam and control each to point beams in various selected directions and the use of one radio head per lobe.
Directed antennas, re-directed antennas, multiple directed antennas.
Including means for using antennas which is covering an area of a sector, multiple sectors, omni-directional etc. "for near distance distribution" to distribute to many scattered stations and its respective WPs.
21 Method functions and means including ability at any place, any station, from any station establish virtually any type of wireless network including one or multiples of network topologies or combinations if principally optical line of site occurs. Earlier wireless access of station topology structures is superseded.
22
Method functions and means including ability to measure quality of data transferred between WPs, including measure of loss of data, overflow on specific links (memories) of WPs and report such data. It includes mechanism to assign capacity in accordance to requirement manually and/or set of transfer capacity automatically accorded to detected information on applied data to WPs. Included are functions for such measures and reports of such information is detectable at any station. This including ability to adjust and set up at an appropriate transfer capacity through the air, via pairs of WPs via operator terminals, like NMS/NMP/NMP' etc. based on SNMP and/or added functions to SNMP and/or similar network management protocols.
23 Method functions and means including ability to let data be transferred between any WPs at any station through a used connectionless switching functions fast and transparent through such station with time delay which could be considered neglected. Including if transferee goes through multiple's of stations each with similar addition delay coursed by every station. Including allow multiple stations to be included of each connection between users or user and/or terminal ports. Including means for clocking out data transferred to a station to a defined port at seamless synchronous if it is required. Means for clocking out received and stored data at defined rates and specifications according to standards like ITU-T including jitter and/or wanderer specifications is included by appropriate selection of local clocks at stations, which clocks out such data. Thus no time synchronism needs to be transferred trough the network. Effects of small time delay variations between different connections depending of the number of station passed etc. could than be ignored. Communications like synchronous leased lines and or distributions services from telephony, videoconferencing, Internet communications, media distribution etc is thus applicable.
24
Method functions and means including system which switch functions at station include to the capacity to handle the sum or the capacity of the a number of ports WPs, UPs, TPs, OPs of various rates (fig. 16, 17, 18 100, 100', 110, 210, 210' etc.), of each station. The number of WPs shall be possible to expand at each station in order to allow a gradual increasing number of communication directions, and capacities etc. with other stations.
25
Method functions and means including at least one switch function per station, which digitally establishing connection of traffic to different direction between scattered stations.
As an example only consider a sizeof a switch! function to:
A few (four) WPs could be connected for a maximum rate of 1 Gbit/s duplex communication (into two directions) A 20- 30 applicable for maximum 100 Mbit/s duplex capacity (i.e. consider
30 directions).
This would require a switching capacity of at least around 8 Gbit/s for the
WPs only.
This is just one example of a station capacity much smaller capacity or larger capacity would be applicable. Also gradual expansion of switching capacity is applicable as scheduled in fig. 31.
26
Method functions and means to include possibility to geographically scatter the stations randomly include typically narrow beam antennas pointing to respective required WPs in order to arrange communication. Including the possibility to connect a number of connections possible and reach multiple location and in this way create a multi connection network for many scattered users at alternative points and directions. The result by this is that an extremely efficient utilisation of frequency spectrum would be applicable, in as frequency use is getting more and more randomly scattered in elevation and space with increasing user density. I.e. communication is getting relatively better and better isolated horizontally, vertically and by obstacles with discriminating antenna beam angles by the shortening of hops, this allow further to even better efficient use of spectrum. Additionally are means for possible increase of transfer and routing capability applicable in denser W-SENS networks which also improve the spectrum efficiency, see also fig 25. In addition this allows also a network to be built up gradually from a user to a user and to access users around the corners. In addition means for terminating traffic to new point As an example to a fibre backbone) is applicable when network is expanding which improves possibilities to offloading the traffic though the air which in turn improves spectrum further. Means of using beam antennas or sector antennas to include that one WP can establish communication at the same time at different directions is applicable when required. Methods functions and means for: sharing of spectrum by placing out stations in space and using pointing beam antennas for the communicating between the respective WPs. for single carriers and/or means for multi-carrier including use of frequency division modulation (FDM) and/or Octagonal, OFDM frequency division modulation. for selective rate adoption adoptions on carrier and/or sub-carrier, appropriate forward error correction, FEC, adjustable to various levels of errors and types of errors depending on error performance detected, modulation level selected per channel, received radio frequency (rf)-level etc. transmission power level regulation adoptions included means in order to compensate for variation of distances at time of re-arranging, various modulation levels, various frequency band attenuation. automatic gain control (AGC) at the receiving channels at each rf- receiver at each WP ■ selection of appropriate bearer frequency and number off bearers to being able to handle interference risk to prevent that overlapping frequencies are avoided in the same transmission directions among stations. ■ to select different frequencies to avoid frequency overlapping and thus interference in directions and time which is in addition possible to complement and combine with an appropriate resource sharing by using spacing and alternative routing as generally described above.
Further description of methods functions systems end means
Figures
Figure 1 a and b
Station topologies in vertical, horizontal space view.
Figure 2 Vision of stations means and communications via wireless ports, user ports, terminal ports.
Figure 3 Vision of stations in point-point communication inclusive point-multipoint.
Figure 4
Vision of various application, termination and application examples of external wireless solution.
Figure 5
Examples of structure and means are shown in a wireless port and antenna solutions, splicing of a wireless port, into sub-wireless ports.
Figure 6
Additional examples of structures and means for a wireless port are shown, inclusive an example of splitting of modem capacity and grouping sub- carriers via filter banks.
Figure 7 a,b,c,d.
Visualising an example allocation of carriers in different time for different bandwidth requirements. In addition a general idea of a buffert memory to handle interactive traffic.
Figure 8 a,b,c.
Generally vision of a frequency spectrum of sub-carriers, grouping of sub- carriers, splicing of modem capacity for the operation into more than one radio head (sub-wireless port).
Figure 9
General demonstration of various communications services possible to use a W-SENS network.
Figure 10 a,b. Shown some possible examples of stations vision of type of physical implementation structure of stations.
Figure 11 a,b,c.
Examples of some possible serial to parallel conversion of incoming data to a wireless port to a parallel application when more than one carrier is used.
Figure 12 Vision of selection of various transfer capacity allocations between stations via wireless ports, up to a certain full capacity between each pair of wireless ports.
Figure 13
Examples of use of various modulation scheme between different stations, including an example of an alternative parallel route for part of traffic.
Figure 14 Example of incoming traffic to a station via the air from two different stations which are both added and transferred via a common wireless port to a forth station.
Figure 15 An example shows routing alternatives in a W-SENS solution including use of laser and radio in combination.
Figure 16
Shows an example of a general structure of one type of station with combinations of switching functions including the possible use of external switches/routers and possible traffic between geographically scattered W- SENS networks via other networks.
Figure 17 a, b. Show examples of general possible structures of stations based on one or more switching functions.
Figure 18
Show examples of mixture of stations type are operating in a same network.
Figure 19 a, b.
Show examples of possible time segmentation prepared for carrier and/or sub-carrier, in order to be able to adopt to various functions which needs accurate and co-ordinated timing, like regular frequency shift, possible TDM and or TDMA structure etc.
Figure 20
Show an example of a possible emulation of a wireless access system originated from a wireless port and its use of the W-SENS switching capacity and/or external switching.
Figure 21 Are generally vision possible adoptions to various co-existence, interoperability standards, etc. in combination with various proprietary air interfaces etc.
Figure 22 a, b.
The figures demonstrate that complex network structures (shortened hops, increasing routing alternatives etc.) serving many is possible to gradually evolve into originated from very simple structures and gradual increase of different termination points.
Figure 23
Gives an example of combination of high speed transfer using laser applications and radio solutions typically with less capacity in parallel and/or as a backup.
Figure 24
Shows an example of an implementation where W-SENS is combined wit a fibre backbone, termination is shown to be able at various location, external switching platforms are shown reachable via the fibre network.
Figure 25 a, b, c.
Shows how power reduction due to increased routing alternatives could save frequency spectrum, shows how shorter hops could be used for various routings with increased transfer capacity between station on a given spectrum further that shorter hops typically led to more variation in elevations which can be utilised.
Figure 26
Show examples of W-SENS systems implemented based on connectionless switching and/or ATM switching and how these principally can be integrated at various point via wireless ports.
Figure 27 a, b, c, d.
Show examples of various antenna systems covering each a region, serving one or more wireless ports each and/or one or more sub-wireless ports each.
It is also generally shown how switching and/or power distribution on intermediate and/or radio frequency of one wireless port or sub-wireless port is applicable for FDMA respective TDMA inclusive SDMA between wireless ports.
Figure 28
Shows an example of a network management application program
(connectable via a PC or similar at any station etc.) visualising a network topology, such vision and others of the network is supposed to make it possible to set-up, define, re-design communication.
Figure 29 a, b, c, d, e. Show various examples of switching and/or power distributing on intermediate and/or radio frequency, i.e. in order to achieve P-MP communication between wireless ports. It also shows an example of combination use of wireless ports for point - point communication is applicable with one or more point - multipoint applications.
Figure 30
Shows a general structure of a possible wireless port implementation.
Figure 31 a, b, c. Shows one example of a modular station structure where expansion of station capability in switch capacity and/or multiple wireless ports is achievable.
Further are examples shown of stations using power distribution and/or switching on intermediate frequency or radio frequency level for a point - multipoint applications.
Figure 32 a, b, c, d.
Shows an example of one reason to be able to split the protocol on a carrier or sub-carrier in a data and/or a relatively small signalling time portion. At visualised time increments there would be a possibility to change transfer capacity, change frequency, re-direct antenna apply synchronisation etc.
Further are visualised how selected carriers could use the full capacity of a continuous data flow on a carrier regardless this portions is applied or not, as it in such case is a lower level protocol and data could be applied.
Figure 33
Shows one example of means of a wireless port, which contains some switching functionality.
Figure 34
Shows one additional example of a wireless port structure. Figure 1a
The general idea with this figure is to show an example of an implementation of the method in a system where communication between stations are passed via ports either physical local ports connected to wires/fibre or though ports specifically designed to carry information between station through the air. At each station is at least one switching function taking care of the selection of switching and/or routing information between ports. It further illustrates a wireless communication network consisting of two or more stations based on the method. The idea with the drawing is to generally vision that any station can communicate or distribute or receive information between each other through the air, example 300-304. They need to be equipped with appropriate transceiver means (transmitter and receiver) for it this. This solution results in an in a non-hierarchical arrangements of stations which can freely communicate. Communication between station is taking care of by the as multiple pair of Wireless Ports (WPs) as schematically shown by 550 at each station. Thus, no station is central or no station is terminal as in wireless access solutions. Stations (10, 11 etc.) are equipped with electromagnetic transceivers at the WPs (as an example 550/568). These pair of WPs are designed with electromagnetic transmitters and receivers which are the tools to establish communicate between stations through the air, 550. Each pair of WPs are adjusted to its specific quality requirements based on available frequency band, modulation method, transmission power, error detection, error correction, directed radio antenna means (when radio band is used), etc. Thus, multiple frequency bands and standards are applicable.
It is further schematically shown that user traffic to/from any user application at stations (1010), is communicating via Users Ports, UP (100, 101..). Termination Ports, TP, to other networks can be applied at selected stations and ports. User information is generally visualised inserted or dropped via UPs or at TPs (1000) and combinations of UP, TP 1020. Stations are equipped with switching function that include means for local switching between ports at stations (100,101...) and means for switching data between any of the ports UP, TP, WP at any station. Thus insert and drop of digital information and/or repeat and/or termination of information are applicable at any station. The idea with the example in the figure is to define the method applicable specifically ideal for wireless terrestrial networks in local and or regional areas. A view of a possible implementation of the method into a system is generally shown. The stations are viewed from above. The stations are normally fixed located placed on earth in a mast, on a house, on a wall, indoor and/or outdoor, it could in some applications be considered placed: in a balloon, aircraft, satellite, terrestrial movable units, lap - top communication etc. As various WPs could be considered allowing potentially a mixture. Systems implemented based on the method have means for control and/or supervision. This is applicable at any station generally visualised on stations as 200 as exemplified at station 11 and 13. Means for organising routing between stations is applicable and possible to visualise set up, re-route etc via a PC or a any type of network terminal etc. It could be physically located or distantly located from the station or stations it concerns.
Further meaning with the illustration is to show the non-hierarchical structure applicable. It allows that principally any stations port can be terminating to another network to extent another network and/or it could be used to connect user to applications and/or support user to user communication. Stations switching functions capability means that it include a possible work as a switching platform between its own ports (UP,TP, WP) for local and/or distant traffic and/or including other applications, like operating as a backbone switch potentially at each station and location for any external use. Methods are included to use the expansion of stations to increase switching capabilities trough the air or elsewhere in that area for the network it self (various routings etc.) and for external applications as well. Thus, large number of connection points (users) would potentially result in a giant switching capability in such area. Means to utilise such added capacity is applicable by re-design or routing, increase transfer speeds, etc. allowing higher transfers through the air. The method and the implementation include means to offer switched services for connected users locally at each station, between different station and/or between users and external networks. This directly from the wireless network solution and in addition similar switching services offered by other switching devises is applicable i.e. switching function includes means of serving external wireless network, wired connections etc.
Figure 1 b
The vision with this figure is to show an example of where stations in figure 1 a) differently located in latitude and longitude also may be different located in high's above ground. The relative high difference is specifically occurring if stations are located in a hilly landscape and/or in separated by relatively short distances. In a city networks may stations (or WPs) be located at different highs of a building, etc. The meaning is also to illustrate how the spectrum space and the frequency reuse would be possible to utilise better and better in a gradually denser network. By using narrow beam antennas between pair of WPs in communication (in the care of using radio), power regulation, re-routing etc. and additional optional means as described in this document is the increased variation of elevations occurring possible to utilise to use spectrum efficiently. Transmission power control is here envisioned to prevent unnecessary pollution of the spectrum of emitted electromagnetic power. Such power control is basically estimated to be adjusted to achieve the needed transmission quality between each pair of WPs. Factors possible to include in calculation is generally based on radio hop distance, frequency, modulation level, forward error correction, antenna performance etc. In addition measure of the actual performance and adjustments thereafter is applicable. The meaning further with the illustration is to confirm that the wireless communication between stations through WPs is organised typically via narrow beam antennas (example 320) at each side. Antennas from 10 GHz and above in the radio bands could results in small narrow beam antennas which are getting smaller the higher the band. In the 20-40 GHz bands could as an example antennas 10 - 20 cm be used, thus applicable to use in any environment.
Alternatively are narrower beams obtainable above radio frequencies (>300 GHz). Means for establishing light wave (fig. 23, 560) communication between ports is applicable.
The meaning with the figure 1 b) (and 1 a) is also to illustrate that the increase of number of stations in a limited results in increased routing .possibilities as all stations principally can be designed to communicate with each other, provided line of site occur etc. It also shows that if station 10 and 13 which could be considered to be established first. A new station 11 could be reached either via 11 or 13. if another station 14 is installed there wiii be various routing possibilities to/from 14 via 10, 11 , 13 or combinations of them. This shows that the routing alternatives are increasing, the hop lengths are generally shorted (less transmitted power required at maintained capacity and quality) and more alternative elevations are obtained. Further, it visualises how elevations could become increasingly more different the denser the network are getting used by the network to optimise it. In summary means to control alternative routing, reduction power and also transmission power control leads to a possible improved use of total amount of information transferred in a given frequency spectrum in a specific space surrounded the stations. In addition the security is improved, as means for selecting various routing alternatives is applicable to select. Thus means for controlling and optimising radio power, modulation level, routing via WP switching, re-routing, antenna directions etc. thus frequency spectrum are here shown to be increasingly possible to utilise more and more effectively in a given area and a given frequency band. Using various adoption techniques i.e. adjust for the actual transfer capacity (bandwidth requirement) between each pair of ports the use of spectrum is being possible to use even more effectively, supporting even more users etc.
Figure 2 The general idea with this figure is to further explain some possible means of implementing the method and additionally sub-methods. The figure is basically showing traffic flows between stations are arranged via pair of WPs. The figure is just exemplifying is as one of many possible configurations of a system implementation.
The stations 10 and 11 are equipped with a switching function here represented by 2. The general ports to carry traffic and/or other networks or extensions to other networks are named 100, 101 , 102 etc. The port related to the switching function and the WP is here named 600. Individual types of ports like various speeds and/or standards is named 110, 111... etc. The interface 110/600 shown at station 10 may be a standard user port or close to similarities in order to make it possible to remotely locate 500 and or 550 via a standard cabling. If the switching functions 2 contain an IP switch and/or including routing capabilities for standards ports of today like: 10, 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s and/or other standards and/or other future Ethernet standards. Cabling could be used to connect one or more WPs at each station distant from 2, 10.
In the case of using radio frequency bands are the WP at respective side containing means for transmitting and receiving digital information at each port as schematically indicated in this figure by 500. I.e. 500 suppose to contain signal processing, modulator, demodulator, transmitter, receiver, radio fiiter and being connected to an antenna system, 582 when radio frequencies are used. The unit 501 at station 10 is illustrating another type of WP. Means for arranging communication at each pair or port may be different depending on frequency band used, radio or laser etc.
Individual pairs of WPs include communication means including frequency select, modulation, level, error correction level etc. that is selectable specifically for each pair of ports. Multiple WPs at each station can of course be identically designed as well or mixture of various types and standards. Functions include traffic drop and/or repeating at any station. An example in the figure show information that is coming in via the air at station 11 from station 10 being switched to port 112/600 via 11/2 for traffic that shall be repeated to another station or to port 101 for traffic that shall be dropped.
If the switch 2 in the example is a connectionless switching routing function it is considered to include means for fast switching performance. If the time delay to pass through each stations switching function from port 110 to 112 (and vice versa) is done at a neglected time delay (from the users application perspective) seamless flows could be arranged via multiple repeating steps. This leads to a relative free selection of routes (i.e. many directions at each station and no hierarchical structure as for radio access solutions). Means to select multiple routs are applicable to set-up in practice an all to all station communication arrangements which is to be used in various ways like alternate routing to increase spectrum efficiency and/or increase security and/or increase transfer capacity, redundancy.
Figure 3
The figure is suppose to generally show the means to use alternative WPs indicated by 551. This particular WPs transmission means 551 is arranged in such a way that multiple WPs at other stations 11 , 12, ....etc. can communicate through it. I.e. means not only for single pair of configurations as illustrated by 550. In this case it is illustrated how a WP, 551 , at station 10, is arranged to exchange information between multiple WPs in a P-MP mode seen from station 10. Other types of WPs in combination of WP pairs for P-P modes would be applicable in a system implementation. Thus the P- MP mode resembles of the resource sharing of a central station in a typical wireless access system between stations, however in this case it could be limited to transfer between switches only. It includes also means to be used for emulation of virtual access systems (fig 20). In fact the various resource- sharing scheme applied like FDMA and/or TDMA and/or CDMA or combinations with or without spatial arrangements, SDMA. Included are variation of an FDMA approaches including means for control of selectable number of sub-carriers per remote WP for multiple transparent connections between station similar to as if point - point mode operation were used, but typically for less capacity. Means to apply TDMA scheme on carriers is applicable. TDMA would have the disadvantage of a frame structure coursing additional delays per hop. In addition synchronisation and timing would be needed between effected WPs. Means to combine TDMA as a combination to FDMA is applicable by the possibility to time frame per carrier. Thus, a finer capacity selection would be applicable than FDMA only which could be typical applicable in optional virtually access solution. Both FDMA, CDMA could course fewer problems with delay and synchronisation than TDMA. in the case of P-MP mode the available capacity of a WP would be shared and hence reduced in comparison for stations connected via p-p mode. However it would make it applicable to use for access and for interconnections between stations with low bandwidth requirements. This is an illustration of differences between W-SENS structure and its many advantages in comparison to traditional wireless access. In fact W-SENS could include virtually multiple wireless access functions as illustrated but also the possibility of serving with backbone switching capability at each station. In fact when multiple WPs are added at each station the possible area transfer and internal switching volume is expanded. Every new station in an area have a capability to connect more station and each station can be expanded with a number of WPs. Each pair of WP having a certain transfer capacity which could correspond to TP/UP ports used or be less which could be typical for radio,
The number of ports and the capacity of each of these ports may be based on standard rates used for connectionless switching as an example 100 Mbit/s duplex or semi-duplex ports, semi-duplex 10 Mbit/s ports or duplex 1000 Mbit/s ports.
In a case shown for demonstration only is a switching function having a capacity of assigning up to around 30 ports for 100 Mbit/s (Fast Ethernet duplex) and 2-8 for 1000 Mbit/s at each station. It would in this case result in a station with a total switching capacity function of around 8-16 Gbit/s. Multiplied at many locations this would represent an enormous total switching capacity in the specific area. In a situation visualised above extreme air transfer capacities would be possible to handle. I.e. means to handle large volumes of switched or routed data inside a W-SENS solution is applicable. Further is an increased use of stations including possibilities to connect stations at more terminating points increasing the capability even more. I.e. to connect stations to other networks, like fibre backbone and other switching platform's other high-speed switching/routing networks, with a possible offload of traffic from the air.. Included are means to arrange antenna system, which could be used in spatial mode of operation, as visualised in 581. This is visualised as an SDMA arrangement where pointing beam are arranged from WP 551 to the other WPs it communicates with. Using TDMA include means to arrange for possible alternative direction in selected time slots for selected carrier and/or sub-carriers. Using FDMA includes means for transmit and/or receive in multiple directions with other WPs simultaneously. One beam is directed to each corresponding station. Using FDMA and/or CDMA includes simultaneously operation of multiple beams as long as communication is performed. Means to use various types of antenna systems is included. These may be various types like phased arrays, selection of multiple horns, selection of multiple horns towards a common reflector and/or other arrangements for laser, light wave beam switching devices and/or beam spread techniques multiple arrays. A spatial antenna arrangement is visualised by 581. Included is possible use of sector coverage and/or omni-directed coverage antennas visualised by figure 5 583. Even if this could reduce the spectrum efficiency it simplifies the arrangement and reduces the cost in comparison to spatial antennas and includes a way to simplify distribution simultaneously to many stations.
Besides means to arrange internal P-MP transmission capability between switches by using resource sharing of one WP with other WPs at other stations, means are also included to allow external wireless access systems working as illustrated in figure 3. Principally any external wireless access system based on any standard or evolving standard (like 802.11 , 802.16 or Hiperaccess, or Hiperlan or ETSl TM4 co-existence standards, TSR 34 etc.) is applicable to being connected via appropriate user ports (100, 101 ,... 120 etc.). The interface towards W-SENS is in such case applicable on appropriate interfaces physical and/or logical standard. Means to include use of internal switching function (2) and/or external switching (2') functions at any location is applicable for connected external wireless access systems.
Means to arrange transparent communication connecting such external system(s) at any station via a network based on the method and or relevant sub-methods (W-SENS) and connect such access system to any other switching unit outside of a W-SENS network (figure 4. 1001 ) in included. Emulation of access solutions is further shown in figure 20.
In this figure 3 and in other figures in this document are antenna beams shown to be pointing in one flow direction only. The reason is just to simplify the visualised transfer in one direction in the examples given. Means for arranging antennas and antenna lobes in the in the opposite direction is normally occurring as an understatement as duplex communication is performed in most cases.
Figure 4
The figure shows examples of applications in schematic network structure.
Means are included for Network management functions like set-up, supervision and control functions at stations. Means are included to allow remote network management operation, i.e. any station, any WP etc. is addressable and reachable via communication protocols virtually from any anywhere in the network and/or outside. This includes means for IP addressing and/or similar communications protocols. It is shown applied via station 10 but in fact means including connection virtually at any station. Further station 10 is shown to be equipped with a switch and/or router function type 2 or 3, process control function, 9, one or a number of UPs, 100, 101 , a TP 105 and a number of WPs. The process control function includes processor and applied software functions, which includes handling real time transfer, through station, network management etc. This control supervision function is schematically shown connectable for stations, 200, for direct connection to processing function, 210 these are via a terminal function, and/or a PC etc. included with appropriate application programs for the set-up and/or control and/or supervision. Means for control and supervision of any WP is applicable at any WP. Means to physically reach any WP is included as indicated by 210 shown schematically at station 12. I.e. functions including means for set up the wireless network ports to appropriate speed, power level, bandwidth, antenna direction etc. based on required transmission quality including control and supervision of performance. Possible direct connection supporting roof top installation and maintenance is potentially applicable etc.
In the case of using connectionless switching function, visualised by 2, are means for conversion between Ethernet type of synchronous types of ports typically used in the telecommunication area (E1/T1 , E2/T2, E3./T3, SDM-1 , SDH, SONET, ATM, etc.) applicable. Means indicated as generally visualised at station 11 include conversion including at least rates of those between at least Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet ports. Typical synchronous traffic flows used in the telecommunications area which are supposed to be transmitted and/or dropped over W-SENS stations are schematically visualised entering at 121 at the functional unit 120 and being connected to W-SENS a station at 102 for further transfer. I.e. means are included to convert synchronous flow that shall be transmitted over W-SENS to an appropriate asynchronous form and applied with appropriate signalling protocol including addresses for such transfer over W-SENS. I.e. this include means to apply IP signalling protocols based on IPv4 and/or IPv6. Means to achieve transparent transfer of synchronous data over stations based on connectionless switching is applied. Means to apply appropriate signalling for the transfer including transfer of appropriate signalling information of the synchronous signal at corresponding port end and/or ends if broadcast of applied signal is required. I.e. including means to set appropriate protocol to such information that is to be transferred as it being able to indicate reserve of enough transfer capacity including setting priority for such transfer through the stations. Information about synchronous signal it self is transferred to the end and/or ends executed in functional unit 120 in order to allow re-structure the transferred signal at an original shape at the other station end (or ends). Including possibilities to transfer signal information to the corresponding end (ends) to define any selected synchronous form of the synchronous signal that is taken or (derived) at the ends. This includes possible reshape of both data and signalling information should it be needed. I.e. as one example only, an applied ITU-T signal E3 at one end is spiced in a number of ITU-T E1 signals including appropriate signalling at a corresponding end.
Further included are conversions of signals between synchronous ITU-T signals based on G.703 etc. convertible to ATM and/or SDH or vice versa. Means are additionally included to allow synchronous data that is transferred being converted to asynchronous signal at the other end including applied with appropriate IP protocols.
Means to convert data that have been transferred over W-SENS dropped, here visualised schematically at station 11 , 102. I.e. the functional unit 120 include conversion of a serial asynchronous stream 102 to a synchronous stream (or multiple synchronous streams if splicing is required) in shown functional unit 120.
Means are included to achieve a synchronous drop of data 121 irrespective of the asynchronous transfer inclusive the possibility of various routing alternatives through the network has been used or not and/or continous parallel routs for the same signal have been applied. Means are included for extracting of clock of applied synchronous stream to functional unit 120. Means are included to use such clock by the functional unit 120 to clock out data synchronously in the reverse direction. I.e. including the capability for each application to control the clock stability from each application if required by clocking out the asynchronous received data from station towards the application by the functional unit 120. Means to use another clock from another applied application and or another clock for clocking out data synchronously from 120 is also applicable.
Means including conversion between different protocols and switching and transmission methods typically used for ATM, SDH, DTM, or any circuit switching flow and connectionless data flows and switching is applicable. I.e. synchronous data streams transferred over stations includes reinsertion of synchronous signals in original (or required form) as it was entered at the other end regardless if the whole bandwidth of a synchronous signal was transferred or not. I.e. means to detect bandwidth requirement on applied signals is applied and means to assign appropriate transfer capacity though W-SENS stations is applied. Means to manually (via network management system etc.) and/or automatically assign appropriate transfer capacity for selective signal to be transferred based on changes detected in the assigned protocols of applied signals including detection of over flow in buffer memories if transfer capacity is not enough.
Method functions and means are included as a consequence of what is said for transferring originally synchronous data (121) asynchronously by reserve capacity through the various pair of WPs to at least correspond to such and the required signalling. The method includes similar function for applications based on LAN, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet etc. I.e. asynchronous data ports, which is directly applied to a station, as exemplified at station 11 , 101. The required transfer of data that is exemplified by voice IP, video IP, video conferencing etc. By detecting the sum of such transfers a required transfer means to assign transfer capacity per pair of WPs is applicable.
Means are included to assign external wireless systems in order to extend W-SENS. In the figure is two types visualised. In one case is an external a central station, a shown applied to station 12 via port 105 which traffic flow is controlled by the switching function 3/2 of station 12. The dotted parallel lice between switch functions 3/2 symbolise signalling protocols. Thus the W-SENS system is in this case offering a backbone switching facility (2/3) and the external access system offer extensions "as transparent as possible" to connected users under the switching function 2/3 of 12. Means are included to use multiples of similar access systems at selected stations in W-SENS. Means are included to allow connection between users connected under a wireless access system (a) via 3/2. It include users connected under another similar external access system at the same station and/or other W-SENS stations and/or other external switches and/or routers (like 10', 10" etc. in figure 18).
Another case shown by b is another wireless access system connected to port 101 at station 12. The port 101 at 12 and port 105 at station 10 is virtually offering a transparent connection between the external backbone switch 1001 and the wireless access system b. Thus, means are included to allow multiple connected users via central station b and/or similar stations as b to be virtually connected under one or more external switches/routers 1001 , as generally visualised via a connection shown as a dotted line between b and 1001.
This dotted line represents virtually a synchronous including ATM based and/or an asynchronous depending of the type of external switch etc. and application. In the example for a wireless access solution and connection(s) to its switch function (which was external the W-SENS in this example), but it could be for any application. As an example station b includes application of a mobile base station. I.e. applications of connection between a number GPRS and/or W-CDMA etc. base stations requiring to be connected a one or more external switch and or router functions related to the service the mobile network offer.
Means to apply other wireless access networks at selected stations in W- SENS structures based on evolving ETSI BRAN standards like the various Hiperaccess, Hiperlan standards and corresponding US and Japanese standards are included. Other standards like bluetooth included etc. This includes possible switching and/or routing of user traffic and/or signalling between various external access base stations (similar) through stations in the W-SENS structure should such application be required. This include transactions of data for functions like hand-over, roaming etc.
Figure 5
One example of many possible physical implementation structures of a station, which is based on the method, is shown in the figure. The basic idea is to show some various functions and means to realise WPs. It is only the intention to generally indicate possible ways of implementing few variable types of WPs, some splicing options of modem capacity, various antenna arrangements etc. applicable in systems based on the methods functions and means described in the document.
A further idea with the figure is to show that any WP (550) has to be equipped with means for transmit and/or receive functions in radio bands (568) or higher frequencies (laser etc.). In the figure is a frequency duplex arrangement exemplified. Means to selectively arrange various bandwidth and/or transfer capacities for the transmit transaction direction is included. l.e . including balanced and/or unbalanced communication between any WPs. The actual design of each WP is possible to be differently arranged between those applied on a same station. Except the electromagnetic carriers are at least the following means schematically included:
one receiver (558) = one transmitter (a radio head)
one demodulator (556)
one modulator (552)
Additionally are at least included ■ means for converting data on port 110 before it is transmitted over the air
means to convert data received from air to port 100
Further means are at least included:
■ to apply and arrange communication protocol i.e. the specific air interface etc. for each WP which shall communicate with at least one other WP via the air
for application of error detection and/or error correction codes to data which is going to be transmitted over the air
■ for detection of bit error performance and/or including correction of data received from a corresponding WP transferred over air via WPs.
for controlling the processes on one or more WP at the same station and/or corresponding WPs at other station(s) is visualised as a processing function 566/1 where process control mechanisms for the communication between ports, switch function, handling of respective WP transfer internal in the station and corresponding WPs at other stations is performed via software
When radio frequency operation is applied at least an antenna system is included (some possible exemplified by 582, 583 and 581) and at least a duplex filter arrangement 569 when frequency duplex is applied.
Arrangements are made to handle effectively various traffic flows which are required to be transferred via WPs over an available transfer rate between WPs which may be less then at certain traffic peaks. Means to intermediate store data (visualised by 551 M and/or 551 MUP) under periods when the data transfer requirement is higher than the allocated transfer rate though to a corresponding WP. Means are included to control the average capacity requirement for burst data by including control of the load of an intermediate digital memory function Means are included to:
assign transfer capacity between WPs based on allowed delay performance ■ measured the load on memory to get an opinion of to low or to high transfer rate is applied between WPs
■ vary transfer capacity between WPs in correlation to quality requirement
The processing function unit visualised by 566/1 may be located elsewhere or taken care of by processing unit or units for the switching function(s) indicated by 9.
The processing functions unit(s) is considered containing control programs for setting up and controlling and/or supervision of transmission between WPs. Means for applying external communication devices for the set-up, configuration, control and/or supervision is applicable by assigning network management function terminal via an selectable WPs and/or on stations which is generally visualised by 210 for WP or an optional similar port 200 for a station.
Separation in sub-WPs of one WP is applied allowing a basic WP modem capacity, based on more tan one sub-carrier, to be spliced including the possible use in different directions creating virtually more than one WP. I.e. if a modem were focused on only one WP all capacity could be applied with higher transfer capacity WP in one direction and with one other WP.
It is further generally visualised, as an example only, of method and means how WPs is split up 570 into sub-WPs. The method is also applicable for a WP, which is not separated in sub-WPs. This includes means for separation of WPs from radio/antenna parts on one hand and modem, logic's etc. and/or switching and UPs some distance away via low loss, low cost cabling. One such possible physical realisation is to use an intermediate frequency separation between radio heads (laser if applied) and logics, i.e. via cabling on a lower frequency than the bearer frequency.
Means to improve hop-lengths reduce cost and size of radio heads is applied by locating these as near as possible to horn and/or applied directly to a horn etc. This method includes the use of antenna (generally exemplified by 581 or 583 or similar).
Means to allow location of a number of small radio transmitter/receivers on an antenna system is exemplifies by (581). This antenna exemplified shows supports of multiple parallel beam operation (like multiple horn works on a common reflector). I.e. a radio head per horn is applied which in turn is connected to its respective WP and/or sub-WP in order to select the antenna coverage or direction. The meaning with the various antenna lobe sizes shown is to indicate inculcation of regulation of transmission power depending on hop distance to corresponding WP.
Thus, by selecting (routing) traffic to any WP and/or sub-WP a transmission direction to a corresponding WP at another station is applied. Including in fact switching/routing between WPs, sub-WPs on the same station.
Means to allocate any radio head to an number of directions is included in order to make it possible to select direction per WP, sub-WP etc. for continuos streams in point to point mode of operations between WPs and/or sbb-WPs. Transfer of data via the air between multiple WPs is applicable. This includes communication between one WP (sub-WP) and a number of other WPs (sub-WPs) in a point - multipoint mode, P-MP. This include means of selecting a number of sub-carriers and/or sub-channels (see generally figure 8 a) between respective pair of WPs for their respective transfer between each other.
Multiple carriers are also applicable to be possible to be used in common by multiple scattered WPs (sub-WPs).
Means to use the same and/or overlapping frequency bandwidth of one WP (sub-WP) communications resources at a station to be used by multiple other WPs (sub-WPs) at other stations (at least in the direction toward the scattered WPs) is applied.
Multiple users, which transfer data between WPs (sub-WPs) on overlapping frequency bands (carrier, sub-carriers), include means to logically separate such traffic between the various users. Means to separate multiple users traffic via WPs operating on overlapping frequencies is to separate users in segment on carriers, sub-carriers. Example of one of many possible segmentation structures per carrier is shown in figure 19. Means to signal between WPs who and when which segment whom uses for the transfer of data between WPs.
Sharing of communication resources between users in the opposite direction from multiple WPs to one WP is not applicable on overlapping frequency due to interference. Means to utilise powerful coding as used as in spread spectrum technologies like CDMA, W-CDMA, etc. and/or frequency division separation of sub-carriers are applied FDMA and/or if time division between the scattered WPs, TDMA, is applicable. In addition frequency-hopping schemes between a number of commonly sub-carriers different is in addition applicable.
Methods functions and means supporting continuos streams at selectable transfer rates including selection of number of carriers, selection of modulation level, error recovery. Methods functions and means for point - multipoint (P-MP) communication between WPs (sub-WPs), including functionality's for:
FDMA/FDMA, i.e. individual selection of channels, sub-carriers in each direction (down and/or uplink)
FDM/FDMA, i.e. common share of bandwidth sub-carriers etc. by a group of WPs in down link direction (to multiple WPs) and selective use of separate frequencies on reverse up-link direction
FDM TDMA, i.e. as above in down-link direction and TDMA on common frequency band in the up-link direction, see below
TDMA/TDMA, i.e. share of a bandwidth , and using time frame structure including means to allocate time slots within frames to select individual transfer capacity between WPs (sub-WPs) either in down and/or up-link direction
TDM/TDMA, i.e. time division separation done logically on information transferred form a WP to multiple WPs and TDMA in the up-link direction
Means are included to utilise spread spectrum transmission utilising coding and/or frequency hopping for WPs arranged for point - point mode and or WPs arranged for P-MP mode.
Means to apply spatial division for the WPs arranged in P-MP mode of operation i.e. SDMA (spatial) are included (as visualise by 581 , figure 3).
Method in W-SENS approaches include effective adoption to station topology changes allowing new routing possibilities when new stations occurs in a network. Means for structuring and/or restructuring of networks are included. Means to allow the possibility to vary transfer and/or add transfer directions in unpredictable directions are included for point-point mode of operations as well as point-multipoint mode of operations between WPs.
This includes means to either manually redirect and/or electronically redirect antennas in new and or alternative directions. The functionality is to prevent the need to (always) install physically new antennas (like 582, for every new added direction. I.e. by the time of installation of a new station an antenna which have a capability to add new main lobes into another added directions (including overlapping directions) could be applied. This if it would it economically considered applicable initially when there might be no knowledge of where the new WP and/or station will be.
The illustrated antenna 581 shows one such antenna with a capability to arrange WP and/or sub-WPs in multiple antenna lobe directions. It also visualises a possible spatial separation between communication of pairs of WPs in point-point mode and/or point - multipoint modes. Arranging WP in pairs of Point-Point (P-P), communication means that a radio head (transmitter/receiver and filter, 568, 569) is used per lobe. Arranging WPs in a Point - Multipoint (P-MP) mode of operation according to FDMA, FDM/FDMA, FDM/TDMA, TDMA/TDMA etc. Spatial separation i.e. Space Division Multiple Access (SDMA) is applicable.
Various frequency power distribution lobe splitting mechanisms, lobe switching etc. is further shown in figure 27, where radio heads are used in appropriate directions (by the beams pointing in different directions) etc.
If no spatial separation is required an antenna solution similar to 583 with continuos coverage is applied i.e. included at least for FDMA/FDMA, FDM/FDMA, FDMA/TDMA, TDM/TDMA, TDM/CDMA.
Means to regulate transmitted power is applied including ability to make changes based on various of hop length and / or transmission, fading margin, bit error performance, etc. for each specific lobe direction and pair of WPs (sub-WPs) in communication.
The means to arrange for a spliced approach (sub WP) mentioned here is to make it possible to better utilise the total capacity according to variable demands. I.e. it also improve frequency efficiency instead of using the total bandwidth in all multiple directions as commonly used in standard TDM/TDMA, FDM/FDMA, CDMA and or similar approaches with or without spatial direction control.
Means and advantages with the each sub-WP approach includes:
customised physical bandwidth,
channel selection
selective transfer speed selection versus hop length corresponding error correction adjustment etc. to meet quality performance which as well may be required to set individually per hop.
sharing of equipments of a central WP by multiple WPs reduces cost Common use of equipment are arranged at station to reduce cost and improve a flexible and modular variation and expanding of transfer capacity communication in multiple directions etc. Means of sharing equipment include: ■ sharing of station facilities by allowing the applying of a number of WPs working in multiple point - point mode with other scattered station
■ sharing of stations and at least one WP including the use common use of spliced into sub-WPs by more than one station, WP and/or sub-WP
■ sharing of a station and at least one WP and/or sub-WP to be shared by more than one WP and/or sub-WP
Efficient use of frequency spectrum and allow for high possible transfer rates between WPs and/or sub-WPs in an area to allow the high bandwidth service to multiple users in an environment are the following means included:
■ Switching and/or routing of traffic between stations in selected directions is for transmission and/or reception of data from user applications (like 1010/1020) and/or including communication with other stations (like 300, 301..) in different direction by digital switched/routing function applied at station
■ Establishment of communication from one station equipped with one WP that allow communication with multiple scattered stations, these station as well equipped at least with one WP where the communication from one WP to the other WPs is including transfer via spatial antenna beams ■ For the shifting between traffic into different antenna beams by shifting beams at in to corresponding station and WPs at least for TDMA schemes
Example: a group of sub-WPs may commonly share a sub-capacity (and physical bandwidth) of the total potentially available by a central WP. Each sub-WP includes means to specifically select its bandwidth i.e. number of sub-channels and/or sub-carriers. Other sub-WPs may select the use another bandwidth segment or use overlapping frequencies etc. Thus, means are included to allow: ■ respective WP and/or sub-WP (the central or the remotes) to tailor for there respective transfer requirement and adopt to variable bandwidth requirements to reduce cost,
use spectrum efficient,
■ control variation of hop-lengths
I.e. reduce cost and bandwidth consumption than if all of the possible bandwidth options where available everywhere. To optimise quality of transfer of connectionless packet data is means for storing intermediate peak burst of interactive data (as an example by the use of TCP/IP) applicable.
When the peaks of data between WPs is higher less than the transfer capacity available between WPs is an intermediate storing of digital data applied, exemplified schematically by 551 M, 55MUP. See also figure 12 and 14 where this is explained further. Such memory function includes ability to be arranged as an external memory 551 M, which is including possibility to tailor in memory size, is schematically indicated. The methods functions and means included at functional processing unit 566/1 are:
Process of analyse received data quality
Process of the analysed data, eventual overload etc. of 551 M 551 MUP etc. Prepare report (NMS) and/or execute corrections transfer rate adjustments, i.e. number of carriers, modulation, power level, single or dual polarisation operation etc.
Control apply of appropriate transfer rate per carrier
Control of apply of appropriate error correction per carrier Control of analyse of applied received signalling information on UPs/TPs to and WPs including those between WPs etc.
The dotted square of 566/1/1 means to represents the actual processes controlled for a number of WPs. Similar functionality's as described for 551 M is considered for digital ports 100, 110 etc. visualised by 551 MUP. In addition these may as well work in co-ordination with each other if both are implemented.
A vision of a possible station platform is represented by 10. A number of WPs, Ups, is shown in the figure to be controlled by a switching function unit 2. A station is equipped with means for controlling the communication to and from a station. Such controlling means is visualised by a functioning processing unit, 9. One processing function unit 9 includes means for virtually emulate the processing functions of a WP or more (generally visualised by 9/1).
Figure 6
The idea with this figure is to generally describe methods functions and possible means to realise WPs.
Control function, modems, separation of sub-carriers into sub-WPs etc. is shown in some general examples of systems implementation possibilities of a type of WP. Means included for communication is: selection of sub-carriers to radio heads rate on sub-carriers, selection of error control and error correction on sub-carriers selection of number of sub-carriers, of power level of sub-carriers of intermediate frequency directions switching (ISW, fig. 31b)
This includes possibility to separate any WP to work into more than one direction etc. as described above for separate bandwidth (no of sub- channels speeds etc.) of respective radio heads, 568, and for a kind of FDMA arrangement, etc.
An exemplification is made where 4 sub-channels, sub-carriers (in the modulator and demodulator, 551/567,) are working on one radio head and where 8 sub-channels are connected to another radio head, etc. FB4 is generally indicating functional means for combining 4 sub-channels on an intermediate frequency level and connect these channels to radio head 568 via an intermediate signal 565/1. For the sake of simplicity in the explanation , are the number of sub-channels for transmit and receive are equal. I.e. means are included to select a required number of channels grouped and the capacity in transmit respective receive direction.
Further means to control the capacity including physical bandwidth per subchannel is applied. The selection of different modulation levels applicable including QPSK, 16QAM, 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128, QAM, 256 QAM, 512 QAM, 1024 QAM, 2048 QAM, 4096 QAM
The use of standard radio frequency plans is included. A typical example is a frequency cannel plan based on 28 MHz, which may be spliced in a number of combined bandwidths, like 1.75, 3.5, 7, 14, 28 MHz. Other may be 1 MHz channels, 5, 10, 20, 40. 50, 100 depending on circumstances like applications, standards and countries. Arrangement of sub-carriers bandwidth and total bandwidth considered usable varies according to application etc. Means are included to make the carrier and/or sub-carrier bandwidth grouping feasible to be organised in a bunch of effectively grouped sub-carriers. I.e. as for Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation ODFM modulation (exemplified by a Hiperlan standard) etc. Additionally are means arranged to include: effective filtering of a selected number of parallel sub-carriers
include selectively possible vary of modulation level
based on a standard frequency channels
simplified intermediate filtering design
allow effectively avoidance of adjacent channel interference ■ allow efficient use of the gained improved signal/noise performance by using a multiple narrow channels in comparison to use one wide
■ to combining equally wide sub-channels in selectable groups of frequency bands ■ to combine unequally wide sub-channels in selectable groups of frequency bands
Method functions means include sub-channels to be possible to control for:
■ Individual selectable modulation level ■ Individual selectable forward error correction
■ Groups of carriers controlled to selectable modulation levels i.e. control of group by group (example - a group of OFDM modems each containing a number of sub-carriers over a certain band - one example is a number of OFDM modems similar to those used by an evolving ETSI Hiperlan standard)
Control of carriers in frequencies is required to select appropriate radio channel, arrange frequency hoping schemes etc. In addition are it advantageous to allow separation of WPs between radio and antennas, in addition to be able to switch directions based on intermediate switching, to distribute intermediate frequencies to multiple radio heads for TDM and or TDM type of applications. Method functions and means are included:
for controlling intermediate frequencies of sub-channels. ■ to switch the intermediate frequency sub-carrier or groups of sub-carriers to more than one radio head including in selectable time
for distributing any sub-channel or groups of sub-channels to more than one radio head
Means for internal control of any WP is available to a degree needed for functions envisaged. This includes signalling visualised by 2101 for control and supervision of modem, quality performance supervision, signal processing etc. 2102 is visualised to include control supervision of radio or light wave transmission. 2103 is visualising include control of antenna direction for spatial arrangements. Control and supervision signals includes typically interaction between a processing unit here represented by 566/1 and the other functional units of a WP, inclusive 566 which is visualised as a simple data control or flow mechanism and or switching function (see also fig 33 2*). The processing units of a WP could be seen as a function if it is remotely processed outside of the specific WP. As in cases of a central processing function for the switching performance is including real time communication control of one or more WPs. In figure 5 is a central processing function, 9, visualised at station 10. In order to slime an simplify the size, share functions to increase security etc. of specific WPs, the WPs include means to locally and/or remotely control and supervise one or multiple WPs. Control of flows and performance include possible transparent use of either sides processing units function i.e. including remote overtake of one WP at one sire of another WP.
Including functions for set-up and/or control and/or supervision function and selected remote real time communication controls and supervision mechanisms by a remote WP process function.
A result of this is any of two WP in communication could take over control of the other to increase security and flexibility at time of set up etc. This includes the ability to control a set up situation logically from any one end as an example. Tools are available to support installation, set-up, basic configuration, rearrange communication between stations, WPs etc. Methods functions and Means are included to set up communication between any two WPs are included. This means include set up of required signalling between any two ports to perform communication effectively. Generally described processing function units 566/1 are exchanging signalling data between each other by the use of one or more carrier which applied data demodulated and set to selected digital form at the receive end. The communication process include: control of transfer requirement ■ set of bandwidth and number of carriers, control transmitted power if needed, control received level, record transmission quality, select speed on carriers or sub-carriers, adjust and optimise antenna direction etc.
Methods functions and means possible to included for establishing and maintain communication between WPs are:
■ initialise and set up communication between WPs by sending out signalling information to the a corresponding WP
■ received data at the other end containing control data for the remote WP is detected and this control data include information speed select,
■ error correction,
■ coding, select of sub-channel,
looping of data at the other end
After that a signalling handshake is realised between the two ends, it is possible to agree to a communication protocol transfer rate at any time thereafter between the two ends. Such remote set up mechanism also include possible remote control of alignment between two antennas manually and/or distantly to adjust lobes towards each other, i.e. to properly align antennas to highest received level at both ends and/or reduce transmission error.
Means for controlling transfer rate settings and quality optimisation is included it is controllable via an network management function visualised by 210 for any WP (at least those equipped with a processing unit 566/1 ) and 200 for any station.
Means for remote control supervision of any station and WP from any station is applied by the functionality of network management functions. Means are included for manual and/or automatically selection of transfer requirements between pairs of WPs, including optimisation of a total transfer rate balanced with a selected transfer quality balanced on actual traffic requirement for such transfer between any pair of station stations connected.
Point-point mode of operation or FDMA type P-MP mode of operation are continuos streams of one or more sub-channels or sub-carriers (TC1 , TC2...RC1 , RC2..etc.) is applicable.
Means for signalling between any pair of WPs in order to control and set up an appropriate bandwidth i.e. by adjusting modulation level versus quality requirements controlled by error correction and/or power regulation) applied for the respective sub-channels or for groups of sub-channels.
Means for combining digital user data and signalling information is applied on the sub-channels. One of many possible data and signalling structures are possible.
One example of a structure with reserved time for user data and signalling type of information is generally shown in figure 19. The advantages with this protocol shown is that if continuos streams are used the time interruption indicated for signalling is applicable for various other possible features. It is applied to simplify frequency shift (under signalling time segment), speed changes, blocks of equal size of users data used independent of speed, optional use of time division (and TDMA) where the signalling time would be utilised as guard and contain synchronisation etc. During continuos transfers of any sub-channel the extra "signalling time" reserved is usable for parallel signalling. Error detection and correction of consecutive user data blocks. If spare capacity is available even user data transfer is applicable.
Methods functions and means included in a WP to perform required functions are 566, which is a function where typically; ■ serial data of 110 is matched with parallel data, signalling data of information to be transferred analysed,
■ control of one or more sub-channels
■ signalling data with the corresponding WP is mixed in and extracted
In the example given is a number of digital Q signals and I sent and/or received between the digital functional unit 566 and the modem functional unit 551/567.
Figure 7a
The figure shows example of implementation of the method functions means in a system or part of a system. In this examples are two WPs 550 shown to communicate. Communication is considered in this case to happen radio optically performed schematised by 302. Connectionless switching function anticipated as indicated by 2 at station 10 and 11.
Figure 7b and c
The idea with these figures is to visualise a number of sub-channels which are different for the directions and also changes of the number of sub- carriers happens in time (x, y for transmit and xx,yy for receive) between station 10 to and from 11.
In the example is visualised that a number of sub-channels are used to carry information to be transferred between pair of WPs. It is visualised how shifts occur in number of sub-channels from time to time (BWTx and BWTy) and BWRxx and BWRyy). I.e. it is illustrated methods functions means included to:
■ select bandwidth,
■ transfer rates on sub-channels, selectively per channel,
■ in selectable directions.
Means include selection of modulation level, number of sub-channels (thus transfer rate) inclusive selection of electromagnetic radio frequency carrier selectively per direction.
The figure illustration show generally a selectable number of sub-channels are applied for the transfer of information between the two WPs, 550. Figure 7b indicate number of channels allocated for transfer from station 10 to 11 and that the number is shifted to be less at a certain time.
Figure 7c illustrates a few number of station are allocated for transfer from station 11 to 10 initially and that the number of channels are increased after time xx. Figure 7d
The idea here is to generally visualise methods functions and means by one example of flows of data between stations 11 and 10. In order to simplify the explanation of this example are only two stations interconnected via WPs and Ups. It should be understood that a number of UPs and/or TPs and/or stations and/or pair of WPs could be involved in transactions of data including those between any functional devices of stations (processor functions, network management - signalling etc.). The user connections in the example implies services multi service support for users being connected to a connectionless environment like Ethermet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or any future evolving standard of similar kind etc.
Transfer of Asynchronous Transfer Mode signals of various rates is further exemplified being transferred transparently should this be required. Synchronous telecommunications signals of ITU-T standards from at least E1/T1 up to at least STM-1 rates 155 Mbit/s, overlayered with various protocols including telecommunication transfer SDH, SONET, IP and ATM.
Example of methods functions of means included for connectionless packet data transfer:
■ Data to be transferred at station 10, 10Ot, includes ability to handle applications which uses various IP protocols (exemplified by at least the following included IPv4, IPv6, rslP, nat, IPsec etc.).
■ Support efficiently and utilise transfer capacity either for interactive burst communication or data, which required to be transferred virtually synchronously like voice IP, video IP etc.
■ Data signal entered, 100t, contains signalling information which allow it to be switched and/or routed to interface 110t (a typical serial interface),
Data entered (110t) which have to be routed to more than one WP at a station for parallel routing etc. is capable of being spliced it into various routes and/or distributed in parallel to more than one WP controlled by the switching function and/or its process function 566/1.
Data content from 110t entered at WP 550 is including ability to analyse the type of transfer required, ■ Data to be transferred include ability to filtered out at 550,
Data which has to be transferred as seamless synchronous (and/or synchronous) include analyse in 550 and the process of securing that enough transfer rate is applied between WPs is included (taking into consideration other user ports requirements). Data which accepts transfer of a certain (defined) degradation in terms of variable delays is defined and secured in a similar way as for synchronous
■ Data at least data that accepts variable transfer delays include possibility to passed via an intermediate buffer memory function 551 M interactive when user traffic at peaks are higher than the applied transfer capacity to the other station continuously supports
■ Data status of such intermediate memory function is detectable in order to be used to regulate the transfer rate between the corresponding WPs at least for interactive data (typical may be example TCP/IP based traffic etc.).
■ Data supposed to transferred to the other station inclusive signalling between stations and/or WPs and/or UPs etc. is packed in a logical format for the transaction in correspondence to a communications procedure via the air which may be based on standards and/or proprietary standards
Data is transferred to a corresponding WP (in the example in point-point mode) where it is repacked at station 11 550 to a selected format and transmitted via 100r to switching function of station 11 where it is switched to UP 1010.
A similar transaction is taking place in the opposite directions.
A similar process is performed for the other type of traffic i.e. ATM and synchronous telecommunication signal transfers.
In this cases are their signal format converted to the appropriate asynchronous signal format including signalling before it is transmitted over the system. Including repackaging and clocking etc. at the receive side as been described principally in other places of this document.
Figureδa
The method functions and means include use of more than one carrier. The following methods functions and means are included: ability to scale capacity between WPs by assigning a selectable number of sub-carriers
split the transfer in more than one carrier to lower the total data rate transfer per channel (to enable simple and low cost implementation of signalling processing), use of selectable modulation schemes from simple modulation into very complex (simplify realisation of highly efficient use of spectrum by any of the multiple carriers),
scale frequency bandwidth between WPs
split a common modem capacity to be spliced and able to be used in multiple directions,
Further advantages are that is would virtually makes it possible to create total transfer rates which would be scaleable to reach beyond typical rates used by standard radio link approaches, problems of delay spread typical in radio communications, robust communication, increased hop-lengths.
The figure generally visualises use of one type of FDM modulation for communication between WPs.
In the example is a certain number of sub-channels (TC1 , TC2, TC3, TC,4....up to TCn) shown allocated for the traffic in on direction and another number of sub-channels (RD1, RC2 up to RCp) for the communication in the opposite direction. The visualisation is only meant to schematically show a certain frequency spectrum of each sub-channel. The actual frequency bandwidth of each subchannel is here shown to be about equal, however this may differ from application to allocation. The use of a same frequency bandwidth apply to the use of Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation, OFDM, schemes and/or the use of similar band pass filtering of the sub-channels and other advantages.
Figure 8b
The figure shows one of many possible modulator structures. The figure visualises an example of a modulator (MOD) which modulate a number of sub-channels and applying a filter group consisting of 8 channels
TC1 ..TC8 to FB8T1. Another similar group is formed in parallel FB8T2.
These are combed in into 16 sub-channels to CC16T. These are combined in an intermediate frequency 40001 /IF to be connected to a radio head.
FDM, FDMA, TDM and or TDMA and or combinations including spatial separation are applicable.
Method functions and means are included to support it are:
■ multiple intermediate signals to be distributed in parallel to multiple radios (in the example 4), see -IDS figure 31.
shift of one intermediate frequency signal between radio heads (in this example 4). See -ISW figure 31.
Such functions are generally visualised by CH1 SPLIT or SW), at fig 8b and c.
Figure 8c
The idea with this figure is to show one of many possible examples of means to arrange a number of sub-channels for one or more radio heads (or laser heads) in either in/out direction of a WP and or sub-WPs.
In the example are a number of possible sub-WPs envisaged just for demonstration purpose. The following principal functional units are visualised:
Modulator (MOD) Demodulator
Intermediate distributor/Switch CH1 SPLIT or SW
Modulated Intermediate carrier, TC 1 ...TC 4 ...
Groupings of sub-carriers (CC4, CC8 etc.)
Intermediate cabling, 4002/IF (transmit), 3002IF (receive)
Radio heads, filter, sub-WP virtual point - point visualised by 582 antenna arrangement and/or sub-WP visualised as a virtual P-MP via
581 antenna arrangement.
Functional unit CC4 means to show how 4 sub-channels in either in/or direction are used or usable. However, it is exemplified that variable bandwidth set-up is applicable by indicating 4 channels out and at least 1 channel in. The whole capacity of a modem may be used for one radio head (laser) or more directions or other combinations, as this is only a general visualisation.
Figure 9
The idea with the figure is to generally vision some of the multiple communications topologies and services that is envisaged by use of methods functions and means envisaged in this document.
Multiple ports are applicable to be connected at principally any at any station, in the example exemplified by 10, 11 , 12, 13, 14, 15 and their corresponding possible extensions like 13' and/or 13" etc. included to be usable to configure for various communications services and types of transactions.
The system implementation shown is indicating systems based on connectionless switching functions in the stations. Transparent communication is principally applicable, irrespective of the number of stations passed at least seen from a user perspective.
Methods functions and means are included for:
Fast switching and or routing in order to minimise the added switching delay of data packets
Stations virtually functioning in any station topology configuration principal are operations in a non-hierarchical structure implied in regard to each other.
Station include options to add WPs to connect to new stations, delete WPs if stations are disconnected, re-configure WP for changing topology demands (different transfer capacity, directions etc.)
Station include options to add various number and types of ports
Switching functions of stations include transferring, splitting of user data into more than one WP and/or sub-WP (route) to support various transfer routes to the same destination and/or multiply a similar message to multiple locations.
■ Switching functions include UPs at various stations and/or at the same stations to transfer information via WPs or not ■ Stations are capable of emulating functions of wireless access solutions
Any station than can see another one and where these stations are equipped with a corresponding WP communication could be performed.
Synchronous, seamless synchronous flow requirements, asynchronous packets and/or cell is transferable virtually transparent.
The abbreviation 13/13713" (as generally described in figure 17 b and 18) indicate a possible use of a mixture of stations topologies which use one and/or multiple switch and/or router functions.
Methods, functions and means include: ■ Switching and/or routing between WPs and/or TPs and/or UPs inside stations (10 or 13 etc.) includes switching
■ Switching outside stations by external function devices mentions by (13' in relation to 13), see figure 18 and the further description.
■ Switching of traffic between scattered stations
The general idea is further to show (A) broadcast of user information i.e. where one source multiple its destinations (media distribution, films etc.), by applying broadcast protocol on applied data and means to respond to send such data along appropriate routes for each destination. Further (B, D) indicates an establishment of a number of possible transparent connections between user application for asynchronous or synchronous communication, etc. between ports. I.e. principally including termination relaying and/or insertion of data and establish such connections at virtually any station. Application included are transparent transmit of data between switching systems and/or mobile base stations, multiple indoor access base stations, multiple access solutions which include connections between these base stations. I.e. included are connections to external fixed wireless access system (example fig. 4 -b-) connecting scattered data and/or telecommunications networks etc.
The figure meaning to further visualising internal communications possibilities to support access of scattered users which may or may not require high performance switching capability locally at the termination point regardless if this capacity is available or not. Thus, a virtual implementation of logical functions of multiples of wireless accesses solutions to be operating at one or more stations. See also further explanation in figure 20. I.e. some applications are a use of a wireless solution to operate a transparent extensions of (an interface -via wire or similar) to connect a user or a user group at a remote switching system. I.e. such switching system may be based on any switching function (2) in a system implemented based on the method or an externally located switch. Examples in fig. 3 show also some possible means to realise a seemingly access solution where WPs are organised in P-MP mode of operations for virtual creation of multiple point connections, however multiple point-point WP could as well be included to logically functioning as an access. In figure 4 is an external access system (a) connected to switch (2) in a W-SENS wireless system.
The transaction of data demands the use of the equipment and or frequency spectrum thus means for effective sharing of both spectrum and equipment is included. Possibilities to switch and/or route data between Users in a network are applicable which E and a local F generally illustrates it.
Methods functions and means are included to:
■ Set-up connections including various routings
Set -up functions for possible charging (billing) of transferred data in accordance to volume and/or quality and /or bandwidth and/or priority
(network management M1B data base etc.)
Set-up and supervise quality on connections
Figure 10 a Figure 10 a) is principally visualising one of many possible physical structures of a station and an example of a station connected to an external user network (packet data oriented - i.e. Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and a synchronous connections etc.). Example in figures (1 -9) are WPs shown connected to digital ports 110, 111 etc.
Various types of implementations is applicable specifically in regard to where switching and/or routing functionality's are located physically and or how differently switches/routers are interrelated, i.e. placed on roof top, in the basement, in the localities of user premises etc. The figure shown an example of a switching function 2 related to a possible number of WPs connected via a port 110 or more ports 111 depending of the total flow required at a functional unit 600 include possibilities to be located at a distance from 610. I.e. 600 may be located outdoor and 610 indoor separated by x-m via a wire or fibre in order to simplify installation.
In this case the functional unit 610 which also shown to contain a switching function 2' that could be a users network switch/router supporting internal communication of the data network shown by 1010, where 1012 represents multiple user connected to a local data network. The block 1010 could represent one or more server functions etc.
Applicability of transparent synchronous connections is indicated by 101 ,
120 it is exemplified as a connection to an external backbone network, 1000. Thus a mixture of traffic types is indicated and a comprehensive station structure consisting of a number of distributed switching functions 2 (near or in co-operation with one or a few WPs) which interrelates to a common switching function 2' at 610.
The meaning with the shown structure is to generally visualise one of many possible distributed switching concept at a station. Each such distributed switch function 2 at 600 could be arranged to handle a number of WPs in various directions and it could in fact alone include the services required.
The connections between the switching functions and the WPs can be made short and one rugged version of 600 could be placed outdoor near an antenna system and support an number of directions form each such site. Including means to:
■ arrange physically close connections between respective WP, radio and antenna horns etc. establish a station (or part of a station 600) to be built into a multi-lobe antenna equipped with a number of WPs etc.
An example of a possible implementation is to locate 4 x the 600 units (or more) on 4 separate walls of a building etc. all these connected to 610 located in a building at a terminal room etc. i.e. in order to establish a station node for a very high capacity arrangement covering various directions. Principal difference here between earlier description of a typical station could be to replace 110 with 100 and 600 with 10.
Figure 10 b
This figure is exemplifying a station that have a similar structure to 10 a) however, its terminology corresponds better to previous and further explanation of distributed switching functionality's and also to the possible integration to other switching routing platforms described in fig. 16, 17 a, 17 b, 18 etc.
Figure 11 a and 11 b
This figure illustrates some examples of packing data that was entered into a WP into some various formats to carriers and/or sub-carriers for the transmission over the air.
Application of data (user data signalling etc.) to be transferred over the air has to be transferred as efficient as possible. Methods functions and means are included being able to adopt to certain wireless standards including those for radio relay, radio links, fixed and/or applied mobile wireless access for tele and/or data and/or internet and/or media communication and/or distribution.
Besides standards protocol adoptions included according to requirement of the WP communications are proprietary communications standards on WPs applied.
Below is a few examples illustrated how data q 1 , k 1 , which are considered entering from port 110 etc. entering 550 being analysed spliced and formed for the actual transmission over the air. It may include adoption error detection and/or error correction, it this is not applied differently in the respective modems.
Transmission through the air that include carrying digital modulated information on radio frequency carriers includes possibilities to use a number of sub-carriers in parallel order to enhance communication between
WPs.
In addition realisation of effective utilisation of frequency spectrum highly efficient modulation method and/or including other means for such realisation like separation of streams in space and time.
In order to apply to such parallel streams of communication are means included for: selection of number of sub-channels thus also physical bandwidth, selection of modulation level of sub-carriers (i.e. which could be from BPSK, QPSK 256 QAM....4096 QAM), verify transmission quality Bit Error Rate performance BER and/or when applicable delay performance in reference to required quality apply error detection and/or error corrections codes apply data (q...1 , etc.) on the parallel carriers to minimise delay conform to required standards for radio frequency spectrum and/or laser spectrum used per WP if applicable transfer data cross polarised on radio antenna transfer data on vertical and/or horizontal polarisation transfer data based on separation of transfer streams in space and time from individual streams transferred through the air and/or to multiple real and/or virtual WPs, i.e. including selective coding on the individual multiple bit streams and/or include creation of a real and/or virtual realisation of a reflected environment of the emitted information as it is received by the different WPs
As mentioned there are several reasons organise transfer in parallel like: influence from eventual delay spread from air transmission ■ selection of limited frequency bandwidth per sub-channel makes it principally possible to increase the hop length in comparison relative if the whole bandwidth should be always used (less noise on the channel)
■ implementation of error detection and error correction or generally signalling processing of each sub-channel separately could be more easily integrated per sub-channel transferred data than if one high speed channel where used.
Practical implementations of radio links are as an example typically limited to about 400-600 Mbit/s these rates could be superseded by the use of multiple parallel sub-channels implementation.
The OFDM modulation method in a coming Hiperlan short range standard could be applicable as well as the modem structures shown here for demonstration purpose or other modems for multi carriers and/or single carriers as well should it be required on specific WPs.
Methods means and functions are arranged to transfer data sequentially concerted and transferred secure limited time delay, limited extra ove.r- heads to achieve an appropriate security.
The idea with the figures 11 a and b is to show a few examples of many possible to include for converting virtually serial digital data packets entered and prepared are applied sequentially. Transfer represented by 100/a and 100/b entering at a WP from a switch function (2).
In this example picker and placed byte by byte to the parallel channels sequentially (from low to high) until the whole set of information is applied (q...1). "Packet" (q..1)by "Packet" (k...1) etc. may sequentially be placed as visualised by 11 b. This data is applied into a suitable format for the transmission through the air. This is done by picking byte by byte of the received packed and apply it to channel by channel sequentially until the whole packet is applied, 1 to q. Packets that follow (100/b), 1 to k, etc. may be allowed to continue direct sequentially on the next sub-channel, as principally shown in fig 11 b. Additional extra control bytes may be applied for error detection error correction or other purposes selective methods if needed for the specific packets 100/a and 100/b.
The byte by byte conversion of serial to parallel transfer is repeated normally unless a certain position of segmentation in data and signalling on sub- channels is applied. This including possible interruption in selected time positions exemplified by P1 if such interruption is applied to be used for TDMA and/or frequency shift and/or modulation level adjustment etc. See an example of a possible data and signalling segments on sub-channels, figure 19. S1SxC1 , S1SxC1). Methods functions and mean of transfer of through the air include ability to apply to such lower layer time segmentation protocol or not. At position (P1) which would be selected to be possible to be repeatable occurring independent of modulation level selected (i.e. at T01 ,T02,T03...etc), are functions, means included making it applicable to interleave data transfer on sub-channels included at time (P1) for:
change frequency on carrier, carriers (including frequency hopping etc),
add signalling information
change speed change coding
■ obtain time frame structure separation in time etc. if time division multiple access would be applied for the communication between stations
Other alternative protocols or complementation of the procedures or protocols may be applied and 11 c shows a slight variation. In this case i the picking and placing interrupted as a data block is applied and a new packet is applied is staring at a specific selectable sub-channel channel, in this case shown to be CH1.
This is only to visualise that many potential means of various possible "serial" to parallel conversion models are optionally available.
Ability to transfer data safely for users by preparing prevention's for eavesdrops etc. is applicable.
Methods functions and means are included to vary the picking and placing to achieve a possible coding of the data transfer purposes to increase security. Thus data bits or bytes of a serial stream include according to schemes:
pick of data of the data to be transferred (q-1 , etc.) at selected positions, bit and/or bytes accorting to selectable scheme
place data on sub-channels to a selectable scheme, which may differ from sequential (as was previously described)
Similar are methods functions and means applied at corresponding ends to decrypt transferred data in accordance to the schemes applied which is signalled and agreed between the respective WPs
Signalling for pack and/or repack data flow including of various options of signalling between WP and stations in the stream flown between WPs is applied.
It include signalling for agreed frequency shift (at P1), speed variation assign applications applicable between the respective WP ends.
If ATM switches where used and/or ATM cell where transmitted towards adopted WPs the serial structure of each such cell would similarly be applied byte by byte sequentially channel by channel in a similar way as for packets of variable lengths. In addition ATM cells would be extra protected in its content by error detection and/or in particular protect its five byte address code error correction codes to protect in particular this data with enough security etc.
The method of applying extra error protection of ATM cells is in addition applied in cases where ATM interfaces are connected and supposed to be transferred over a system implemented by connectionless switching functions. I.e. as converted to asynchronous Ethernet types of ports (122 fig. 7 d) etc. when connectionless switching functions is applied.
A low level information protocol structure described in figure 19, i.e. information block shown in time segments that are called "data" include possible structure in such sizes as it at least could fit into short IP packet of 64 bytes and/or include an ATM cell of 53 bytes. In cases where ATM cells where transferred a number of bytes of error correction and error detection is possible additionally added to fill the "data" block should it be required. In fact this is considered a valuable option to specifically secure as the 5 byte header of an ATM cell is to poorly protected which could otherwise course loss and confusing in the network in making wrong decisions. Transfer of ATM cells or at least its addressing information is applicable to be secured to a level superseding BER 10-13 should this be needed.
Various services and/or various communications protocols (like ATM) need to be safely and to a variable degree transparently transferred. Methods functions and means included to improving transmission quality between WPs by:
■ applying extra digital bits of error detection code on data to be transferred (q-1 , etc.)
■ utilise applied error detection codes applied on Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet data packets cells etc. ■ selectively add error detection's codes on selected parts of each part of a information as requires more security (like ATM header)
■ applying selectable level of forward error correction coding on data transferred based on modulation method selected and/or noticed quality performance at the corresponding WP end using variable degree of forward error corrections coding on selected parts of data transferred (like header of ATM ceils, and/or other services signalling and/or quality improvements required)
applying forward error codes in accordance to quality requirement (which could be modulation method, hop lengths or based on actual detected quality etc.)
detecting errors and/or to correct errors after transmission to increase quality and/or security. Not only switching has to be performed fast between WPs at stations in order to meet transparency requirement, low delay which could be reasonable constant but olso in the transfer process of data entering into a WP until it is transferred out from a corresponding WP at another station. Methods functions and means include fast and transparent transfer of data at least for data of synchronous entering into a WP in order to avoid time delay in the transfer to corresponding stations switching functions in the signalling process and applying procedure to the transmission system by including: ■ Sequentially applying coding on data to be transferred
■ Sequentially applying incoming serial data streams to selectively on subchannels in parallel (fig 11a)
Sequentially applying consecutive serial data streams organised in packet's (IP protocols of various kind etc.) and/or cells (ATM) (fig. 11b)
Figure 12
The figure means to visualise variable transfer flows requirements between various WPs and their in/or direction transmission. Selection of flow capacity and bandwidth adjustment is applicable at leased for radio transmission. I.e. one alternative approach would be to apply a total available transparency capacity between WPs to correspond directly to the UP/TP capacities. Methods functions and means are included for connectionless switching functions applied at stations where:
the WP would be supporting transparently the full capacity of 10, 100, 1000 Mbit/s through the air constantly applied for traffic between stations
WPs supporting full bandwidth assignment at time periods when data have to be transferred
WPs are assigned between full bandwidth and/or no connection at all
Considering integration of packet data networks and telecommunication types of data to be transferred requiring synchronously and/or seamless synchronously like IP-Voice, IP-video real time visions of new on Internet etc. Such arrangements would be far from always efficient as a set up time is needed and/or the actual bandwidth that is allocated may be far to much to what is needed and/or it may be uneconomical and/or and result in an inefficient use of spectrum, etc.
Instead of connecting communication between connectionless switches in a similar way as is cables where used are communication between such switches adapted to actual transfer capacity and type of traffic used in order to achieve as transparent communications as possible in particular when radio frequency carriers are used.
The reason for adoptions to radio transmission requires effective method functions and means in order to make it possible to share the frequency spectrum efficient among the stations, improve and/or optimise transfer capacity and/or improve adjustment for variable hop lengths, re-routing etc.
Methods functions and means are included in order to support the communication capacity and/or quality between UPs, TPs depending on traffic transfer requirements by: selection of physical bandwidths per pair of WP controlling of numbers of carriers and rates setting of modulation level on carriers between WPs, setting of error correction setting of transmission power adoptions to measure quality performance,
BER and/or delay select polarisation selection of cross polarised transfer ■ controllable via tools supporting restructuring of network topology
(virtually irrespective of certain topologies, clocks, other backbone networks) controllable routing alternatives for ability to increase transfer capacity between UPs/TPs and/or increase security
In fact the more stations that are involved the more are the switching/routing alternatives and again more station users could be added. Considering a geographical area where a number of user stations are implemented shorter and shorter hop lengths and more variations of elevations of the respective electromagnetic beams (radio, laser) would occur. Shorter hops are also resulting in less electromagnetic power radiation needed with maintained transmission quality. Thus, the increased effectiveness of the use of frequency resources is gained with an increased density of stations. The higher the density the more the density could be etc. i.e. the more stations are possible to establish. As earlier described a possible self-generating network expansion occurs for wireless networks built on the method, methods functions principles and means described in this document. The generally name it Wireless-Self Expansion Network Switching, W-SENS is therefore justified for networks built according to the method and addition methods etc. An implementation results in an automatic aggregated switching capability/capacity in an area, but not only usable for an increased number of wireless connections, as also local switching at each spot would be possible to implement.
I.e. higher the number of scattered stations in an area are the higher the aggregated switching capacity occurs automatically in total in such area. This is because the built in switching function of any station would be useable too new directions (new WPs etc.) adding possible transfer capacity at such station. Additionally any new station could potentially be used to local switching/routing and/or used as backbone-switching function for externally connected access systems like fixed or mobile wireless access. A non-hierarchical topology structure obtainable between stations is obtainable which leads to flexible switching and/or routing and/or termination of traffic. In comparison to fixed and/or mobile wireless access network solutions, radio links and/or radio links arranged in ring topologies and/or any network solution based on cables fibres etc. known, far more efficient networks is achieved by utilising the air in the way network implementation is shown here: Leading to improve services capabilities and flexibility which is far beyond what have been possible with conventional network approaches.
Methods functions and means includes establishing of end (UP) to end (UP) switched services within a geographical area between interrelated stations and/or between scattered W-SENS systems located at various area including ability to interconnect these W-SENS areas via other networks. The use of standardised switching platforms (for 2, 2') connected to other networks make such switching service globally feasible between even users connected to W-SENS in wide geographically scattered areas.
Methods functions and means are included for establishment of new stations, re-arrangement of topologies, routes, etc. including use of flexible re-directable antenna solutions supporting selection lobes, lobe direction control, radio head (or laser) for connection to corresponding lobe direction and/or lobe directions etc.
This to allow pre-investment network preparations and/or precautions for future changes, as an example to be made at the time of fist installation, etc. I.e. it may include more advanced antennas system (and more WPs and/or sub-WPs than initially required) than would be required initially as an example. A simple fixed directed antenna at one selected direction could be enough at first however if routes are added more sites would be reachable to improve the network thus pre-investments allows a simplified restructuring to new routes. Methods functions and means are included to remotely via a network management tool function re-arrange traffic routes and/or add new routes and/or directions at stations prepared for such potential changes.
The principle idea with this figure is to vision differences between of full transparent unlimited connection between typically 100 or 1000 Mbit/s ports of switch and/routers. This is because the bandwidth limitations often needed to apply when radio spectrum is used because of limitation in bandwidth, variable hop length to cover, cost considerations, adoptions to actual bandwidth requirements and quality optimisation between each pair of WPs to use spectrum efficient etc. Considering some cases and for the sake of simplification a full and transparent bandwidth allocation may be applied if enough frequency spectrums are available. This may be the case for light wave, laser type of communication applied. However, in such case may another modulation channel structure be applied with one and/or fewer carrier (in fact similar to fibre transmission) as problems with delay spread would be of less significance for short hops and narrow beams etc. A pair of WPs connecting stations 10,12; 10,11 ,13,14; etc. are schematically indicating this.
The variable bandwidth allocation and speed control etc. mechanisms is generally shown by the interconnections of station 10, 11 and 12 etc. The dotted lines between pairs of WPs are visualising a maximum total possible bandwidth between the respective stations. Number 4011 at station 10 represent a maximum possible transmitted rate at a specific WP and 3011 represents a maximum receivable received rate (example station 10, 11). The corresponding figures for station 11 is 3010 and 4010. The indication 4001 between station 10 and 11 and 3001 represents the allocated actual transfer rate to and from the respective WPs and 4010 and 3010 represents the transmission direction. The stations 13 and 14. indicated by dotted lines indicate an example of possible new stations. Also note the possible new routing between these two stations would be applicable in parallel to improve capacity between station 10 and 12 and/or allow redundancy, etc. The figure visualises a view of the stations from above. It is also visualised that hop lengths between 10 and 13, 13 and 14, 14 and 12 is shorter than between 10 and 12 directly. I.e. traffic would be passing more station but using much shorter hops. The increased number of stations would allow in increased number of new stations to be connected as typically line of site between WPs are normally envisaged. An increased number of stations that are no-hierarchically connectable would further typically be separated in more variable elevation of the antenna beams which in addition improve the likely interference probability, hide receivers from each other by increased probability of physical obstacles, threes, hoses etc. This enhances the re-use of frequency spectrum probability considerably. The shorter the hops the less electromagnetic power required to maintain the same quality, thus less total occupation of frequency band in space, see also fig 25 explaining the increased transfer performance further. Figure 16, 17, 18 explains some variable types of stations applicable. See figure 7 d for further explanation in regard to communication between stations.
Figure 13
The figure illustrates some few examples of flows of user data trough stations, including separate routing.
The idea in addition is to generally visualise an example where different number of sub-channels /sub-carriers) are arrange for the transfer capacity that is needed for transferring the user information between stations and/or WPs applied.
In the application example are shown methods functions and means included data to be differently routed (A-A, C-C, etc.) even if data originates and/or terminates at both ends inclusive if a common UP/TP are used or not for all traffic.
The dashed lines a, b and c is here generally representing the routes. The bandwidth are represented by 10-12, 10-11 and 11-12 which means to correspond to a number of sub-channels at operating on certain selected modulation levels each. The meaning with the different filled rectangles is to show a possible different modulation levels selected on these sub-channels.
Figure 14 The figure shows data entered at one station from more than one direction (on separate WPs) is combined in a to another station (applicable to one WP).
The image generally visualises an example of how an allocated rates (4002) for transferring information (A) through the air from station 11. to 10. Further an allocated rate (4005) for transferring information (B) through the air from station 12 to 11. !t is also the meaning to generally visualise that the modulation level and/or information rates may be different. This is visualised in different structures on the information blocks of data transferred 11/100/WP/T1 for station 11-10. Respective 12/100/WP/T1 for station 12 - 10. These two flow are combined shown to be transferred into a WP which applies a capacity for the transfer at lesat enough for the summarised data (A+B). This data including A and B is further applied on the a carrier and/or sub-carriers, modulated up-converted to the required electromagnetic high frequency carrier (radio or laser) and transferred via the air. At the corresponding WP it is down-converted and reshaped into appropriate form at the WP of station 13 where it all or partly may be dropped at one or more UP etc.
The transfer rate between the WPs for the station 10 - 13 connection is adjusted to conform to at least the sub of the incoming information from station 11 and 12, A+B. In this case for this flow is station 10 working as a repeater.
Figure 15
The idea with this figure is to visualise a few of many possible where multiple stations are interconnected in a network including redundancy routing to increase transfer and/or and improve security. The example of network topology routing type of stations, external access solutions and/or virtual wireless access and/or number of WPs, UP etc. is only given as one example of possibilities and for demonstration purposes only. Complementary arrangements between radio and laser for increased security and/or transfer capacity is visualised between stations 10 and 11. The example means to visualise that two or more WPs (at 10 and 11 ) can be arranged in parallel, to increase capacity and/or improve redundancy between them. In the example is high bandwidth laser communication, 315, and typically lower bandwidth microwave communication, 300MW visualised between 10 and 11. Both of these WP could of course be either radio or laser of variable capacity. A possible additional routing applicability via a number of stations 10-12-15- 11 is additionally shown.
In addition a number of examples of users applications 1010' including telephony applications and or similar applications requiring seamless transparent transfer of data and data application etc. is shown under a stations (14).
The block 6000 means to generally symbolise an external wireless access system applied to station 10 and/or an internally virtually created wireless access system within W-SENS. The wireless access is demonstrating ability to connect another station 14 via its WP. This is thought at least applicable as it (6000) operates as an internally created virtual access solution (see also figure 20).
Under the external or internal access system is similar types of applications visualised as under stations 14 i.e. 1010' including data and or telephony services.
Thus means for routing the traffic between 10 - 11 could in this example be via station 12 and 15 in addition.
Such arrangement could encourage the use of very high rate licence free laser communication over limited distances as it could be effectively backed with radio transmission solutions and/or routing alternatives.
Methods functions and means includes arrangement of routing alternatives between stations for increase of capacity and/or security by including:
■ Means to set up selectable routing alternatives manually between stations and Ups/TPs etc.
Means to set up routing alternatives automatically (i.e. including routing possibilities by IP type of addressing etc.) between stations Ups/TPs
Means for detecting transfer quality of respective route
Means to use the sum of the transferred user information regardless of the variable routes taken between UPs/TPs applied at the end of each communication line. ■ Means to select any of the use of any routes between Ups/TPs etc. based on quality performance of individual routes
Means to set up quality performance required for various types of data
■ Means to route different type of data including synchronous, seamless synchronous and/or asynchronous selectable routes
As an example user data applied on station 10 at port 100 and at 11 on port 100 could use all or any of the three routes shown. Real time transfers with higher priorities could be routed via shorter hops (manually or automatically routing) and interactive data transfers could use other routes, including as an example automatic selection of routes with available capacity for such transfer.
Figure 16 The idea with this figure is to visualise a block schematic view of one of many possible type of modular station arrangement. In this case is switching functions spliced into separate blocks, like 10/1 , 10/2, 10/N and 10'. In addition normal switching and routing capability is shown to perform in networks outside of each station but closely associated with each other. Exemplified via logical signalling via port 100" between R10'" (an external switch/router function to shown W-SENS applications) and 10' and/or similarly between port 100' 10' and 10/1 ; via port 100N' 10' and 10/N etc. This example is referring to an implementation of a connectionless type of switching i.e. Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and other types of future standards in this segment. However, the basic principles reviewed should be thought of be applicable if ATM switching functions where used at the stations in stead.
Some of the reasons behind arranging the stations spliced is to apply switching capability next to remote typically located roof-top mounting to scattered locations from a common platform 10' as an example in a terminal room etc. Allowing closely location to one or more WPs (and/or radio or laser means) close connected to antenna systems.
The functional description of 10/1 , 10/2 etc. could be described as the description of a station etc. I.e. switching and/or routing for air traffic as well as optional connections of Ups etc. would be applicable as is generally visualised in the figure.
The connections 1001' ....100N' could generally be seen similar to 100, 101 , etc. earlier described general station model as in figure 4 and 5. These ports 1001' etc. could be seen as an ordinary user port of a switching/routing platform connecting the scattered switches/routers 10/1 , 10/2 etc. where signalling between 10/1 , etc, and 10' is applied logically via standard communication. The connection 1001' etc. may be based on fibre and/or copper and/or include wireless (radio and/or laser). Similarly the connections of the respective WPs to 10/1 , 10/2 etc. is applicable to 110, 111 , 112 etc. as earlier described.
The functional unit 10' could be said to represent a connectionless switch/router of a customer and/or it could be representing a switching/routing combing the traffic in the various scattered functional units 10/1 , etc. at a certain nodal point. In addition it include integration of the W- SENS approach with a standard switch/routing platform (exemplified by R10'") which could as an example be a customer platform. The idea behind this is to include traffic to be interchangeable with the use of the features in respective air based and/or wire based. Thus W-SENS being an integrated part in standard switches/routers (10') network allowing traffic to be interchanged via scattered W-SENS. Illustrated by connection of 10' to R10'" and 15' to R12'".
Communicating arrangements though the air is including means to performed in a seamless logically similar way (seen from 10') as when other transmission media would be used, however with the rate and bandwidth adoptions envisaged in this document for wireless communication between WPs.
Thus 10/1 includes means to act as a switch/router between the switch/router.10' and its respective WPs. Thus 10/1 includes means to act as a switch/router for traffic flows between station 12 and 13 through 10/1 via corresponding WPs.
The switching performance of particularly functions 10/1 , 10/2 etc. are equipped for means that include fast switching between WPs in particular. I.e. in order to transfer information that is routed through the network with seamless no or limited extra delay that does not severely effects standard flows of data at least within a reasonable number of repeating steps in an area.
The functional unit 10/1 ,10/2 etc. include means for connecting the respective functional unit 10/1 etc. to user applications (illustrated by port 100 etc.) i.e. also as describer visualised for station 10, 11 etc. in other figures.
Further resembles with earlier possible views of systems implementations. Means are included to 10', 10/1.10/2 etc. for the ability to set-up, supervise and control, schematically shown by 200/1 for a remote switched function and/or 210 at WP or 200' for an integrated solution at 10'. Means are included to perform these operations from any of the ports visualised including at virtually at any station and/or at external network functional unit 200". Means included management functions to be based on Simple Network Management protocols, SNMP, and/or future and/or added enhancements of it.
The functional units R10'", R11'" etc. are considered to external connectionless networks. If ATM switching or combinations where used (in stead of the Ethernet based switching) it could represent such networks.
In addition communications services for circuit PSTN, DTM and/or ATM would be applicable into this figure for transparent transmission etc. as generally described in figure 7d.
Intercommunications between scattered W-SENS is visualised. Which means that users connected under a port in station 17 could be in communication with a user connected at a port of station 11.
Means for network planning, routing, communications set-up, supervision and control of one station function 10/1 , 10', corresponding WP and remote
WPs is manageable via network management functions accessed via any of these functional units.
See also explanations of the figures 17 and 18.
Figure 17a and b
The figures 17 a and b are generally visualising two examples of many other possible building structures of stations in W-SENS approaches. Means including interrelated communication with each other meaning that pair of WPs between of the two can establish and perform as been described in this document. Other types of building structures than shown are of course obtainable.
The figure 17 a) shows one station with a switching functionality, which would be capable of connecting a number of and various types of WPs. It shows how a number of WPs connected via 110-113 is applied to an antenna solution, which contains a multiple beam arrangement into various directions. A few other WPs are shown. I.e. typically one direction per WP connecting stations at different distances.
The figure 17 b shows an example of a spliced arrangement of switching functions of a station consisting of two scattered sub-stations functions 10/1 , 10/2 connected to 10'.
Figure 18
The idea with this figure is to exemplify and further explain possible use of various stations and configurations, how they are interrelated and possible to use integrated with external networks R10'" etc.
In the example is one station 12 solely based on one switching function. Another sub-station 11/1 represents a sub switching functions interrelated with another switch/router, 11'. The port visualised on station 11 represent the ability to connect users and terminate traffic at that port. I.e. means are included at sub-stations for external applications similar to what has been described for station. The square 9000 generally indicate stations and/or sub-stations, which are directly switching and routing the wireless communication traffic within an area. The square 10.000 generally visualise a comprehensive logical network (W-SENS). It could be seen as an approach, which serves a number of users scattered in a specific geographical area including wireless switching services and/or connections to external communications services.
Various types of means for network management set-up, control and supervision of W-SENS and applied external networks are generally visualised available at any of the mentioned locations. This includes as well means to logically access network management functions, databases, etc. via user ports as well. Like 200 at 10/1 or 200' at 10' or 200 at 12 or 200" at 10". Means for set-up, control and supervise is applicable principally at any location.
Figure 19 a and b and c
The idea with figure 19 is to show one example, of many possible solutions of protocol applied for the transfer of digital bits and byte structure on each carrier, sub-carrier etc.
Methods functions and means are included to include: timing position co-ordination between sub-carriers
■ timing positions for changing number of sub-carriers applied
■ modulation level variation without interruption and/or loosing data transferred
■ changes of levels of error corrections (by allowing variable extra transfer capacity to be used)
■ time division multiple operation
■ frequency division multiple operation
■ frequency shift without loosing and/or disturbing data transfer on carrier
■ frequency hopping repeatedly according a scheme without loosing and/or disturbing data transfer
■ timing positions as a basis for time frame structure realisations (i.e. applied for TDMA versions including guard, synchronisation, switch time of antenna directions if dynamic spatial directions would be applied)
A certain case would be to arrange communications between WPs ports synchronously. I.e. synchronous communication is established between ports where a number of sub-carriers are set-up, certain frequencies are selected for transmission, a certain modulation level is set-up. I.e. this result in a transfer of a certain bandwidth and transfer capacity between WP where the proposed protocol structures could be used or ignored. Instead a logical protocol would be applicable which including an overlayered structure on selected sub-carriers.
This would be applicable if a number a sub-carriers where applied permanent or semi permanent without need to shift frequencies under transactions etc. and/or if modulation level where set constant and/or relatively constant. If on the other hand transfer capacity, bandwidth, frequencies, etc. between each pair of WP are fairly often regulated this would be done seamlessly without any degradation (which repeatedly would be applicable at every increment of P1)
The background for the means of applying a protocol of this type is to show communication possibilities of both IP and ATP, signalling and signal processing between any pair of WPs operating under various conditions. A further reason is that it includes means for arranging communications for WPs organised in a P-MP mode. This includes means for arranging various equipment resource-sharing scheme like FDMA or TDMA or CDMA or combinations. Exemplified by FDMA that needs changes in time slots FDMA needs changes of sub-carriers regularly.
If the signalling segments increments visualised between P1 like S1SxC1 , S2SxC1 etc. on channel 1 this certain segments is usable for users data and or signalling, error detection's error corrections etc. i.e. extra capacity used besides the data blocks D1SxC1 , D2SxC1 etc.
However is there is no need for putting any particular information in the arranged time segments visualised (S1 SxC1 etc.) then continuous streams are transferred between pair of WPs on such carriers and any data including signalling, user data etc. can be applied on it.
In such a case on such carriers may other logical protocols for communication solely take care of the required transfer between the WPs.
Data blocks represented by D1SxC1 etc. include adoption to a size (number of bits, bytes etc.) that would correspond to certain number or size of data on standard data packets and ATM cells transferred.
Previous examples have generally shown methods functions and means of arranging transparently transfer capacity where capacity etc. between WPs are repeatedly required by applying a timing order which could be coordinated between the multiple carriers irrespective of modulation levels error corrections selected etc. Considering as an example only multiple possible speed alternations even if when different speeds would be selected between sub-carriers, this should shift a certain time and preferable intervals that repeatedly is occurring. Further considering and examples of needs to shift frequency on sub-carrier (to create a hop in frequency due to a frequency hopping application between WPs or else) this should repeatedly be possible. Data transfer over the air is normally applying error detection/error correction coding such coding is possible to repeatedly apply interleaved on streams of data.
Signalling between WPs are needed even under normal conditions. Using as an example TDMA, guard time, synchronisation of incoming data, timing of the scattered WPs etc. is typically needed the timing segment visualised as S1 SxC1 , S2..etc. is usable. Methods functions and means are applicable to sub-carriers to include:
■ guard timing, applying of synchronisation information on transmitted bursts, detection and synchronisation recovery of received time fragments,
The figure 19 a shows an example of separate sub-carriers each carrying user data and/or signalling. Methods functions and means including of:
■ Separate modulated sub-carriers according to an FDM scheme OFDM channel arrangements with one or several groups sub-carriers (CH 1 , CH 2....CHn) each channels and each group occupying a certain bandwidths
The number of selection of sub-carriers depending of each sub-channels appropriate rate (modulation level) and the sum assigned between the WPs for each particular hop.
An example of structure is shown for data and/or data and/or signalling blocks of data, (example fig 19 a) for CH2, D1SxC2 and D2SxC2 etc.). The structure shown is understood to be consecutively repeatedly structured in time as indicated.
Co-ordination of timing between individual sub-channels is included. An example of arrangements and means of time co-ordination between the subchannels, irrespective of the modulation level, are shown in the figure 19 b). In the example are two channels (CH1 and CH2) shown to be modulated differently, i.e. where CH1 transferring half the number of bits that is transferred on CH2. By including a repeated time interval (P1) and selected this repetition to occur under a certain time where both could correspond to in time and to the signalling time period visualised for the parallel sub- channels (example starting by the S1SxC2 and S1SxC1 etc.). Method functions and means are arranged to achieve an equal or seamless overlapping or equal repeated timing interval P1 which includes coordination between sub-channels as to allow frequency shift, time division etc. irrespective of the modulation level etc. of sub-channels without necessarily loosing data.
Methods functions and means are included to apply timing intervals between the consecutive P1 :s in order to:
■ arrange frame structure
■ arrange time slot structures within frames
■ organise multi-frame time structure as indicated by T01 , T02 TOz,
T01 , which is arranged when this is required. ■ Arrange variable transfer capacities between one WP and more the one corresponding WP i.e. in a P-MP mode
Method functions and means are included to support various communications procedures between ports are: ■ organise data entered into WP from packet switching function in an asynchronous (like Ethernet IP etc.) and/or synchronous (circuit switching, like ATM, including DTM) to be applied to certain transfer capacity between pair of WPs
■ apply data entered to WP for transmission to a corresponding WP according to prioritised schemes
analyse of transfer capacity requirement of data to be transferred between respective WPs
analyse of transfer capacity requirement of real time and/or synchronous and/or seamless synchronous transfers via WPs analyse data entered into WP from a switching function based on data protocols including IP and various modifications updates
■ separate data which has to be prioritised to be transferred over WPs before other data (i.e. exemplified by IP - packet applied with prioritised protocols in order) ■ analyse real time transfer requirement of data which have to be virtually transparently transferred via WPs
■ analyse of transfer requirement of data which is can be asynchronously transferred via WPs allocate transfer capacity between WPs in accordance to fulfil service requirements allocate transfer capacity between actual pair of WPs (organised in point- point mode and/or point-multipoint mode) to meet the communication service requirement between actual UP/sTPs
■ allocate transfer capacity between WPs to at least correspond to the real time or seamless real-time transfer ■ allocate transfer capacity between WPs for data transfer which do not require real time transfer
■ allocate transfer capacity between WPs at least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point-point mode including FDM and/or FDMA and/or TDMA and/or CDMA mode of operation in point-multipoint mode, by assigning one and/or more carriers and/or sub-carriers (sub-channels)
■ allocate transfer capacity between WPs at least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point-point mode including FDM and/or FDMA and/or CDMA by assigning modulation method and demodulation method on carrier and/or sub-carrier
■ apply error detection codes to data transmitted from one WP to another and measure the bit error rate performance
■ adjust transfer capacity and/or balance it with transfer quality performance between WPs per carrier, by applying appropriate froward error correction to data transfer and correct data at the receiving end by the use of selected applied error correction codes
include adjustment of regulation of appropriate received radio transmission level to include a balance to the modulation level used and/or the detected error performance required between WPs by adjusting radio transmitter energy
■ include dual direction signalling via one and/or multiple sub-carriers between WPs in order to adjust communication between respective WPs in accordance to communication service requirement i.e. including transfer capacity, Bit Error Rate and transfer delay performance.
Carriers, sub-carriers etc. are including applicable adjustment capabilities to various multiplexing requirements based on timing protocol (one type of many possible exemplified in figure 19) applied. Transfer of user data, signalling between stations, WPs, etc, including selection of various capacity for signal processing is applicable to be mixed to meet transfer capacity and quality requirements for each pair of WPs.
Mixed signal processing and data include ability to repeatedly transmitted in blocks (like SISxCn, DISxCn, S2SxCn, D2SxCn .... etc. within T01 , T02 etc. I.e. where a number of blocks could correspond to the number of bits transmitted between each time specified as P1.
If as an example of size of blocks one so-called data block (DISxCn) consists of 64 bytes (DB64) and if a so-called signalling block (SISxCn) consisting of 4 bytes, (DB16). If data transfer where structured like this such signalling block represents about 5-6 % of each sub-channels transmission speed capacity.
Method functions and means include combining number of and types of data blocks applied on carriers, sub-carriers for:
transfer of data in blocks corresponding to rapid and effective transfer of user data blocks including short IP packet's from 64 bytes size ■ transfer of ATM cells of 53 bytes including additional error protection coding up to at least 64 bytes
■ transfer of signalling information and or users data in data and/or signalling blocks ■ use of a time segment of a certain numbered of interleaved signalling data blocks is applicable to correspond to a common timing P1 for sub- carriers applied possible
■ combination of blocks and/or signalling blocks for user data transfer capacity, signalling capacity, signalling processing capacity - error detection, error correction
Various modulation levels are applicable.
This is illustrated with an example. Considering that a modulation method like 16 QAM were used it and it transfer 4 data and 4 signal blocks (4 x DB64 + 4 x DB16) between any consecutive time increments, P1 , example T01 ,T02). If the capacity of a sub-channel was such that two frames T01 , T02 where representing 8 data blocks each representing 64 bytes these two time segments represents totally 64 x 8 data bytes and the 4 x 8 signalling bytes. The signalling bytes represents totally 5-6 % and it could include the use for error correction. If the error detection and error correction requires more capacity, a selected part and/or number of such data block of 64 bytes could be used in addition per frame (T01) and/or multi-frame (T01 , T02 ....etc.) arrangements. I.e. if one of the 8 data blocks where used an additional 12 % is added to the 5 to 6 % for the signalling processing. Other combinations are of course applicable by selecting other number of segments.
In the mentioned example above are 16 QAM modulation considered. If QPSK modulation where used, half of the numbers of bytes could be transferred in each time segment, but it may require less bandwidth for correction of data transferred. I.e. such examples of variations of modulation levels are schematically demonstrated in figure 19 b, but with maintained consecutive time increments of P1. CH1 could represent a transfer rate based on QPSK and CH2 could represent a speed of 16 QAM modulation etc. The type of modulation demonstrated, timing and sizes of data respective signalling blocks, transfer rate on carrier etc. where only meant to show principles and examples for demonstration purpose only it could of course be different in implementations etc.
Methods functions and means including application of signalling and or signal processing data etc. on separate sub-channels from sub-channels carrying typically user data is applicable in addition to include it on same sub-carriers as previously described.
Method functions and means including: ■ OFDM used and apply data and signal processing in accordance to previous description
Applying data signalling error detection and/error corrections to evolving ETSI Hiperlan standards presently based on a group 64 of sub-channels operable within less than 20 MHz of total frequency bandwidth
Applying groups of modem functions where each modem including an occupying about 20 MHz and/or different bandwidth and/or 64 subchannels in each group
■ including variable modulation levels on the sub-channels and/or groups of sub-channels
Methods functions and means includes applicability to vary the multiples of groups of OFDM modulated sub-carriers functions to operate in parallel operation, i.e. to select an appropriate number of groups at an selected appropriate modulation level to achieve a selected transfer rate between pairs of WPs is applicable.
If one group of sub-carriers of a modem set could deliver up to about 50 Mbit/s per 20 MHz, based on a 64 QAM modulation scheme per subchannel, four such groups of modems could deliver up 200 Mbit/s. I.e. within less than 80 MHz and eight groups could deliver 400 Mbit/s on 160 MHz bandwidth.
The actual communication between WPs including the station functions is applicable to meet existing and/or evolving co-existing and/or interoperability standards in the wireless area is included. Both as WP are used as multiple transmission means between stations and/or when WPs and station functionality's are integrated with software functions so as to virtually create emulation of stations in wireless access systems to reside on stations in W- SENS.
Thus, variable possible air interfaces is applicable to be included derivable from the optional means of the basic arrangements of transfer of user data, signalling and coding in sub-channels . I.e. virtually are one or more systems for fixed point to point wireless communication, point-multipoint system and/or multipoint arrangements applicable for fixed and/or mobile wireless solutions including TDMA and/or FDMA and/or CDMA and/or W- CDMA applicable, including a spatial SDMA approach should it be needed. In addition variable kind of proprietary air protocols is applicable to be included in parallel at any station.
Figure 20
Is visualising a realisation of various virtual station functionality's in addition to the W-SENS stations described by adding certain WPs which virtually are able to create such station functionality's in combination with station other functionality. I.e. to reside in parallel to other stations and/or WP functions described for point-point and/or point - multipoint mode transmission capability) in this document. Physical and logical realisation of virtual station including adaptation to various wirelesses accesses standards. Methods functions and means includes the possibilities to use methods functions and means described in this document and in addition add specific WPs for the appropriate standard and appropriate software configuration which include to reside on processing functional unit (566/1 (or alike).
The figure illustrates stations 10, 11 , 12 and 17, 18 as stations considered equipped with WPs (sub-WPs) arrange for transparent synchronous point- point communications arrangements between stations and/or similar arranged for point-multipoint arrangements. In addition is visualised a realisation of a Virtual Wireless Access (VWA) system connected at stations 12 as a central (or base) VWA12. The central station connect a number of station 13, 15, 14 in point - multipoint mode. These stations are able to virtually acting as as terminals (VWA 14, VWA 15) in addition station VWA13 is additionally designed to work as a repeater (with add/drop capability of user traffic shown by VW100 1010), for the terminal VWA 16.
The station VWA13 is applicable to operate as a central by WP 551 , which communicated with VWA16 and other stations typically below the line of sight to allow access towards VWA12. I.e. VWA station which either operate as central, terminal and repeater, i.e. similar to a wireless access is applicable by the use of the methods functions and means basically explained for the W-SENS. Should such functions be required it would be applicable by assigning appropriate functioning WPs for such functions virtually in any number at any station. In addition a WP organised to operate as central exemplified at station 12 would include connection to the switching function visualised as 2BS i.e. utilising the actual stations switching functionality it is operating on and/or any of the W-SENS stations. In addition it is included possible connection to external switching/routing functions schematically illustrated by 1000. In order to fully make it possible to utilise an available investment in transmission equipment efficiently a WPs include both the ability to work as a central station and an underlying station in P-MP modes. I.e. an investment in a WP including transmitter and receiving equipment which is operating under a central WP together with a number of other WPs. This means that its capacity may not be fully utilise towards the central and as such if it should be able to use the remaining transmit and receive capacity with other WPs considerable a cost savings could be applicable with an enhanced switching and/or routing capability. In addition a WP which could be considered as underlying to more than one central WP is possible to utilise for improved redundancy and more efficient use of investment etc.
Method functions and means are included for WPs organised to operate in P-MP mode in order to connect stations and switching functions in such a way as:
■ A WP working as central for other WPs, sharing its capacity with a number of "underlying" WPs, such underlying WPs include functions and means being able to commonly share its capacity with the central (VWA12, 551Λ/W2)
A WP, which is sharing its capacity with other stations (example 551 towards VWA 12), working as an underlying WP to VW12 include functions and means to share its transmission recourse capacity with other stations (example VW21) as a central A WP which is working as an underlying station towards a central includes ability to work as an underlying to other central WPs
Figure 21 The W-SENS type of network is a new network approach, however the possible use of various communications ports (WPs) (in fact in parallel on the same station) makes it possible to apply WPs to meet various wireless communications protocols should this be required.
This would be the case for simple co-existence standards often used for fixed wireless and eventual interoperability standards (fixed and/or mobile) to allow interconnection of various manufactures terminals to one manufactures base station.
Methods functions and means are included to: connect a WP to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufactures base station connect appropriate WPs to stations and realise stations to operate as if they where stations in a wireless access system coping with appropriate standards for these and/or such stations interaction with other switching and/or routing systems
The dotted lines 511 , 512 are schematically meaning to show that various air interface protocols may be applied and operate in accordance to any wireless communication standard and/or proprietary standard.
Figure 22
The idea with figure 22 is to demonstrate and exemplify effects by using the method (W-SENS) and appropriate parts of sub-methods, implemented into some exemplified system variations in this patent application. It is visualised how very high capacity switching/routing functions at stations could support to perform possible alternative transparent flow of data between stations via WPs. Each assigned WP to a station includes a transfer capacity and a selection of possible transfer capacity, which is typically much less than the total switching function capacity at the same station.
In order to simplify the presentation of W-SENS are the strengths with the method exemplified by the use of a fairly simple type of station fig. 22 a. It is equally structured, limited to four station connections in various directions where WPs are arranged for point-point communication. Station is in this example is limited to being able to connect four other stations and directions to simplify the explanations.
The figure is showing an idealised and/or theoretical structure in form of a star network topology applied for each station.
Figure 22 a is indicating a general model saying that if every "layer-level" of stations can connect another "layer" of station. The higher the levels of stations connected the higher the sum of the possible numbers of stations that can potentially co-operatively transfer information for users in the area. In the table below the figure 22 a) this is further explained.
This use of the method and selected sub-methods is shown that even with a possibility to connect a limited number of stations (in the example here 4) a tremendous high number of stations can be interrelated to each other. Methods functions and means are included to switching/routing traffic rapidly through stations that results in transfer delays for users that in practice would be possible to neglect per switching stage including a reasonable number of such stages.
As an example switching delay assumed to be less than about one and/or a few microseconds per station would allow a seamless transparent flow in principle neglecting the numbers of stations in any local and/or regional area. As such one microsecond is referred to about 300 m of propagation delay through the air, i.e. this and even delays which would be much higher is possible to neglect. In practical communications system implementation figures of higher 10, 20, 30 or more would still be possible to ignore.
Methods functions and means to support the expansion of networks and switching/routing options with every new station added into new is included by: visioning and/or managing switching/routing selections via network management tools (see also fig 28),
arrange alternative switching and/or routing based on the network topology in an area to achieve appropriate communications services in terms of transfer capacity and/or quality and connectivity availability An increased number of stations would with such means included, make it possible to generally shorten hop lengths between stations, thus including possible reduce radio transmission power and/or adopt to alternative modulation level etc. as the hop lengths is getting shorter.
This in turn improve the frequency re-use capability of frequency spectrum (which means that the more stations applied the more stations can be added and the higher the potential capacity is getting). Means to improve possibilities to increase transfer capacity between pair of WPs are applicable when hops are shortened.
An example of this effect is that a maintained transmission power level and a reduction of the hop lengths to half the distance results in a gain of 6 dB over noise. As an example the difference between a carrier to noise figure of QPSK and a modulation level like 16 QAM is that double transfer capacity of 16QAM leads to a required increase of signal over noise about 6-7 dB. I.e. the increased signalling level is applicable to be used to increase transfer rate. By changing the modulation level from QPSK to 16 QAM a doubling of the transfer rate would in principle be applicable at about maintained quality (however, not taken into account any eventual added overhead that are added for signal processing).
The results of the "automatic" potentially shortening of the radio (or laser) hop length reduces fading margin requirement further significantly for wireless communication specifically in humid climates. Thus the methods functions and means for balance required quality, modulation level, signal processing etc. included to optimise W-SENS solution described in this document in areas is improving with a growing number of stations and in fact users. This leads to a self-generating positive effect on capacity and quality in a given area and on a given frequency spectrum the more users that are possible to serve.
Transfer rates at specific selected sites and/or improve of frequency re-use are improved in a selected part of an area.
The general possible reduction of hop lengths that could lead to increasing number of stations in an area would further make it possible to lower the price on radio heads as less and less power would be required to transmitted to maintain capacity. In addition higher an higher radio frequencies would be applicable (including laser). In a situation like a city network or a campus network etc. with many users station in a limited area are an increase number of station density leading to an increased ability to use laser communication which opens up huge frequency spectrum resources which does not require and licence. Gradually as a W-SENS network is getting increased with a number of stations means for improve the possible transfer rate, the capacity and maintain or improve quality applies.
Figure 22 b shows an example of a scenario of an expanded network over time to illustrate the effects of implementations of a W-SENS approach.
The figure shows how network and stations interrelation is changed as new stations are added. It is also the meaning to visualise how routing alternatives are increased the more stations available.
The dotted lines are visualising established hops being potentially possible to gradually disconnect as visualised by 300x and 300y. At initially stages may long hops (between station 10 and 11 hop 300 etc.) normally be required. This could as an example require WPs to be equipped mainly for radio transmission in appropriate frequency bands as generally indicated by 300 between stations 10, 11 etc.
As a network is getting denser laser WPs, and/or very high frequency radios and/or very low power radio heads (highly integrated and low cost) would be applicable. This is generally visualised by, 10x etc., meaning the ability to applying an increasing amount of stations that are of different type then originally required for a W-SENS network approach. I.e. the degree of such stations is expanding in relation to those initially applied the denser the network is getting and the lower the cost for each new station. In dense structures is the ability to connect even more users via the wireless W-SENS network increasing as the probability to connect more stations is increasing with every new station superseding obstacles, hoses threes etc. The network structure leads in fact to more advantages the more stations which in fact actual would drive the network to expand into as many possible applications as possible i.e. ability to connect end users into homes, apartments, offices, indoor, outdoor etc.
This could further increase the demand for an increasing number of use of WPs arranged for P-MP transfer applicable as the full transfer capacity P-P WPs capability may not be needed the closer to the user a W-SENS network is getting.
I.e. the more the requirement the more powerful are the W-SENS network getting.
The figure 22 b is describing a scenario with a growing number of stations along the time.
At time 1 visualised may be to connect some few users wirelessly at fairly distant away from a network node point connected to a fibre backbone passing a city, sub-urban region etc. The scenario at time 2 is meaning to visualise how a considerable number of stations have been connected. It is visualised that the hop length is relatively shorted than originally in addition many more potential places occur where traffic could be dropped and/or inserted to an existing fibre backbone which could offload traffic trough the air if required in order to improve the spectrum efficiency further.
The scenario at time 3 meaning to show an even denser station structures where many more users are connected. As the network increases into density are also the use of new stations for low power radiation, high frequency (including laser) applicable.
Methods functions and means are included to connect stations equipped with WPs requiring less and less radiated power the denser the stations are located.
Methods functions and means are included to
■ use short range high transfer speed communications devices WPs applied on stations expand network area coverage gradually in size by using short range WPs by applying fast switching/routing capabilities
■ combine use of WPs including long hop capabilities for rapid large W- SENS network area coverage's and the use of gradual expansion of W- SENS network realisations of area coverage and/or capacity
Figure 23
The idea with this figure is to show an additional routing alternative complementary to figure 15. The combination of using laser and radio carriers for the various WPs in order to combine radio and license free high bandwidth spectrum based on very narrow beams of light wave or near the frequency of light waves.
Multiple WPs are visualised applicable for connecting stations to each other to increase transfer capacity and/or improve the security and/or connection transfer capacity and bandwidth availability. These WPs may be based on radio and/or light-wave frequencies or around these typically used for laser.
Communication directly between station 10 and 11 is shown to applying one pair of WPs based on radio and the other on laser. It could as an example also be a number of pairs of WPs using the same radio band (but different frequency it not appropriate spread spectrum technologies where applied, i.e. frequency hopping and/or channel coding) or using totally different frequency bands between the WPs. Method functions means includes: application of more than one WP at stations to arrange communication with a corresponding set of WPs at another station
arrange traffic information transfer between any selected UPs and/or TPs etc. to be transferred via more than one WP
One of the reason for this is to make it possible to use both high bandwidth high transfer rate communication at least on one pair of ports and to use at least one pair of lower speed WPs working in parallel and/or taking and further possible route. I.e. ports 1000 of stations 10 and 11 could communicate via the paralleled arranged WPs (beams 320, 315) or via the other route via station 13 (321 ,316; 323,317). As previously been described method functions and means to utilise alternative traffic routes in parallel independent of the various distances is included. In addition any of the possible pair of WP connections between stations could be deleted and WPs which could offer properly transferred quality could be selected as an example if quality degrades etc. I.e. utilising very high frequency radio bands and/or laser etc. which could offer very high bandwidth and transfer capacity under normal conditions under long periods is applicable. These is applicable to be combined with WPs operating on lower radio frequencies typically on less bandwidth available thus offering lower transfer rates but with much higher probability of availability to secure the communication. Methods functions and means includes selection of both bandwidth (i.e. number of sub-channels) modulation level on carriers, transmission power level adjustments etc. are in addition applicable to maintain availability when the (air) environment course degradation.
Sensitivity to transfer quality degradation effected by air environment increases with longer hops and higher frequencies. As an example only a few km could be considered to deliver appropriate quality (i.e. in the range of about 99.99%) when radio frequencies utilised in the range of 30-50 GHz, specifically in wet, worm and humid climates for high speed broad bandwidth digital transmission using reasonable transmission power level. Using laser the full availability (exemplified by 99.99 % etc.) may only be applicable for hops less than a few 100 meters. However, laser may offer a perfect quality during 80-90% of a long time period over longer hops (few km etc.) which may be utilised offering a licence free high bandwidth solution under long periods.
Methods functions and means for pair of WP in communication includes:
supervising of transfer quality,
variation capability of bandwidth
variation capability to select modulation level, regulate the strengths of the error correction (based on quality performance measured in accordance to specified quality requirement) regulate power connect or disconnect respective WPs in accordance is applied control polarisation of antennas apply cross polarised and/or single polarised transfer
Methods functions and means are included for WPs to: be arranged full port transparent communication capacity between stations at least based on connectionless switching functions include ability to be arranged for capacity transparency in correspondence to standard port (UP/TP) based on standard rates used on Ethernet standards use of WPs including transparent 10 Mbit/s and/or semi-duplex and or dupiex 100 Mbit/s and/or duplex 1000 Mbit/s transparency assignment of transfer capacity between ports including assignment of capacity permanently to the corresponding bit rate of any of the standard ports transparency. assignment of transfer capacity between ports includes assignment of capacity to the rate of any of the standard ports rates under periods when each selective pair of WP have to be used for transfer
■ methods functions and means are included to assign and/or disconnect up to the full capacity of any standard port used between WPs ■ include available means to set-up transfer capacity in forms of bandwidth, carriers for seamless directly (to avoid set up delay less of data etc.)
including means to maintain signalling capacity between ports which virtually is not allocated
including means to shift assignment of transparent capacity via WPs between standard rates i.e. between 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000
Mbit/s
■ include available means to estimate the time which the full transparent capacity shall be allocated
As an example, in the case of using high frequency units with narrow beams large available bandwidths applications using laser could be arranged for full bandwidth and/or a fixed transparent communication capacity between WPs and arranged where seamless transparent port - port communication between switching functions would be applicable. Even without any specific bandwidth allocation intelligence etc. necessarily needed which simplifies such WPs.
Figure 24 The idea with this figure is to demonstrate a possible scenario of many possible to occur in reality. The W-SENS is at multiple selected stations showed applied via 1000 to another backbone network 1055, here supposed to be a fibre-based solution. Thus this would include possibilities to route traffic and terminate at redundant locations, including offload of the air by terminate traffic at nearest backbone (fibre, etc.) as it may be applicable. Fibre backbone ring solutions include often ability to access traffic from either side of the ring at add/drop locations to improve availability. TP arrangements at W-SENS stations include means to add/drop traffic between fibre and W-SENS ports in order to route traffic to either fibre ring direction.
Methods functions and means is included to:
handle alternative redundant routing capability on fibre rings at the connections point between W-SENS stations and fibre backbones
traffic drop/insert at W-SENS ports 100, 100' ....etc. to fibre ring based on standard communications protocols like relevant IP standards, SDH, SONET, ATM, DTM standards. Etc. including ability to allocate connection to the appropriate available route traffic drop/insert of multiples of stations (W-SENS) forming network that transferring information between each other station and UP/TP is including ability to selectively terminate air traffic at selected stations where deemed appropriate to improve security and/or offload use of frequency spectrum and/or other reasons
Alternative selection of termination point is schematically shown for an implemented W-SENS approach. This is visualised by station 12 which traffic could be wholly or partly routed via station 21 and/or terminated at station 20 as station 12 and 21 is shown to schematically able to establish communication if required via the dotted line 307/316, indicating laser and/or radio transfer.
An external switching/routing solution to the W-SENS is visualised by 12"', another is 1001. In the example given are these connected to a fibre backbone, 1055. It is anticipated that multiple users in the envisaged W- SENS implementation shown could support multiple connections transparently between the said external switching/routers and the respective application located under selected stations and user ports. Such traffic is meant to be possible in parallel to other types of connections for example to internally in W-SENS switch traffic between stations and ports.
Figure 25 a
The idea with this figure is to demonstrate the multiple inherent built in capabilities in highly dense station environment in W-SENS approaches. The "A" in upper left hand is visualising radio communication between two stations, 1 la and 12a. Only one antenna beam direction 320A is shown as mentioned earlier in the document (to simplify drawings). A corresponding figure at the top right hand side is visualising a certain transfer capacity, 11 - 12C, applied at a selected bandwidth modulation level and transfer rate at a certain transmission quality,.
Each station 11a and 12b have the possibility to be expanded to more stations, directions, improving the transfer capacity in total through such station, i.e. by assigning WPs and establish new communications routes to other stations. This is generally visualised by the dotted lines 11ax, 12, ax.
The figure left below "a" represents a station 13a to be applied between the previously mentions stations 11a, 12a. To simplify explanation the new station is assumed placed in the middle between the two originals. Now the radio transmission power can be decreased about 6 dB with maintained quality and modulation level for the hops, 320a, 320b. In fact it could also result in better transfer quality performance between 11 a and 12a than was possible over one hop with double hop lengths because the probability of availability of a hop length reduced by half is normally increasing the availability factor more than half. In fact are in principal are the availability factor for distances, d, dependency for radio transmission solutions influenced by a factor considered in the range d1 A Thus the unavailability factor for a hop is strongly dependent on the hop lengths and is increasing with wet climates, flatness etc.
The exemplified increased ratio between signal to noise carrier and the increased availability factor would be possible to utilise in order to increase transfer capacity between respective WPs. This is possible by changing the modulation level. I.e. as an example if QPSK modulation where used at first 16 QAM modulation on carriers, sub-carriers would double the transfer rate between stations.
This would be the case when the same radio transmitter power level and antennas for the short as for the long hop are used. Up to about a doubling of the original transfer rate would be feasible at about a similar quality and in the examples shown. However, the actual increased transfer capacity would be depending in addition on the many variable different modulation methods that is selected between, applied capacity for forward error correction which may vary for different modulation methods, frequency bands, climate zones and geographical topography at each location.
The hop length has generally a considerable strong influence on the overall quality performance for wireless communication in comparison to other factors. Reducing it generally would improve significantly improve the use of wireless even and specifically for electromagnetic frequencies above the radio bands.
In addition the shorter the hops the more possible variations in elevations are and the more likely shadows by obstacles are occurring which would increase the quality from interference further. I.e. the more station the better probability for delivering very high transfer capacity.
Shown for case "a", the selection between the modulation methods discussed is visualised to potentially about double transfer rate, which is generally indicated by the figure to the right. Between stations 12a and 13a is the capacity shown to be 11 -12C1
(comparable to 11 -12C for case "A") and added equal capacity 11 -12C2.
Between stations 12a and 13a is equally the capacity 13-12C1 (comparable to 11-12C) and 1 -12C2 showing a doubled transfer capacity.
Figure 25 b
This figure is generally visualising that the occupied spectrum per hop would be significantly decreased by the use of reduced hop length if the same transfer quality and transfer capacity were concerned .for the new shorter hops.
The rectangles represents the average spectrum area occupation (on way) and the dotted lines (triangle) is schematically visualising radiation occupation of a main lobe of a directed antenna.
Figure 25 c
This figure is illustrating a possible further improvement of transfer capacity on a limited frequency bandwidth. It illustrates the use of relatively increase of variations of elevations and possible increased hiding of stations (via an increased number of obstacles the shorter the hops and the closer to the user) in a W-SENS network.
In fact if the beams 320A, 320a-c, 13b-a is separated from each other with enough antenna isolation, conventional modulation methods (i.e. not spread spectrum coded) would be applicable occupying overlapping frequency spectrum. Thus, the aggregated capacity transfer between station 11a and 12a would be possible, not only as two alternate routes, but also to increase the transfer capacity between ports at station 11a and 12a. In addition as shown in fig 25 a) the transfer rate between 11a-13b and 13b 12a could be increased thus the new route via the shorter hops could offer a higher transfer capacity than the corresponding between 11 a - 12a on a given frequency spectrum.
Figure 26 The figure above shows stations which are based on connectionless switching functions (packet structures, IP protocol based etc.) and stations based on circuit oriented switching functions based on ATM switching. One example of methods functions and means arranged for possible integration between the two types is exemplified.
Generally are WPs (normally 550) shown as a separated in a transmit section 554 and a receive section 553, indicating a transparent flow of data at a selected bandwidth and transfer capacity in either direction of a WP. Stations are shown equipped with WPs used for transfer of data packets like IP etc. for synchronous, seamless synchronous, and/or asynchronous transfers. In addition WPs adopted for point-point and/or point-multipoint transferring ATM cells between stations based on ATM switching functions applicable for transfer of data based on synchronous, seamless synchronous and or asynchronous port standards.
In the case of using ATM switching and applying Ethernet ports for transfer at least WPs includes methods functions and means to:
■ analyse data applied on ATM cells which have to be transferred at least conversion UP/TP connecting to ATM switch function include ability to convert Ethernet packets into cells
■ data on ATM cells entering into a WP for transfer to a corresponding WP is detectable in terms of addressing and/or in terms of transfer priority
■ transfer data between WPs which is higher prioritised before mechanism to detect transfer rate requirements at WPs
mechanism to assign transfer capacity
■ mechanism to apply ATM cells on allocated carrier and/or carriers for tensfer to corresponding WP
For connectionless type of switching assigned WP capacity is shown as 5541 respective 5531 and for ATM as 554A and 553A. The use of the same figure of the flows between the WPs does not mean that it is or has to be the same frequency, bandwidth, capacity etc.
The possible selectable transfer rate between in any transmit or receive direction of the WPs are visualised by 4003 and 3003.
Station 10 shows a possible adaptive interconnectivity point between stations based on packet switching and/or ATM switching by the use of a specific WP adopted for communication with a stations (19) based on ATM switching functions. Further are shown capabilities of assigning Ethernet, ATM or/and standard interfaces used in the telecommunication, and/or media distribution environment, J-PEG etc.
Figure 27 a, b, c, d,
The idea with these figures is to demonstrate method functions and means of antenna arrangements for stations, WPs and/or sub-WPs. What is said here about antennas include not only radio but also corresponding optical means for transmit and/or receive laser or light-wave communication in one and/multiple directions.
Figure 27 a
The figure 27a is exemplifying a station, 10/10/1 etc. equipped with a number of WPs (550') each connected to a transmitter/receiver and via a filter to an antenna system 581 *. It is visualised:
a number of main lobes are possible to locate in parallel in wanted directions for each of the WPs and/or sub-WPs
■ any WP may select directions which may overlap in area and time with another parallel WP thus requiring either separation in frequency and/or time segments if applied
Alternatively are these lobes controllable in specific selected direction in selected time fragment if time division would be applied.
Via the generally visualised antenna system is shown to offer solutions in the geographical area schematically indicated to 331. I.e. the possible area, which could be served and the appropriate transmission power regulation to each hop etc. is shown applied by the variable antenna lobe sizes indicated. I.e. station 11 is further away than station 17.
It is estimated that lobes which point to an overlapping direction is separated in either frequency and/or coding for continuous streams of data between stations or in time for burst communication not to interfere. In figure 29 is also shown complementary information (to this figure description) about possible means of arranging communication.
Some of many possible antenna system solutions would be to use a set of antennas using common reflectors with applicable distribution and/or switching arrangements. Alternatively phased array antennas supporting the possible use of multiple antenna beams each beam being applicable to use for one WP and/or sub-WP, each beam controllable in direction.
Figure 27 b Shows a similar situation as the previous antenna system. In this case however it is considered that each WP is to be connected to an antenna lobe that each works in its specific direction. The antenna system would be arranged by selected directed antennas, either single fixed antenna, parabolic, horns etc. Alternatively is the use of a common reflector for multiple horns considered. By using multiple WPs the required area coverage or direction is selected.
Thus is this case is direction controlled by the digital switching traffic between the WP and the other ports. The possible area cover is visualised to 332.
Figure 27 c
Shows a general example of methods functions and means for sharing either radio and/or inclusive or modem and communicate in various directions including spatial arrangement either by shifting directions in time or to selectively handle multiple directions in parallel. The area coverage is generally shown to be 333.
Time-sharing as equipment resource sharing principle is applicable. A radio head, 568/569, is shown to be shared via the functional unit RSW. It include capability to arrange at least a an antenna lobe in a wanted direction in selected time by switching between antenna lobe directions in time which means to use one radio to be switched in multiple directions to communicate with other WPs in P-MP mode.
Time sharing by the use of switching an WP including modem with other WPs required switching on intermediate level, ISW. I.e. the intermediate switch is selecting a radio head per direction and time.
Using spatial communication but with continuous flows of data transfer between WPs the switching capability mentioned above is applicable principally by replacing the switching arrangements with an appropriate power distribution arrangement.
The indication PDS means here a power distribution functional unit on radio frequency band and IDS means a similar power distribution arrangement on intermediate frequency bands. Methods functions and means to communicate in various directions includes intermediate frequencies distribution and/or switching. It would include the use of practical and low cost implementations. I.e. distribution and/or switching is applied on:
a limited frequency band a fairly low frequency band (to a limited cost) allow for a flexible and often practical suitable separation
low transmission losses between WP and modems on one hand and radio heads and antennas
flexible low cost intermediate cabling ■ application of multiple low power radios directly integrated to antenna feeder - reduces unnecessarily power dissipation on radio frequency level
Figure 27 d
The idea here is to generally visualise an additional example of methods functions and means possible to include. A WP at a modem 552/567/FB operating in parallel in a number of radio-heads, 568/569, in selected directions by antenna system 581b. The communication resources are applicable to be spliced into multiple virtual Sub-WPs. The area coverage is shown to be 334.
Also note that an additional arrangement visualised in figure 6 is applicable. The creation of a number of sub-WP 550/1 could be seen as a virtual WP but work typically with less capacity. A total capacity is this case spliced exemplified by FB4, FB8 etc.
Figure 28
Methods functions means included is to: set-up basics at installation time, ■ bandwidth transfer capacity between WPs, capacity allocation principles, re-configure, define routing alternatives, set quality performance, supervising, WP performance, transfer quality performance between UPs/TPs etc. etc. etc. detect transfer capacity used by individual users apply billing solutions
I.e. this have been schematically been described here is basically included reachable and controllable via network management functions. This figure is generally showing an example of one of many possible visions of an implemented system via a network management system arrangement. In the example given may include information about stations that are connected with each other via WPs, frequencies are occupied, transfer rate - bandwidth allocation per pair of WPs, quality performance, power regulation, routing, redundancy etc.
In principal are means for set-up arrangements, supervision and control is controllable from various ports, including via UPs/TPs of any station.
Figure 29 a b c d The figure shows complementary means for sharing arranging a WP and variable modem capability, by part capacity, FB, or up to full modem capability FBx, in various directions.
Figure 29 a) shows a time division splice via an intermediate frequency switch ISW (for TDMA or TDMA/SDMA or TDM/TDMA).
Figure 29 b) shows an example of spatial arrangement where the power of one modem, FB, is distributed to multiple antennas pointing in required selected direction as a seamless FDMA/SDMA alike application per WP or multiple virtual WPs if the modem is spliced into more then one FB.
Figure 29 c and d shows a similar situation where the resource is shared or combined in a similar way but this time on a radio frequency level.
Figure 29 e is finally visualising a general model of possible means for a W- SENS based station which contains directional control digitally, performed via 10/10710/1 etc. between the WPs. Means for internal direction control of WP communicating with more than one WP at various locations via intermediate frequency and/or radio frequency using frequency or time division and/ or frequency division. Means for such equipment resource sharing methodology is being established for communications connections between multiple switches. This communications arrangements includes in addition similar set-up, control and supervisory arrangement as have been described for WPs arranged in pairs mainly.
One example of a WP which radio transmission functional parts is shared is visualised by one 551 z, corresponding to 29 c. Another alternative would be to use any other alternative of means mentioned or to combine the different WPs mentioned in 29 a - d, inclusive figure 6.
Figure 30
The idea with this figure is to visualise methods functions and means in WPs and a pair of WPs under communication is therefore schematically visualised.
A WP contains at least a port for connections to and from another switch/router function and/or other network and/or ports to the air connected for communication to and from another WP at another station, T300 represents the Wireless Port Air Transmit, WPAT. At the corresponding WP i.e. the receive side R 300 is called WPAR. Similar acronyms are used for the opposite direction, xxxxxxxx
Methods functions and means includes WPs to set communicate with another WP via processing functional unit 566/1 to:
■ controlling possible selection of transmission rate by assigning subchannels and/or transfer rate per sub-channel, supervise quality performance of information transfer over the air. perform remote control and supervise of appropriate speed selection based on transfer requirement between each pair of ports, transfer quality supervision and control analyse priority of assigned data to be transferred control selection of air interfaces control communications and transfer assignments with a corresponding functional unit on a corresponding station and WP supervise traffic performance supervise transfer quality between WP ■ control error correction/modulation level create multiple virtual station function of an access station
Method functions and means for virtual emulation of required functions of 566/1 at different location is included if such processing unit is physically applied at an WP, sub-WP or not. Thus making it possible for one functional processing unit to control more than one WP at the same station and/or for one stations functional unit 566/1 to virtually act for another stations selected WPs as its own functional unit. In addition create other multiple logical stations functions and air protocols together with appropriate means on WPs sub-WPs etc.
The functional processing unit 566/1 is included with means for supervision and/or control, which is physically shown accessible via port 210, 210' and/or virtually via any other network management port 200, 200' and/or another station and/or virtually via user ports.
In the cases user ports are access network management functionality's of W-SENS stations, WPs, UPs,TPs etc. at least selected data is accessible dependent on authority. Methods functions and means on network management applied for W-SENS include:
■ authorisation, based on passwords
■ selection on individual authorisation
selection of groups authorisation
■ selection of functions level authorisation
At least in the case of using connectionless communication and switching means for handling communication between paired WPs and 566/1 and their communication with respective switch side is including: IP addressing of logical units in W-SENS ■ Fast switching/routing at least for data WP switched data transfer
■ MAC level based addressing/switching
lPv 4, and/or IP v 6 signalling applicable and other versions like rsip, nat etc.
Figure 31 a b c
These figures are visualising methods functions and means of various station arrangements. Some examples of modular expansion capability, capacity expansion, gradual increase number or WPs, ports, functionalities are basically shown in the figures.
Equipping a station include application of at least a switching functional unit of a station, at least a processing functional unit, at least one applied WP, at least one UP and/or TP if traffic has to be dropped or inserted and/or managed. Here it is called 10/10,0/10/1.
Such structure is applicable to allow for simple installations with gradual expansion capabilities in capacity, ports, functionality and new WPs (sub- WPs) for new directions etc.
It contains at least a possible connection of a WP, at least one port for termination to either 10/10/1 or 10' or 10" further means for gradual expansion of more directions by arranging new WPs via connection of a functional unit called 10,1. Thus multiple functional units may be principally identical structured to
10/10,0, 10/1 which allow a basic station unit it self to be further expanded into more directions, capacity etc.
Methods functions and means for arranging functional unit similar to 10/10/1 which in its turn could assign a group of functional units like 10/10,0/10/1 is applicable as an example when many directions and/or station have to be possible to assign from a location.
Thus such station is designed for being able to transfer higher capacity in many more directions via one and/or an number of WPs WPs which could be connected to each basic station units 10/10,0/10/1.
As an example of many other possible implementations strategies and building structures are shown. An initial implementation could be done by a) (10/10,0/10/1) which is possible to expand to b) (10,1) an another basic unit -with or without switching functionality and/or processing functional unit. This can be further being expanded gradually into more units. If it needed or foreseen from beginning that more directions have to be covered this arranged as an example by A1 complemented by A2, A3, A4 etc. Thus 10,0 and 10,1 is in this case considered to being prepared for fewer WPs and user ports than the station type called 10/10/1. Further below are station 10' considered to represent a general available connectionless switch and/or router as mentioned in figures 16, 17 and 18 and 10" is considered to represent an external network which users under one or more W-SENS networks can communicate via.
DSW in the figure generally refers to digital switching between beam elevations in point-point mode. Intermediate switching and or power distribution ISW/IDS. Radio frequency switching and/or distribution
RSW/PDS. I.e. refers to possible selections of antenna beams elevation in P-MP mode. These include protocols for FDM and/or TDM and/or FDMA and/or TDMA; This including spatial communication or not (fig.29). It includes possible realisation of virtual wireless access station functionality as central and/or terminal.
Figure 31 b, c
This figures complement the figure 31 a and visualise methods functions and means for establishing point - multipoint operation organised by a.WP and/or sub-WP including:
■ establishment of communication transfer capacity between one WP with more than one other WP
■ using equipment resource sharing of either a WP inclusive modem function and/or in addition using the sharing of radio heads for communication between one and multiple other WPs.
This arrangement include establishment of transfer capacity of various transfer speeds between WPs establishing communication with more then one other WP i.e. in P-MP mode of operation.
These P-MP modes of operation include methods functions and means for: ■ frequency (like no of sub-carriers selected and modulation level)
time (time segments in bursts at least from many in the direction to the shared WP on overlapping frequencies)
code (like operation on overlapping frequencies where channels of data information is applied and modulated on carriers including codes unique for each data channel to allow for carrying multiple data channels on overlapping frequency bands, CDMA, W-CDMA etc.)
frequency hopping (where the multiple scattered WPs are learnt to follow various selectable hopping schemes of carrier and/or carriers
combinations of sharing principles omni-directional antennas (including TDM/TDMA mode, FDM/FDMA mode, CDM (Code Division Multiplexing)/CDMA and or combinations.
spatial communication via directed antennas (etc.) between them as also been described in relation to figures 29 a, b, c, d, e. Figure 32 a, b, c
The figures visualise some additional information to figure 19 and its description. It show a use of an added protocol to carriers in this case demonstrated by two transfer channels Block a) and Block b) separated in time segment. In the example is Block "a" assumed to typically carry users data and Block "b" typically carry signalling, error detection, error corrections codes etc. repeatedly on each sub-channel, as also shown in figure 19.
In 32 b is shown how the various Blocks are separated in time with normally a higher number of bytes for data transfer and less number of bytes for signalling. It is also shown to include possible interruptions in the data flow to repeatedly occur when Bloch "b" (signalling information etc.) is transferred. It is visualise that a consecutive time interruption P1 is possible to co-ordinate under time of a Block "b". Method functions and means are included to allow a seamless transparent flow of user information etc. regardless of:
■ selection of time segments where changes of frequency (including repeatedly frequency hopping is used, changes of number of sub-carriers,
changes of modulation levels
* time to change selection of alternative codes on applied data
time segments realisation including frame structures
changes of modulation level, radio transmitter power level
I.e. changes as mentioned above are not unnecessarily interfering with ongoing data flow. Additionally including P1 timing applicable to TDMA applications where one or multiple timeframes between P1s is included to be possible to be used as time frames.
Figure 32 c shows principally that the illustrated time separation of blocks of various size on carriers to make mentioned functionality's applicable in addition include a transparent flow utilisation, a+b, by an overplayed logical protocol, if this is deemed applicable, as it may in cases for point-point WPs (sub-WPs) with very few changes of transfer speeds on carriers, number of carriers, frequency or where principally no error detection coding and/or error correction coding is applicable and/or where such coding is included in an overlayered protocol etc.
Regardless such a protocol is applicable or not by including the protocol (as a lower layer protocols) invisible for other than W-SENS application, carriers are prepared to be used in such a way if required. I.e. depending on the requirement and/or the air protocol required. Figure 32 d
Various types of integrated applications including services for data communication, telecommunication, media distribution etc. is thought to be applicable in W-SENS networks.
The idea with figure is to generally visualise methods functions and means included for establishing communication between ports:
■ traffic requirements between ports (UPs and/or TPs is identified either manually, and/or automatically measured and/or ■ mechanisms to adopt the transfer rate in the W-SENS network for required transfer capacity is applied (by routing between stations, bandwidth allocation, modulation level adjustment etc. per pair of WPs involved)
■ WPs are arranged at station to establish transparent synchronous communication between corresponding stations and respective WPs
bandwidth and transfer capacity is selected in the In and out direction of each WP (exemplified between station 10 and 11 out represents at10+bt10 and in ar11 +br11 )
, manually and/or automatically selection of transfer capacity is included applicable depending on user requirements quality of service etc. possible routing alternatives etc.
The port 100 is visualising an example of a port operating at a capacity in dual direction of Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or STM - 1 etc. The WP from station 10 - 11 is at the time shown set to an unbalanced rate indicating more transfer capacity being allocated from station 10 to 11 then the opposite way.
It is also visualised that if the WP of 10 where equipped for multiple directions either via a separate WP (or sub-WP) at 10 or via an P-MP arrangement of the same WP thet is used to station 11. The transfer capacity through the air between station 10 and 12 is shown to be differently selected in comparison to station 10 and 12. It is further illustrated that the capacity flow towards station 12 is less than in the opposite direction.
The dotted lined 100 TL indicates application of logical protocol from the station 10 to an applied WP, which is detectable at WP and appropriate, applied signalling, is transferable to the other corresponding station, included switching and/or routing instructions etc. 100 RL includes logical protocol from the WP to the station 10 and in fact it includes possible protocols from other stations concerned.
Any required signalling for stations, user ports terminal ports, network management ports etc. is applicable to be transferred between each pair of WPs. Communication protocols between pair of WP includes fast assignments and/or de-assignment of capacity, bandwidth in selected steps of sub- carriers, modulation level, error coding.
IP addressing of communications unit identifications is included. Using connectionless switching based on IP leads to the possible include of addressing set-up supervision and control from any port 210/2107200 and or user ports (100 etc.) as well.
Figure 33
The figure shows an example of one of many possible ways of realisation of functions of a basic station and/or WP function, based on the method and sub-methods mentioned. It is just shown as an example to verify the possibility to realise a W-SENS approach based on a limited number of basic functional core units. It is of course only one example and many other possibilities to realise stations WPs ports etc. would be possible.
The use of connectionless switching is considered in the example.
A fast switching and/or routing functional unit 2* typically arranged for high capacity transfer and fast switching routing capability is shown in the figure. A number of ports are principally shown be to be possible to connect to 2*. The number and the specific types of ports would depend in actual requirement type or ports and connections to 2* could vary from installation to installation. A possible network management port 210olP is visualised. Thus, considering as an example figure 31 a and figure 33 it is shown how data from a local application can be transferred via the switch to a number of possible WPs to the wanted direction and corresponding WP and station.
The figure generally illustrates the multiple direction and multiple possible switching alternatives for local and/or remote transferees possible. Incoming data (on CH1 ..CH3) from another station and WP arrives from the air via the antenna system, receiver, demodulator, re-packing functions unit DTO etc. entering into the switch functions 2*. Received to the switch in packet forms this data can either be possible to control to be terminated fully or partly at a location via one or several ports (PTE) or transferred to port 1 PTE. It can in addition fully or partly be transferred to the same or another WP, i.e. eventually in another direction via one or a number of ports (PAI).
Methods functions and means include: co-ordination of transferees through WPs on overlapping directions which either risks to interfere and/or actually interfere with other WPs or sub- WPs is to co-ordinated is at least controllable via frequency bandwidth selection for any WP timing control between WPs operating in P-MP mode on overlapping frequencies
means for other counter measures to handle interference and/or optimise transfer quality in general is applicable for WP transfers. speed control (or modulation level or type) per sub-channel, frequency bandwidth control, coding, and error correction.
controlling the balance of traffic requirements between WPs and stations in order to make it possible to deliver multiple communications service transfers with priority between users and or application and/or types of transfers, example seamless synchronous or synchronous data is higher prioritised than interactive data.
An example given below shows the possible capacity strengths of a W- SENS solution. Consider the use of a switching functional unit platform 2* that can support high capacity ports, include connection of 10 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet standard ports (and/or indirectly transport of standard ATM SDH SONET ports up to at least 155 Mbit/s). Further estimates that such switch function would be capable of. switching multiple 1 Gbit/s ports and that all basic switch functions could be physically realised in one or a few chip sets i.e. at neglected production cost and size. Thus, every W-SENS stations would be capable of transferring (switch/route) multiple of Gbit/s through the air lets exemplify the effect using a switch capacity of about 10-16 Gigabit/s. I.e. each new station at each new location is potential increasing the total transfer capacity in the air for a geographical region considerable and in addition it allow for multiple more routes to be applied by using multiple WPs. Thus every new station is potentially adding capacity to be possible to be utilised by other stations and users in a certain geographical area and/or it allow expansion of the area service coverage. New station allow shortened hop lengths, increased routing alternatives, reduced transmission power, increased spectrum utilisation etc. which is further helping to better utilise every such new station for the air and/or potentially for the ground application (at customers locations as well) in combination.
Example, a group of 10.000 stations (16 Gbit/s x 10.000) spread in a city represents a total switching and potential transfer capacity through the air of
160 Terabit/s.
In order to control the flow between the ports of 2* and to control communications between WP are a functional processing unit included where software programs include to execute the mentioned method function and means in combination with hardware and firm ware included. In the example given is such functional unit represented by 566/1. It is connected to the switch 2* and it performs its control of other functional units typically via the switch. I.e. the ability to interact between data to be transmitted and or received via the air is managed via an interaction between DTI, DTO and 566/1. The functional units shown could be a built in microprocessor for each WP or optionally the process and control mechanism may be running on another processor located at another switch, and or WP etc. I.e. the mentioned processor 566/1 may also include functions to handle similar processes for other switches at other stations and their WPs etc. Optionally network management ports include connection via processing unit port 210.
The shown fast switch allow transparent flow of data between is ports, 1 PA yPAI and 1 PTE..xPTE for synchronous or asynchronous type of data flows requirements with a minimum delay, i.e. to allow for traffic routing to pass multiple stations with insignificant time delays for most standards application. Internal buffer memories are considered built in and additional memories are included for functions as describer fig 12. 551/M, i.e. applicable to increase the efficiently of handling interactive data transfer bandwidth allocations.
DIR and DIT interfaces represent the digital serial format towards the air transmission functions. The functional units for data that is organised for air transmission, including functions for protocol analyse volume analyse for bandwidth requirements, re-structure of received data are represented by DTO and DTI.
Additional signalling is applicable to the data flow between WPs for the actual control of communication between WPs. DIQR and DIQT represent digital interfaces towards modulator (567) and demodulator (552) arrangements.
The signal 2110T* represent transmit control functional signals including of settings of the transfer flow between the actual WPs and/or sub-WPs (like fig 5 570) etc. for various types of WPs for point - point or point - multipoint modes of operation. This includes control of data to be transmitted, buffer memory performance - overload etc. based on queuing on buffer memory, detection of capacity requirement of prioritised data transfer - like synchronous and seamless synchronous communication, quality performance etc. I.e. it represents the base for speed control - modulation level settings, level of error detection and correction, etc. i.e. to balance the actual transfer requirement through the air with the actual traffic capacity and type of traffic to be transferred via the WPs. The signal 2101 R* represent receive control including and supervision of received data quality, instructions from the corresponding data received quality at the actual site including receiving of quality performance of the other end, receive of instructions from the other end regarding modulation changes, carrier changes, coding changes, frequency changes etc. The internal control and signalling of respective WPs transmission devices including antenna control is represented generally by 2101 , 2102, 2103. An internal and/or externally applied memory function supposed to handle interactive data transfer under the time the transfer rate available between WPs are less than peek data allowed is visualised by 551/M and/or 551 MUP (figure 5).
As an example only considering a port 1 PTE is applicable to Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbit/s in and out to the WP) and that 200 Mbit/s is the maximum capacity to be possible to transfer in each direction between a specific pair of WPs. Consider that synchronised and/or seamless data applied to be transferred is "tagged" with appropriate IP signalling i.e. which would allow such data packets to be analysed at WP to indicate the transfer rate required to arrange to allow for a transparent transfer in real time. If the transfer volume is considered to be transferred in such particular case is detected to be about 50 Mbit/s and the maximum capacity where 200 Mbit/s and if 70 Mbit/s where already allocated for similar traffic (synchronous). The available transfer capacity for interactive data communication remaining would be about 200 -(70+50)= 80 Mbit/s.
Methods functions and means is applied for analysing data transfer requirements considered being required to be sent as real time data and/or interactively.
One example is to "tag" and detect real time data with protocols higher priority than other data. Method functions and means are thus included to enable handling of differently tagged data separated:
■ data applied for interactivity accepting variable delays and speeds is possible to differentiate from data requiting constant speeds
data transfers accepting variable speeds include the routing via intermediate memories 551 M etc. to handle the traffic peaks by smoothing out the transfer time delay when the capacity through WPs is less then a temporary need
control of delay performance, statistics on accumulated bits/bytes etc. on 551 M is included
record transfer volume requirements is to watch the load on memory (551 M) associated between the PTE port and the DIT.
data requiring synchronous and/or seamless synchronous transfer capacity between ports is analysed and it is secured that enough data capacity is assigned for such transfer under the time the requirement occur
xxxxxxx
Traffic terminated to users and/or other station functions is here market 100T and 100R etc. or traffic to and from WP and other WPs are generally market 110T and 110R etc. Alternative marking of the ports are 1 PAl...yPAI which is aimed for the air and the ports to other WPs or stations functions. The ports 1 PTE ....xPTE represents the ports to other station functions or and/or user applications. The type of interfaces considered to be included is as an example full duplex Ethernet 1000 Mbit/s and/or 100 Mbit/s full duplex and/or half duplex and/or 10 Mbit/s half duplex.
The packet decoder could include support of Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3/802.2 SNAP, IEEE 803.3/802.2, Netware 802.3 RAW for IPX only. Error indication encapsulation type Ipv4 and Ipv6 indication and the IP header checksum result.
The switch function 2* would be possible as an example to manufactured highly integrated or as an ASIC circuit basically which in addition may include principally other at least logical electronics functional blocks of the exemplified station. The use of highly integrated components would make it possible assign WPs or stations virtually on roof tops behind a small antenna system for high frequency radio (typically > 10 GHz) or laser heads for such transmission means. Radio heads laser transmitters receivers etc. on high frequencies where at least radio heads should be possible to design for highly integrated lowest possible transmission power level and dissipation making it economically and physically attractive to connect them at antennas horns. Thus directly assigned to stations and or WPs on antennas or separated via intermediate cables as been previously described.
This could be specifically valuable to arrange as it reduces RF loss and the required output power of the radio head to a minimum. Methods functions and means are included to basically use platforms of low power radio heads but make it possible to reach longer: ■ use of highly integrated low power basic radio heads
■ add extra radio transmission power when needed at specific horns/antennas etc. by the use of adding optional buffer power amplifier
■ disconnect added buffer radio power amplifiers when appropriate routing alternatives occurs
Gradually would less need for the added power amplifiers be required when new hops are established. The radio extra buffer radio level would be possible to reduce in emission in accordance and possibly disconnected at certain time and re-used if needed. This is to illustrate one of many practical implementation arrangements to realise systems based on the W-SENS method efficiently.
At the top of the figure is generally visualised how data principally could be applied from user traffic PTx, how signalling for the other WP is originated by a real or distant virtual 566/1 and applied on two of the sub-channels in the example. However this is only general examples and may have nothing to do with actual application of information on sub-carriers. A similar case is shown for the received data. It also include signalling information from a corresponding WP (shown as 2110R*) which could be used at appropriate processing function 566/1 and/or transferred further.
Methods functions and means as well as some various possible implementation examples into system solutions have been shown applicable for a new communications network approach serving scattered users by utilising wireless communication, radio and light-wave effectively. The method include:
■ adaptive wireless connections in pair of ports between stations
■ stations equipped including fast and high capacity switches which could the ports of switches to communicate with users and/or the air for communication with users connected other stations
■ comprehensive network architectures with self growing capabilities virtually adaptable to unlimited topologies.
No other known wireless solution could offer a similar capacity, flexibility, cost and frequency effectiveness.
Examples of some of the included features as shown in this document for such networks are: ■ Supports synchronous transfer balanced and unbalanced communication in/out of each WP
■ Support seamless synchronous transfer - as voice image transfer based on IP protocols
■ Supports transparent transfer of applied synchronous signals based on other protocols than IP, i.e. ATM, SDH, SONET, transfer of synchronous signals based on ITU-T access and/or transmission specifications, media distribution J-PEG of various formats etc.
■ Support asynchronous transfer - effective share of capacity even at peak loads Increasingly more and more cost effective the more users connected - shorter hops less electromagnetic power required
■ Increasingly more transfer capacity and/or better utilisation of frequency spectrum the more users connected - higher modulation level and higher transfer rate adoptions with shorter hop between stations, more routing alternatives
■ Effective and gradually increased frequency reuse - the more stations the more variations in elevations and the shorter the hops the less transmission power to maintain transmission quality ■ Effective and increased transfer capability - modulation speed and number of possible routes are increased
■ Effective and increased redundancy - the routing alternatives are increased with increasing number of stations applied in an area ■ Increased possible capability in the air by the gradual increased possible number of termination points to other backbone - as this offloads some traffic as its nearest termination point becomes possible to alternate or becoming closer and the need to transfer bulks of data through the air is generally decreased ■ Automatic network capacity expansion with increased possibility to serve more users the more users served with further wireless connections and/or switching/routing capability of other traffic,
■ multi frequency arrangement of each station including various radio wave carriers and light waves, B applicable to work as backbone for external wireless access solution - by letting other access system utilise any of the switching functions of a station
■ applicable to work as extension to fibre based communication - as high capacity including 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and up against 1000 Mbit/s transparent transfer for multiple users is applicable
■ applicable to replace fibre based solution - based on the extreme high area capacity capability, cost effectiveness even for short hops, quickness to establish, upgrade or remove according to various requirements ■ applicable to replace traditional radio links - for fixed communication bandwidth between points only
■ supports resource sharing in space, elevation, frequency - power regulation, planning rescheduling of routes increase possible increased variation in elevations, shortens hops, increase the possibility to transfer on higher speeds to maintained quality
■ supports equipment resource sharing of radio and or radio and modem in time and/or frequency and/or code - by the use of variations of P-MP schemes
supports both spatial and optionally omni-directional approaches - by the use of directed narrow beam antennas, laser beams etc., sector antennas
supports access connection
support broadcast traffic
■ supports end to end communication between users connected to the stations also without routing via a network hierarchy -
supports all to all communication between stations - i.e. any station that radio optically can see another one can also principally be connected

Claims

1. A station for wireless switching and communication comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
2. A station according to claim 1, wherein the wireless port has a controllable bandwidth.
3. A station according to claim 2, wherein the bandwidth is controlled by means of an OFDM modem.
4. A station according to claim 3, wherein the bandwidth utilised by the modem is controlled by varying the number of subchannels used, varying the modulation type and/or level, varying the transmission power, varying the error correction, and/or varying the antenna gain and/or polarisation.
5. A station according to claim 4, wherein the OFDM modem is adapted to control the transmission power of the subchannels so that it simulates the profile of a single carrier channel. 6. A station according to claim 2, wherein the wireless port is capable of emulating various wireless standards and protocols and resource sharing schemes such as FDMA, TDMA, spread spectrum, f equency hopping or CDMA or combinations of them.
7. A station according to claim 2, wherein the wireless port is capable of adapting the bandwidth utilised in response to external control signals and/or quality measurements and/or available bandwidth.
8. A station according to claim 7, comprising a memory for intermediate storing data when peaks of data between wireless ports are higher than the bandwidth available between wireless ports. 9. A station according to claim 3, 6, or 7, wherein the wireless port comprises a directional and/or adaptive antenna system for SDMA.
10. A station according to claim 9,wherein the antenna system is arranged to provide a number of main lobes in wanted directions for each wireless port.
11. A station according to claim 10,wherein a wireless port is arranged to select directions which may overlap in area and time with another parallel wireless port with either separation in frequency and/or time segments.
12. A station according to claim 10,wherein a wireless port is arranged to control lobes in specific selected directions in selected time fragments with time division.
13. A station according to claim 1, ftirther comprising a network management port (NMP) for communication with an external network management unit.
14. A station according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit is capable of switching so fast that only negligible delays occur. 15. A station according to claim 14, wherein the switching unit is capable of switching 10, 100, and 1000 Mbit/s of data.
1 . A station according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit is adapted both to connectionless and circuit-oriented switching and conversion therebetween.
17. A station according to claim 16, wherein the connectionless switching is based on packet switching and/or IP protocols.
18. A station according to claim 16, wherein the circuit-oriented switching is based on ATM.
19. A station according to claim 16, wherein the switching unit is adapted to convert a synchronous flow that shall be transmitted over the station to an appropriate asynchronous form with an appropriate signalling protocol including addresses for such transfer, including means to apply IP signalling protocols.
20. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, ftirther comprising a network management unit capable of adding and deleting stations in the network.
21. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein some stations are capable of functioning as repeating and terminal stations.
22. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, ftirther comprising an external switching unit for controlling the internal switching units of the stations. 23. A network according to claim 22, wherein the external switching unit is adapted to set up alternative routes between stations.
24. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein complementary parallel routes are set up between pairs of stations.
25. A network according to claim 24, wherein one complementary parallel route is a radio channel, e.g. low bandwidth microwave, and the other complementary parallel route is a high bandwidth laser channel.
26. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein some stations are capable of establishing point to multipoint communication.
27. A network according to claim 26, wherein a wireless port is adapted to work as a central for other wireless ports, sharing its capacity with a number of underlying wireless ports, such underlying wireless ports being able to commonly share its capacity with the central wireless port.
28. A network according to claim 26, wherein a wireless port, which is sharing its capacity with other stations, and working as an underlying wireless port to these other stations is adapted to share its transmission resource capacity with other stations as a central.
29. A network according to claim 26, wherein a wireless port which is working as an underlying station towards a central is adapted to work as an underlying wireless port to other central wireless ports.
30. A network according to claim 26, wherein some stations are capable of establishing multipoint to multipoint communication.
31. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein the network is capable of emulating generic access systems.
32. A network according to claim 31 , wherein a wireless port is adapted to be connected to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufacturer's base station. 33. A network according to claim 31 , wherein a wireless port is adapted to be comiected to a station arranged to operate as if it was a station in a wireless access system and to manage appropriate standards for the access system and/or such station's interaction with other switching and/or routing systems.
34. A network arrangement consisting of stations that can establish communication between each other through ports to/from external users or networks including transactions through the air, which stations include switching and may include routing functions and may include a selected number of wireless ports (WP) consisting of modems and transmitters/receivers for electromagnetic transactions where: a total network functionality is formed by a switching/routing network and a wireless network, where the switching/routing units may allocate required bandwidth and speed for transactions through a wireless communication network, including adaptation of various wireless transaction capacities between selected ports according to traffic requirements detected by switches in the total network, where the wireless network, which is formed by an aggregated number of ports located at a selected number of stations, include adaptive capacity assignment capability.
35. A port unit for wireless switching and communication for connection to a station having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, the port unit comprising a modem and a radio unit and being arranged to be controlled by a control program through the station to which it is connected.
PCT/SE2000/001950 1999-10-07 2000-10-06 Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor WO2001024600A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU79801/00A AU7980100A (en) 1999-10-07 2000-10-06 Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
SE9903603-0 1999-10-07
SE9903603A SE9903603D0 (en) 1999-10-07 1999-10-07 W-sense

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001024600A2 WO2001024600A2 (en) 2001-04-12
WO2001024600A3 WO2001024600A3 (en) 2001-11-15
WO2001024600A9 true WO2001024600A9 (en) 2002-09-06

Family

ID=20417264

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/SE2000/001950 WO2001024600A2 (en) 1999-10-07 2000-10-06 Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor

Country Status (3)

Country Link
AU (1) AU7980100A (en)
SE (1) SE9903603D0 (en)
WO (1) WO2001024600A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB0103274D0 (en) * 2001-02-09 2001-03-28 Nokia Networks Oy A data communication system
US7164667B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2007-01-16 Belair Networks Inc. Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
DE10347231A1 (en) * 2003-10-07 2005-05-04 Univ Ilmenau Tech Data transmission device e.g. for multi hop radio network, has base station and several relay stations and mobile station with components equipped with antenna array
US20050221813A1 (en) * 2004-04-05 2005-10-06 Jarno Rajahalme System and method for initiating auxiliary communication interfaces via a primary communication interface
JP2010504032A (en) 2006-09-15 2010-02-04 タレス アビオニクス インコーポレイテッド System and method for wirelessly transferring content to and from aircraft
US8995573B1 (en) 2012-10-23 2015-03-31 Dragonwave, Inc. Octagonal quadrature amplitude modulation
US9847828B2 (en) 2013-12-18 2017-12-19 X Development Llc Adjusting beam width of air-to-ground communications based on distance to neighbor balloon(s) in order to maintain contiguous service
CN114979285B (en) * 2022-05-10 2024-02-27 百果园技术(新加坡)有限公司 Service calling method, device, equipment, system, storage medium and product

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5623495A (en) * 1995-06-15 1997-04-22 Lucent Technologies Inc. Portable base station architecture for an AD-HOC ATM lan
WO1997048191A1 (en) * 1996-06-13 1997-12-18 Broadband Networks Inc. Wide-area wireless distribution system
US5991284A (en) * 1997-02-13 1999-11-23 Qualcomm Inc. Subchannel control loop

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
SE9903603D0 (en) 1999-10-07
AU7980100A (en) 2001-05-10
WO2001024600A2 (en) 2001-04-12
WO2001024600A3 (en) 2001-11-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Alimi et al. Toward an efficient C-RAN optical fronthaul for the future networks: A tutorial on technologies, requirements, challenges, and solutions
US6597668B1 (en) System and method for maximizing efficiency in a time division duplex system employing dynamic asymmetry
RU2158490C2 (en) Distributed radio communication system
Chia et al. The next challenge for cellular networks: Backhaul
US8223726B2 (en) Metropolitan wide area network
EP0999717A2 (en) Broadband wireless mesh topology network
CA2271675C (en) System and method for broadband millimeter wave data communication
US20020077151A1 (en) Polymorphic cellular network architecture
US20090029645A1 (en) Multi-Tier Backhaul Network System with Traffic Differentiation and Advanced Processing Capabilities and Methods Therefor
JP2002529017A (en) Broadband wireless mesh topology network
CN101222746B (en) For the system and method for allocated channel in the wireless network
AU8383898A (en) A wireless system for providing symmetrical, bidirectional broadband telecommunications and multimedia services employing a computer-controlled radio system
CN107637027B (en) System, method and storage medium for communication between base stations in a radio access network
RU2117395C1 (en) Method for wide-range communication system and wide-range communication system which implements said method
HU215310B (en) Method for operating tdma digital wide area radio system with at least two subsystems
EP0990329A1 (en) Metropolitan wide area network
US7242907B2 (en) System and method for inband signaling for sector synchronization in a wireless communication system
JP4657719B2 (en) Optimization mechanism for frequency reuse
Zhang et al. Low latency integrated point-to-multipoint and E-band point-to-point backhaul for mobile small cells
JP4852208B2 (en) Multi-layer communication network
WO2001024600A9 (en) Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor
Wu et al. Overview of WiMAX Standards and Applications
IL134107A (en) Metropolitan wide area network
Bandeira et al. Broadband wireless network overcomes line-of-sight (LOS) constraints and lowers deployment cost
WO2009107144A1 (en) A method and system for channel assignment in rural wireless mesh networks

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGES 10-72, DESCRIPTION, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 10-119; PAGES 73-76, CLAIMS, RENUMBERED AS 120-123;DUE TO LATE TRANSMITTAL BY THE RECEIVING OFFICE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP